This is MoDOT's Engineering Policy Guide Test Site. Do not use the information on this site. Click Here to access MoDOT's current Engineering Policy Guide.

903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B): Difference between revisions

From Engineering_Policy_Guide
Jump to navigation Jump to search
← Older edit
HogsettC (talk | contribs)
Editor, Modot
2,242 edits
 
(322 intermediate revisions by 5 users not shown)
Line 1: Line 1:
[[image:903.1 Extent of Signing.jpg|left|350px]]
[[Category:903 Highway Signing (MUTCD Part 2)|903.02]]
{| align="right" style="margin-left: 15px; max-width: 690px;"
| __TOC__
|}
=={{SpanID|903.2.1}}903.2.1  Application of Regulatory Signs (MUTCD Section 2B.01)==


==903.2.1 Sign Function and Purpose (MUTCD Section 2A.01)==
'''Standard. '''Regulatory signs shall be used to inform road users of selected traffic laws or regulations and to indicate the applicability of the legal requirements.


'''Support.'''  The functions of signs are to regulate, warn and guide road users.  Words, symbols and arrows are used to convey the messages.  Signs are not typically used to confirm rules of the road. Detailed sign requirements are available for:
Regulatory signs shall be installed at or near where the regulations apply. The signs shall clearly indicate the requirements imposed by the regulations and shall be designed and installed to provide adequate visibility and legibility in order to obtain compliance.


:1. Regulatory signs
Regulatory signs shall be retroreflective or illuminated (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.21|EPG 903.1.21]]).
:2. Warning signs
:3. Guide signs for conventional roads
:4. Guide signs for freeways and expressways
:5. General information signs
:6. General service signs
:7. Specific service (LOGO) signs
:8. Tourist-oriented direction signs
:9. [https://epg.modot.org/index.php?title=616.6_Temporary_Traffic_Control_Zone_Devices_%28MUTCD_6F%29#616.6.60_Portable_Changeable_Message_Signs_.28MUTCD_6F.60.29 Changeable message signs]
:10. Recreational and cultural interest area signs
:11. Emergency management signs
:12. Typical applications
:13. Sign supports.


Signing of all interstate highways is coordinated on a national basis and signing of highways other than the interstate system is coordinated on a statewide bases by MoDOT.
=={{SpanID|903.2.2}}903.2.2  Design of Regulatory Signs (MUTCD Section 2B.02)==


'''Standard.''' Because the requirements and standards for signs depend on the particular type of highway upon which they should be used, the definitions for freeway, expressway and conventional roads given in [[:Category:900 TRAFFIC CONTROL#900.1.13 Definitions of Headings, Words and Phrases in the EPG 900 articles (MUTCD Section 1A.13)|EPG 900.1.13 Definitions of Headings, Words and Phrases]] shall apply to all signing.
'''Standard. '''Regulatory signs shall be rectangular unless specifically designated otherwise in the EPG. Regulatory signs shall be designed in accordance with the sizes, shapes, colors, and legends contained in the FHWA “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911 General (MUTCD Part 1) #911.1.5|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]).


Any exceptions or requests for any sign not described in this article shall be submitted to the Highway Safety and Traffic Engineer for consideration.
'''Support. '''The use of educational plaques to supplement symbol signs is described in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.9|EPG 903.1.9]].


==903.2.2 Definitions (MUTCD Section 2A.02)==
The use of LEDs in the border or legend of regulatory signs is described in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.12|EPG 903.1.12]].
'''Support'''.  Definitions and acronyms that are applicable to signs are in [[:Category:900 TRAFFIC CONTROL#900.1.13 Definitions of Headings, Words and Phrases in the EPG 900 articles (MUTCD Section 1A.13)|EPG 900.1.13 Definitions of Headings, Words and Phrases]].


==903.2.3 Standardization of Application (MUTCD Section 2A.03)==
'''Standard. '''LED signs displaying a part-time prohibitory message incorporating a red circle and diagonal of a static sign shall display a red symbol that approximates the same red circle and diagonal as closely as possible. The symbol of the action to be prohibited shall be displayed in white LEDs on a black background.


'''Support.'''  Urban traffic conditions differ from rural conditions and in many instances signs are applied and located differently.  Where pertinent and practical, this article sets forth separate recommendations for urban and rural conditions.
A regulatory sign displayed entirely with LEDs and incorporated within the border of a larger full-matrix changeable message sign shall display the regulatory sign legend in the size, shape, color, and legend of the standard regulatory sign.


'''Guidance.'''  Signs should be used only where justified by engineering judgment or studies.  Results from traffic engineering studies of physical and traffic factors should indicate the locations where signs are deemed necessary or desirable.
=={{SpanID|903.2.3}}903.2.3 Size of Regulatory Signs (MUTCD Section 2B.03)==


Roadway geometric design and sign application should be coordinated so that signing can be effectively placed to give the road user any necessary regulatory, warning, guidance, and other information.
'''Standard. '''Except as provided in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.7|EPG 903.1.7]], the minimum sizes for regulatory signs shall be as shown in [[#tab903.2.3|Table 903.2.3]].
'''Standard.''' Each standard sign shall be displayed only for the specific purpose as prescribed in this article. Determination of the particular signs to be applied to a specific condition shall be made according to the provisions set forth in this article. Before any new highway, detour or temporary route is opened to public travel, all necessary signs shall be in place. Signs required by road conditions or restrictions shall be removed when those conditions cease to exist or the restrictions are withdrawn.


==903.2.4 Excessive Use of Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.04)==
'''Support. ''' [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.7|EPG 903.1.7]] contains information regarding the applicability of the various columns in [[#tab903.2.3|Table 903.2.3]].


'''Guidance.''' Regulatory and warning signs should be used conservatively because these signs, if used to excess, tend to lose their effectiveness.  If used, route signs and directional guide signs should be used frequently because their use promotes efficient operations by informing travelers of their location.  
'''Guidance. '''The minimum sizes for regulatory signs facing traffic on exit and entrance ramps at interchanges should be as shown in the column of [[#tab903.2.3|Table 903.2.3]] that corresponds to the mainline roadway classification (Expressway/Freeway).  


==903.2.5 Classification of Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.05)==
'''Standard. '''The minimum size for WRONG WAY and DO NOT ENTER signs on ramps facing the opposite direction of travel where a road user could wrongly enter the ramp from a conventional road shall be the size listed in the Conventional Road - Standard column of [[#tab903.2.3|Table 903.2.3]].  See [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.37|EPG 903.2.37]] and [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.38|903.2.38]] for additional information.
'''Standard.'''  Signs shall be defined by their function as follows:


A. Regulatory signs give notice of traffic laws or regulations.
'''Option. '''The minimum size for WRONG WAY and DO NOT ENTER signs on ramps facing the opposite direction of travel where a road user could wrongly enter the ramp from a conventional road may be increased to the size in the Conventional Road – Oversized column of [[#tab903.2.3|Table 903.2.3]] when the need for greater emphasis has been determined based on engineering judgement.


B. Warning signs give notice of a situation that might not be readily apparent.
{{SpanID|tab903.2.3}}
 
{| class="wikitable" style="text-align: center"
C. Guide signs show route designations, destinations, directions, distances, services, points of interest and other geographical, recreational, or cultural information.
 
The order classification of signs shall be defined as follows (refer to Fig 903.2.5):
 
'''1. First Order Signing.'''  Signs that are installed in advance of the closest intersection or interchange where motorists turn off of the state highway system to arrive at the desired traffic generator or site. First order signing will always be on state right of way.
 
'''2. Second Order Signing.''' Signs that are installed in advance of the intersection or interchange where motorists turn to access the highway where the first order signing is provided. Second order signing will always be on state right of way and shall
require the use of first order signing on state right of way.
 
'''3. Third Order Signing.'''  Signs that are installed in advance of the intersection or interchange where motorists turn to access the highway where the second order signing is provided. Third order signing will always be on state right of way and shall require the use of first order and second order signing on state right of way.
[[image:Figure 903.1.12.2.gif|center|frame|thumb|<center>'''Figure 903.2.5  Sign Order Classification'''</center>]]
'''Support.'''  In general, as the “order” of signing increases, the functional classification of road stays the same or increases.  For example, if first order signing is on a four-lane U.S. route, second order signing should be on another U.S. route, expressway or a freeway.  In this example case, second order signing should not be placed on a two-lane lettered route.
 
==903.2.6 Sign Design (MUTCD Section 2A.06)==
 
'''Support.'''  EPG 903 shows many typical standard signs approved for use on streets, highways, bikeways and pedestrian crossings.
 
In the specifications for individual signs, the general appearance of the legend, color and size are shown in the accompanying tables and illustrations, and are not always detailed in the text.
 
Detailed drawings of all highway signs and alphabets are provided by Central Office Highways Safety and Traffic Division.
 
A highway sign must be legible to those for whom it is intended and be understandable from a distance to permit a proper response.  It is desirable for it to be highly visible by day and night and highly legible (e.g., adequately sized letters, symbols or arrows and a short legend for quick comprehension by a road user approaching a sign).  Standardized colors and shapes are specified so that the several classes of traffic signs can be promptly recognized.  Simplicity and uniformity in design, position, and application are important.
 
'''Standard.'''  The term legend shall include all word messages and symbol and arrow designs that are intended to convey specific meanings. 
 
Uniformity in design includes shape, color, dimensions, legends, borders and illumination or retroreflectivity.
 
Standardization of these designs does not preclude further improvement by minor changes in the proportion or orientation of symbols, width of borders, or layout of word messages, but all shapes and colors shall be as indicated.
 
All symbols shall be unmistakably similar to, or mirror images of, the adopted symbol signs, all of which are shown in EPG 903. Symbols and colors shall not be modified unless otherwise provided in the EPG. All symbols and colors for signs not shown in the EPG and SMS Sign Catalog shall follow the procedures for experimentation and change described in EPG 903.
 
'''Option.''' Although the standard design of symbol signs cannot be modified, the orientation of the symbol may be changed to better reflect the direction of travel, if appropriate.
 
'''Standard. '''Where a standard word message is applicable, the wording shall be as provided in this article. 
 
In situations where word messages are required other than those provided in this article, the signs shall be of the same shape and color as standard signs of the same functional type.
 
'''Option.''' MoDOT, with the approval of Central Office Highway Safety and Traffic Division, may develop special word message signs in situations where roadway conditions make it necessary to provide road users with additional regulatory, warning or guidance information, such as when road users need to be notified of special regulations or warned about a situation that might not be readily apparent. Unlike colors that have not been assigned or symbols that have not been approved for signs, new word message signs may be used without the need for experimentation.
 
'''Standard.''' Expect as provided in this article and except for the Carpool Information sign, internet addresses and e-mail addresses, including domain names and uniform resource locators (URL), shall not be displayed on any sign, supplemental plaque, sign panel (including logo sign panels on Specific Service signs) or changeable message sign. 
 
'''Guidance.'''  Unless otherwise provided in this article for a specific sign or as provided in the Option below, telephone numbers with more than four characters should not be displayed on any sign, supplemental plaque, sign panel (including logo sign panels on Specific Service signs) or changeable message sign.
 
'''Option.'''  Internet addresses, email addresses or telephone numbers with more than four characters may be displayed on signs, supplemental plaques, sign panels, and changeable message signs that are intended for viewing only by pedestrians, bicyclists, occupants of parked vehicles, or drivers of vehicles on low-speed roadways where engineering judgment indicates that an area is available for drivers to stop out of the traffic flow to read the message. 
 
'''Standard.''' Pictographs shall not be displayed on signs except as specifically provided in this article. Pictographs shall be simple, dignified and devoid of any advertising. When used to represent a political jurisdiction (such as a county or municipal corporation) the pictograph shall be the official designation adopted by the jurisdiction. When used to represent a college or university, the pictograph shall be the official seal adopted by the institution. Pictorial representations of university or college programs shall not be permitted to be displayed on a sign
 
==903.2.7 Types of Fabricated Signs==
 
'''Support.'''  There are two types of sign material available, structural (ST) and sheet (SH).
 
Sheet signs are sheet aluminum, usually one-piece units, and have several available thicknesses as indicated in the standard plans.
 
Structural signs are usually made of multiple extruded panels.  These signs are used primarily for guide signs on expressways and freeways, but may be found on other routes on a limited basis, and are used on all overhead-mounted signs, including “LOW CLEARANCE” and exit number panels, signs greater than 6 ft. wide, and signs greater than 30 sq. ft. in area.
 
Extruded panels are composed of a 1 ft. tall "E" shaped aluminum substrate, assembled to a desired height and cut to a uniform width for each sign.  These panels are bolted together to form the larger “blank” substrate needed for structural signs.
 
==903.2.8 Sign ID Labels==
'''History. ''' The display of the MoDOT ID label on the front of the sign was standard practice on all signs produced by the MoDOT Sign Production Center (SPC) up to its closing mid-2012 when MoDOT first began outsourcing the production of signs for maintenance operations.  MoDOT’s sign fabrication vendors were also required to apply the traditional MoDOT ID on the front of the sign identifying it as Commission Property and listing the penalty for tampering and/or theft.  The requirement to add the MoDOT ID label to signs fabricated and installed for construction projects was added to the standard plans in July of 2018.
 
Beginning mid-2012 with the first sign outsourcing contract, MoDOT’s sign fabrication vendors were also required to add a manufacture ID label on the back of every sign to indicate who fabricated the sign and the date the sign was produced for warranty issues.  The warranty of a sign begins the day it was fabricated, not the day it is installed as sign sheeting has a limited life span (10-15 years) so this date is critical to address warranty issues.  The manufacturing date can also be used by the department to help manage inventory and assure the oldest sign on the shelf are used first.  July 2018 the requirement to add the manufacture ID was added to the standard plans so all signs manufactured and installed on construction projects would include this ID label as well.
 
Digital printing has been an option with our sign outsourcing contract since 2012.  Digital printing is not currently part of our standard plans for contract/warranty issues, it was added to the sign outsourcing contract as a controlled way for the department to gain experience with the technology before adopting it as fabrication technology in our standards.  With the renewal of the outsourcing contract in 2018, an additional ID label was added as a requirement for our vendor to make the identification of digitally printed signs easier.  A black diamond is required to be applied to the back side of any sign the vendor chooses to fabricate using digital printing technology.  While there are ways to identify digitally printed signs, the clues are very subtle, and you must be up close to the sign face to see them.  The black diamond on the back side of the sign allows the department to quickly identify these signs from a distance.
 
The design and location of the vendor ID/fabrication date label and the MoDOT ID label can be found in Standard Plans 903 and the detail for the digital print ID label are found in the sign outsourcing contract.
 
'''Standard.''' Every MoDOT sign, regardless of the type or style, shall have two Identification Labels on the sign. This applies to signs manufactured for maintenance operations as well as those manufactured for construction installations.  The first label is the MoDOT ID label placed on the front of the sign which identifies the sign as belonging to MoDOT and defining the penalty for tampering with the sign. The second label is the Vendor ID label placed on the back of the sign and identifies who fabricated the sign, their contact information and the date the sign was manufactured.
 
'''Support.'''  The MoDOT ID label on the front of the sign is used to identify the sign as belonging to MoDOT.  MoDOT does not sell or give away its signs, only disposing old signs as scrap (see [[#903.2.21.1 Sign Disposal|EPG 903.2.21.1 Sign Disposal]]).  If a person is found in possession of a sign(s) with the MoDOT ID label the sign is considered stolen and the label is utilized by law enforcement to take the necessary actions. 
 
The Vendor ID label placed on the back of the sign is used to identify who manufactured the sign and when it was fabricated.  This information is used if there is a warranty issue identified with the sign.  The warranty for sign sheeting is based on the fabrication date.  The fabrication date also permits MoDOT warehouse managers to identify and utilize the oldest stock signs first to assure stock is rotated.
 
Identification Label design and placement details are shown in Standard Plan 903.02, see Figure 903.2.8 for ID label general appearance.
[[image:903.2.7.1.jpg|center|700px]]
<center>'''Figure 903.2.8, MoDOT ID and Vendor ID Labels for Signs'''</center>
 
==903.2.9 Retroreflectivity and Illumination (MUTCD Section 2A.07)==
 
'''Support.'''  There are many materials currently available for retroreflection (see Fig. 903.2.9.1 and Fig. 903.2.9.2) and various methods currently available for the illumination of signs.  New materials and methods continue to emerge.  New materials and methods can be evaluated as long as the signs meet the standard requirements for color, both by day and by night.
[[image:903.2.9.1 2020.jpg|center|825px|thumb|'''<center>Fig. 903.2.9.1'''</center>
<center>FHWA Publication Number: FHWA-SA-14-022. You may download and print the electronic version of this document, available at https://safety.fhwa.dot.gov/roadway_dept/night_visib/.</center>''']]
 
[[image:903.2.9.2 2020.jpg|center|695px|thumb|'''<center>Fig. 903.2.9.2'''</center>]]
 
There are two types of reflective sheeting available to MoDOT:
 
:1) MoDOT Type III High Intensity Prismatic (R2)
:2) MoDOT Type VII Prismatic (R4).
 
For special sign designs, the type of reflective sheeting is noted on the special sign detail sheet (indicated as “BACKGROUND”).
 
'''Standard.'''  Regulatory, warning, guide signs and object markers shall be retroreflective or illuminated to show the same shape and similar color by both day and night, unless otherwise provided in this article for a particular sign or group of signs.
 
The requirements for sign illumination shall not be considered to be satisfied by street or highway lighting.
 
'''Guidance.'''  Generally, R2 sheeting should be used on all sign backgrounds.  R3 sheeting should be used on all legend and symbols on guide signs.
 
Overhead sign installations should not be illuminated unless an engineering study shows a need for illumination, e.g. fog prone areas.
 
'''Option.'''  Light-emitting diode (LED) units may be used individually within the legend or symbol of a standard highway sign and in the border of a standard highway sign, except for Changeable Message Signs, to improve the conspicuity, increase the legibility of sign legends and borders or provide a changeable message. 
 
'''Standard.'''  Except for STOP signs, YIELD signs, STOP/SLOW paddles or STOP/STOP paddles, neither individual LEDs nor groups of LEDs shall be placed within the background area of a sign.
 
If used, the LEDs shall have a maximum diameter of 0.25 in. and shall be the following colors based on the type of sign:
 
:1) White or red, if used with STOP or YIELD signs.
:2) White, if used with regulatory signs other than STOP or YIELD signs.
:3) White or yellow, if used with warning signs.
:4) White, if used with guide signs.
:5) White, yellow, or orange, if used with temporary traffic control signs.
:6) White or yellow, if used with school area signs.
 
If flashed, all LED units shall flash simultaneously at a rate of more than 50 and less than 60 times per minute. 
 
The uniformity of the sign design shall be maintained without any decrease in visibility, legibility or driver comprehension during either daytime or nighttime conditions.
 
'''Option.''' For STOP and YIELD signs, LEDs may be placed within the border or within one border width within the background of the sign.
 
For STOP/SLOW paddles used by flaggers and the STOP paddles used by adult crossing guards, individual LEDs or groups of LEDs may be used.
 
'''Support.''' Other methods of enhancing the conspicuity of standard signs are described in [[#903.2.17 Enhanced Conspicuity for Standard Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.15)|EPG 903.2.17]].
 
Information regarding the use of retroreflective material on the sign support is contained in [[#903.2.17 Enhanced Conspicuity for Standard Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.15)|EPG 903.2.17 Enhanced Conspicuity for Standard Signs]].
 
==903.2.10 Maintaining Minimum Retroreflectivity  (MUTCD Section 2A.08)==
'''Support.''' Retroreflectivity is one of several factors associated with maintaining nighttime sign visibility.
 
'''Standard.''' Public agencies or officials having jurisdiction shall use an assessment or management method that is designed to maintain sign retroreflectivity at or above the minimum levels in Table 903.2.10.
 
<center>
===''Table 903.2.10 Minimum Maintained Retroreflectivity Levels''<sup>1</sup>===
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|+
! style="background:#BEBEBE" rowspan="3"|Sign Color!! style="background:#BEBEBE" colspan="4"|Sheeting Type (ASTM D4956-04) !! style="background:#BEBEBE" rowspan="3"|Additional Criteria
|-
!colspan="3" style="background:#BEBEBE" |Beaded Sheeting !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Prismatic Sheeting
|-
! style="background:#BEBEBE"|I!!style="background:#BEBEBE"|II!!style="background:#BEBEBE"|III!! style="background:#BEBEBE"|III, IV, VI, VII, VIII, IX, X 
|-
|rowspan="2" align="center"|White on Green||align="center"|W*; G ≥ 7||align="center"|W*; G ≥ 15||align="center"|W*; G ≥ 25||align="center"|W ≥ 250; G ≥ 25||align="center"|Overhead
|-
|align="center"|W*; G ≥ 7||colspan="3" align="center"|W ≥ 120; G ≥ 15||align="center"| Post-mounted
|-
|rowspan="2" align="center"|Black on Yellow or Black on Orange||align="center"|Y*; O*||colspan="3" align="center"|Y ≥ 50; O ≥ 50||align="center"|<sup>'''2'''</sup>
|-
|-
|align="center"|Y*; O*||colspan="3" align="center"|Y ≥ 75; O ≥ 75||align="center"|<sup>'''3'''</sup>
|+ Table 903.2.3, Regulatory Sign and Plaque Sizes
! rowspan="2" | Sign or Plaque
! rowspan="2" | Sign Designation
! rowspan="2" | EPG Article
! colspan="3" | Conventional Road (in. x in.)
! Freeway/Expressway (in. x in.)
|-
|-
|align="center"|White on Red||colspan="4" align="center"|W ≥ 35; R ≥ 7||align="center"|<sup>'''4'''</sup>
! style="text-align:left;"| Standard
! Oversized
! Special
! Mainline and Ramps
|-
|-
|align="center"|Black on White||colspan="4" align="center"| W ≥ 50||align="center"| -
! style="text-align:left;"| Stop
| R1-1
| [[#903.2.4|903.2.4]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
| 48 X 48
|-
|-
|colspan="6" align="left"|<sup>'''1'''</sup> The minimum maintained retroreflectivity levels shown in this table are in units of cd/lx/m<sup>2</sup> measured at an observation angle of 0.2° and an entrance angle of -4.0°.
! style="text-align:left;"| Yield
| R1-2
| [[#903.2.5|903.2.5]]
| 48 X 48 X 48
| 60 X 60 X 60
| -
| 60 X 60 X 60
|-
|-
|colspan="6" align="left"|<sup>'''2'''</sup> For text and fine symbol signs measuring at least 48 in. and for all sizes of bold symbol signs
! style="text-align:left;"| To Oncoming Traffic (plaque)
| R1-2aP
| [[#903.2.5|903.2.5]]
| 36 X 30
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|colspan="6" align="left"|<sup>'''3'''</sup> For text and fine symbol signs measuring less than 48 in.
! style="text-align:left;"| All-Way (plaque)
| R1-3P
| [[#903.2.4|903.2.4]]
| 30 X 12
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|colspan="6" align="left"|<sup>'''4'''</sup> Minimum sign contrast ratio ≥ 3:1 (white retroreflectivity ÷ red retroreflectivity)
! style="text-align:left;"| Yield Here To Pedestrians
| R1-5
| [[#903.2.18|903.2.18]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|colspan="6" align="left"|<sup>'''*'''</sup> This sheeting type shall not be used for this color for this application.
! style="text-align:left;"| Yield Here to Trail Crossing
| R1-5d
| [[#903.2.18|903.2.18]]
| 36 X 42
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
!style="background:#BEBEBE" colspan="6"|Bold Symbol Signs
! style="text-align:left;"|  In-Street Pedestrian Crossing - Yield
| R1-6
| [[#903.2.19|903.2.19]]
| 12 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|colspan="2"|W1-1, 2 - Turn and Curve||colspan="2"|W2-7, 8 - Double Side Roads||colspan="2"|W11-2 - Pedestrian Crossing
! style="text-align:left;"| In-Street Trail Crossing - Yield
| R1-6d
| [[#903.2.19|903.2.19]]
| 12 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|colspan="2"|W1-3, 4 - Reverse Turn and Curve||colspan="2"|W3-1 - Stop Ahead||colspan="2"|W11-3, 4, 16-22 - Large Animals
! style="text-align:left;"| Speed Limit
| R2-1
| [[#903.2.20|903.2.20]]
| 36 X 48
| 48 X 60
| -
| 48 X 60
|-
|-
|colspan="2"|W1-5 - Winding Road ||colspan="2"|W3-2 - Yield Ahead||colspan="2"|W11-5 - Farm Equipment
! style="text-align:left;"| Combined Speed Limit
| R2-4a
| [[#903.2.21|903.2.21]]
| -
| -
| -
| 48 X 96
|-
|-
|colspan="2"|W1-6, 7 - Large Arrow||colspan="2"|W3-3 - Signal Ahead||colspan="2"|W11-6 - Snowmobile Crossing
! style="text-align:left;"| Speed Limit _ Except Where Posted
| R2-5d
| [[#903.2.22|903.2.22]]
| 36 X 48
| -
| -
| 36 X 48
|-
|-
|colspan="2"|W1-8 - Chevron||colspan="2"|W4-1 - Merge||colspan="2"|W11-7 - Equestrian Crossing
! style="text-align:left;"| Fines Doubled Ends
| R2-20
| [[#903.2.71|903.2.71]]
| 36 X 30
| -
| -
| 36 X 30
|-
|-
|colspan="2"|W1-10 - Intersection in Curve||colspan="2"|W4-2 - Lane Ends||colspan="2"|W11-8 - Fire Station
! style="text-align:left;"| No Right Turn
| R3-1
| [[#903.2.24|903.2.24]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 24 X 24 - 30 X 30
| 48 X 48
|-
|-
|colspan="2"|W1-11 - Hairpin Curve||colspan="2"|W4-3 - Added Lane||colspan="2"|W11-10 - Truck Crossing
! style="text-align:left;"| No Left Turn
| R3-2
| [[#903.2.24|903.2.24]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 24 X 24 - 30 X 30
| 48 X 48
|-
|-
|colspan="2"|W1-15 - 270 Degree Loop||colspan="2"|W4-5 - Entering Roadway Merge||colspan="2"|W12-1 - Double Arrow
! style="text-align:left;"| No Turns
| R3-3
| [[#903.2.24|903.2.24]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 24 X 24 - 30 X 30
| 36 X 36
|-
|-
|colspan="2"|W2-1 - Cross Road||colspan="2"|W4-6 - Entering Roadway Added Lane||colspan="2"|W16-5P, 6P, 7P - Pointing Arrow Plaques
! style="text-align:left;"| No U Turn
| R3-4
| [[#903.2.24|903.2.24]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 24 X 24 - 30 X 30
| -
|-
|-
|colspan="2"|W2-2, 3 - Side Road||colspan="2"|W6-1, 2 - Divided Highway Begins and Ends ||colspan="2"|W20-7 - Flagger
! style="text-align:left;"| Right (Left/Ahead) Only
| R3-5, 5a
| [[#903.2.26|903.2.26]]
| 30 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|colspan="2"|W2-4, 5 - T and Y Intersection||colspan="2"|W6-3 - Two-Way Traffic||colspan="2"|W21-1 - Worker
! style="text-align:left;"| Straight and Right (Left)
| R3-6
| [[#903.2.27|903.2.27]]
| 30 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|colspan="2"|W2-6 - Circular Intersection||colspan="2"|W10-1, 2, 3, 4, 11, 12 - Grade Crossing Advance Warning|| colspan="2" align="center"| -
! style="text-align:left;"| Optional Movement U and Left Turn
| R3-6a
| [[#903.2.27|903.2.27]]
| 30 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
!style="background:#BEBEBE" colspan="6"|Fine Symbol Signs (symbol signs not listed as bold symbol signs)
! style="text-align:left;"|  Optional Movement Left Turns
| R3-6b
| [[#903.2.27|903.2.27]]
| 30 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
!style="background:#BEBEBE" colspan="6"|Special Cases
! style="text-align:left;"|  Right (Left) Lane Must Turn Right (Left)
| R3-7
| [[#903.2.26|903.2.26]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|colspan="6"|W3-1 - Stop Ahead:  Red retroreflectivity ≥ 7
! style="text-align:left;"| Advance Intersection Lane Control
| R3-8,8a,8b,8xa, 8xb,8xc
| [[#903.2.28|903.2.28]]
| Varies X 30
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|colspan="6"|W3-2 - Yield Ahead:  Red retroreflectivity ≥ 7; White retroreflectivity ≥ 35
! style="text-align:left;"| Two-Way Left Turn Only (overhead)
| R3-9a
| [[#903.2.29|903.2.29]]
| 30 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|colspan="6"|W3-3 - Signal Ahead:  Red retroreflectivity ≥ 7; Green retroreflectivity ≥ 7
! style="text-align:left;"| Center Lane Two-Way Left Turn Only (post-mounted)
| R3-9b
| [[#903.2.29|903.2.29]]
| 24 X 36
| 36 X 48
| -
| -
|-
|-
|colspan="6"|W3-5 - Speed Reduction:  White retroreflectivity ≥ 50
! style="text-align:left;"| No U Turn/No Left Turn
| R3-18
| [[#903.2.24|903.2.24]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 24 X 24 - 30 X 30
| -
|-
|-
|colspan="6"|For non-diamond shaped signs, such as W14-3 (No Passing Zone), W4-4P (Cross Traffic Does Not Stop), or W13-1P, 2, 3, 6, 7 (Speed Advisory Plaques), use the largest sign dimension to determine the proper minimum retroreflectivity level.
! style="text-align:left;"| No Straight Through
|}
| R3-27
</center>
| [[#903.2.24|903.2.24]]
'''Support.''' Compliance with this provision is achieved by having a method in place and using the method to maintain the minimum levels established in Table 903.2.10. Provided that an assessment or management method is being used, an agency or official having jurisdiction would be in compliance with this provision even if there are some individual signs that do not meet the minimum retroreflectivity levels at a particular point in time.
| 36 X 36
 
| 48 X 48
'''Guidance.''' Except for those signs specifically identified in this provision, the following assessment or management methods should be used to maintain sign retroreflectivity:
| 24 X 24 - 30 X 30
 
| 48 X 48
:Visual Nighttime Inspection – The retroreflectivity of an existing sign is assessed by a trained sign inspector conducting a visual inspection from a moving vehicle during nighttime conditions. Signs that are visually identified by the inspector to have retroreflectivity below the minimum levels should be replaced.
 
'''Support.''' Additional information about this method is contained in EPG 903.
 
==903.2.11 Shapes (MUTCD Section 2A.09)==
 
'''Standard.'''  Specific shapes, as shown in Table 903.2.11, shall be exclusively used for specific signs or series of signs unless otherwise provided for a particular sign or class of signs.
 
====<center>''Table 903.2.11 Use of Sign Shapes''</center>====
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|+
! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Shape !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Signs
|-
|-
| Octagon|| Stop*
! style="text-align:left;"| Do Not Pass
| R4-1
| [[#903.2.31|903.2.31]]
| 36 X 48
|
| 36 X 48
| -
|-
|-
|Equilateral Triangle (1 point down)|| Yield*
! style="text-align:left;"| Pass With Care
| R4-2
| [[#903.2.32|903.2.32]]
| 36 X 48
|
| 48 X 60
| -
|-
|-
|Circle|| Grade Crossing Advance Warning*
! style="text-align:left;"| Slower Traffic Keep Right
| R4-3
| [[#903.2.33|903.2.33]]
| 36 X 48
| 48 X 60
| 48 X 60
| 48 X 60
|-
|-
|Pennant Shape/Isosceles Triangle        (longer axis horizontal)||No Passing*
! style="text-align:left;"| Keep Right
| R4-7
| [[#903.2.34|903.2.34]]
| 24 X 30
| 36 X 48
| 36 X 48
| 48 X 60
|-
|-
|Pentagon (Pointed up)||School Advance Warning Sign (squared bottom corners)*
! style="text-align:left;"| Keep Right (horizontal arrow)
| R4-7a
| [[#903.2.34|903.2.34]]
| 36 X 48
| 48 X 60
| 48 X 60
| 48 X 60
|-
|-
|Crossbuck  (two rectangles in an "x" configuration)|| Grade Crossing*
! style="text-align:left;"| Keep Right (45° arrow)
| R4-7b
| [[#903.2.34|903.2.34]]
| 36 X 48
| 48 X 60
| -
| 84 X 96
|-
|-
|Diamond|| Warning Series
! style="text-align:left;"| Narrow Keep Right
| R4-7c
| [[#903.2.34|903.2.34]]
| 18 X 30
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|Rectangle (including square)||Regulatory Series 
! style="text-align:left;"| Keep Left
Guide Series** 
| R4-8
| [[#903.2.34|903.2.34]]
Warning Series
| 24 X 30
| 36 X 48
| -
| 48 X 60
|-
|-
|Trapezoid||No longer used by MoDOT
! style="text-align:left;"| Keep Left (horizontal arrow)
| R4-8a
| [[#903.2.34|903.2.34]]
| 36 X 48
| 48 X 60
| -
| 48 X 60
|-
|-
|colspan="2"|* This sign shall be exclusively the shape shown.
! style="text-align:left;"|  Keep Left (45° arrow)
| R4-8b
| [[#903.2.34|903.2.34]]
| 36 X 48
| 48 X 60
| -
| 84 X 96
|-
|-
|colspan="2"|**Guide series includes general service, specific service, tourist-oriented directional, general information, recreation and cultural interest area, and emergency management signs.
! style="text-align:left;"| Narrow Keep Left
|}
| R4-8c
 
| [[#903.2.34|903.2.34]]
==903.2.12 Sign Colors (MUTCD Section 2A.10)==
| 18 X 30
[[image:903.1.18.jpg|right|400px]]
| -
 
| -
'''Standard.'''  The colors to be used on standard signs and their specific use on these signs shall be as provided in this article.  The color coordinates and values shall be as described in Tables 903.2.12.1 and 903.2.12.2 and in 23 CFR, Part 655, Subpart F, Appendix.
| -
 
'''Support.'''  As a quick reference, common uses of sign colors are shown in Tables 903.2.12.1 and 903.2.12.2.  Color schemes on specific signs are shown in the illustrations located in each appropriate section.
 
Whenever white is specified in the EPG and in the standard plans as a color, it is understood to include [http://www.trafficsign.us/reflidguide.pdf silver-colored retroreflective] coatings or elements that reflect white light.  The colors coral and light blue are being reserved for uses that will be determined in the future by the FHWA.  Information regarding color coding of destinations on guide signs, including community wayfinding signs, is contained in [https://epg.modot.org/index.php?title=903.7_Conventional_Road_Guide_Signs#903.7.3_Color.2C_Retroreflection,_and_Illumination_.28MUTCD_Section_2D.03.29 EPG 903.7.3 Color, Retroreflection, and Illumination].
 
'''Option.''' The approved fluorescent version of the standard red, yellow, green or orange color may be used as an alternative to the corresponding standard color.
 
====<center>''Table 903.2.12.1 Common Uses of Sign Legend Colors''</center>====
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:center"
|+
!style="background:#BEBEBE" rowspan ="2"|Type of Sign
!style="background:#BEBEBE" colspan="8"|Legend
|-
|-
!style="background:#BEBEBE" |Black!! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Green!!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Red !!style="background:#BEBEBE"|White!!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Yellow !!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Orange!!style="background:#BEBEBE" width="65"|Fluorescent Yellow-Green!!style="background:#BEBEBE" width="65"|Fluorescent Pink
! style="text-align:left;"| Keep Right Except to Pass
| R4-16
| [[#903.2.33|903.2.33]]
| 36 X 48
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|align="left"|Regulatory||X||-||X||X||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Do Not Drive on Shoulder
| R4-17
| [[#903.2.35|903.2.35]]
| 36 X 48
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|Prohibitive||-||-||X||X||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Next Passing Lane _ Miles
| R4-28
| [[#903.2.69|903.2.69]]
| -
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|Permissive||-||X||-||-||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| End Passing Lanes
| R4-29
| [[#903.2.69|903.2.69]]
| -
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|align="left"|Warning||X||-||-||-||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Do Not Enter
| R5-1
| [[#903.2.37|903.2.37]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
| 48 X 48
|-
|-
|Pedestrian||X||-||-||-||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Wrong Way
| R5-1a
| [[#903.2.39|903.2.39]]
| 42 X 30
| -
| -
| 42 X 30
|-
|-
|Bicycle||X||-||-||-||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| No Trucks
| R5-2
| [[#903.2.36|903.2.36]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|  
|-
|-
|align="left"|Guide||-||-||-||X||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Except Local Deliveries (plaque)
| R5-2aP
| [[#903.2.36|903.2.36]]
| 36 X 18
| -
| -
|  
|-
|-
|Interstate Route||-||-||-||X||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Engine Brake Muffler Required
| R5-23
| -
| 30 X 30
| -
| -
| 30 X 30
|-
|-
|State Route||X||-||-||-||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| No Fishing from Bridge
| R5-25
| [[#903.2.36|903.2.36]]
| 18 X 24
| -
| -
| 18 X 24
|-
|-
|US Route||X||-||-||-||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| No Dumping
| R5-28
| [[#903.2.66|903.2.66]]
| -
| -
| -
| 48 X 24
|-
|-
|County Route||-||-||-||-||X||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Authorized and Emergency Vehicles Only
| R5-29
| [[#903.2.36|903.2.36]]
| -
| -
| -
| 24 X 30
|-
|-
|Forest Route||-||-||-||X||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Do Not Stop on Tracks
| R5-31
| [[#903.2.45|903.2.45]]
| 24 X 30
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|Street Name||-||-||-||X||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| One Way
| R6-1
| [[#903.2.40|903.2.40]]
| 36 X 12
| 48 X 18
| -
| 48 X 18
|-
|-
|Destination||-||-||-||X||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| One Way
| R6-2
| [[#903.2.40|903.2.40]]
| 24 X 30
| 30 X 36
| -
| -
|-
|-
|Reference Location||-||-||-||X||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Divided Highway (4-legged)
| R6-3
| [[#903.2.41|903.2.41]]
| 30 X 24
| -
| -
| 36 X 30
|-
|-
|align="left"|Information||-||-||-||X||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Divided Highway (T-intersection)
| R6-3a
| [[#903.2.41|903.2.41]]
| 30 X 24
| -
| -
| 36 X 30
|-
|-
|Evacuation Route||-||-||-||X||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| No Parking Signs
| R7 series
| [[#903.2.43|903.2.43]]
| 18 X 24
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|Road User Service||-||-||-||X||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Reserved Parking
| R7-8
| [[#903.2.43|903.2.43]]
| 18 X 24
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|Recreational||-||-||-||X||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Van Accessible (plaque)
| R7-8aP
| [[#903.2.43|903.2.43]]
| 18 X 9
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|align="left"|Temporary Traffic Control<sup>'''1'''</sup>||X||-||-||-||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| No Parking on Bridge
| R7-35
| [[#903.2.43|903.2.43]]
| 18 X 24
| -
| -
| 18 X 24
|-
|-
|align="left"|Incident Management||X||-||-||-||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| No Parking Trucks and Trailers Over 6 Tons
| R7-36
| [[#903.2.62|903.2.62]]
| 18 X 24
| 36 X 48
| -
| -
|-
|-
|align="left"|School||X||-||-||-||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Tow Away Zone (plaque)
| R7-201P, R7-201ap
| [[#903.2.43|903.2.43]]
| 18 X 9
| -
|  
|  
|-
|-
|align="left"|ETC - Account Only||X||-||-||-||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| This Side of Sign (plaque)
| R7-202P
| [[#903.2.43|903.2.43]]
| 18 X 9
| -
| -
|  
|-
|-
|align="left"|Changeable Message Signs<sup>'''1'''</sup>||-||-||-||X||X||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Emergency Stopping Only
| R8-7
| [[#903.2.45|903.2.45]]
| 48 X 36
| -
| -
| 48 X 36
|-
|-
|Regulatory|| - || - ||X<sup>'''2'''</sup>||X||- ||- ||- ||-  
! style="text-align:left;"| No Pedestrian Crossing (symbol)
| R9-3
| [[#903.2.46|903.2.46]]
| 18 X 24
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|Warning|| - ||- ||- || - || X || - || - || -  
! style="text-align:left;"| No Pedestrian Crossing
| R9-3a
| [[#903.2.46|903.2.46]]
| 18 X 24
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|Temporary Traffic Control|| - ||- ||- || - || X || X || - || -  
! style="text-align:left;"| Pedestrian Signal Series
| R10-3 & R10-4 series
| [[#903.2.47|903.2.47]]
| 9 X 15
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|Guide|| - ||- ||- || X || - || - || - || -
! style="text-align:left;"| Left on Green Arrow Only
| R10-5
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
| 24 X 30
| 30 X 36
| -
| 30 X 36
|-
|-
|Motorist Services|| - ||- ||- || X || - || - || - || -  
! style="text-align:left;"| Stop Here on Red
| R10-6
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
| 24 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|Incident Management|| - ||- ||- || - || X || - || - || X
! style="text-align:left;"| Do Not Block Intersection
| R10-7
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
| 24 X 30
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|School, Pedestrian, Bicycle|| - ||- ||- || - || X || - || X || -  
! style="text-align:left;"| Right Turn Signal
| R10-10R
| -
| 30 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|colspan="9" align="left"|<sup>'''1'''</sup> Exceptions to fluorescent orange is detailed in the standard plans.
! style="text-align:left;"|  No Turn on Red
| R10-11
| [[#903.2.49|903.2.49]]
| 30 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|colspan="9" align="left"|<sup>'''2'''</sup> Red is used only for the circle and slash or other red elements of a similar static regulatory sign.
! style="text-align:left;"| Left Turn on Green (Ball)
|}
| R10-12
 
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
====<center>''Table 903.2.12.2 Common Uses of Sign Background Colors''</center>====
| 24 X 30
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:center"
| 30 X 36
|+
| -
! style="background:#BEBEBE" rowspan ="2"|Type of Sign
| 30 X 36
!style="background:#BEBEBE" colspan="11"|Background
|-
|-
!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Black!!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Blue!!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Brown!! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Green!!style="background:#BEBEBE" width=60|Fluorescent Orange!!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Red !!style="background:#BEBEBE"|White!!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Purple!!style="background:#BEBEBE" width=60|Flourescent Yellow!!style="background:#BEBEBE" width=60|Flourescent Yellow-Green!!style="background:#BEBEBE" width=60|Flourescent Pink
! style="text-align:left;"| Left Turn Yield on Flashing Yellow Arrow
| R10-12a
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
| 24 X 30
| 30 X 36
| -
| 30 X 36
|-
|-
|align="left"|Regulatory||X||-||-||-||-||X||X||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Emergency Signal
| R10-13
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
| 36 X 24
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|Prohibitive||-||-||-||-||-||X||X||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Emergency Signal Stop on Flashing Red
| R10-14
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
| 36 X 42
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|Permissive||-||-||-||-||-||-||X||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Emergency Signal - Stop on Flashing Red (overhead)
| R10-14a
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
| 60 X 24
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|align="left"|Warning||-||-||-||-||-||-||-||-||X||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Stop Here on Red
| R10-14b
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
| 24 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|Pedestrian||-||-||-||-||-||-||-||-||X|| - ||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Turning Vehicles Yield to Pedestrians
| R10-15
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
| 30 X 30
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|Bicycle||-||-||-||-||-||-||-||-||X|| - ||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Traffic Signal Photo Enforced
| R10-18a
| [[#903.2.56|903.2.56]]
| 30 X 42
| 36 X 54
| -
| -
|-
|-
|align="left"|Guide||-||-||-||X||-||-||-||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Photo Enforced (symbol plaque)
| R10-19P
| [[#903.2.56|903.2.56]]
| 24 X 12
| 48 X 24
| -
| -
|-
|-
|Interstate Route||-||X||-||-||-||X||-||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Crosswalk - Stop on Red
| R10-23
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
| 24 X 30
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|State Route||-||-||-||-||-||-||X||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Stop on Red - Yield on Flashing Red After Stop
| R10-23a
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
| 24 X 30
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|US Route||-||-||-||-||-||-||X||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Push Button for Warning Lights - Wait for Gap in Traffic
| R10-25
| [[#903.2.47|903.2.47]]
| 9 X 12
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|County Route||-||X||-||-||-||-||-||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| XX Vehicles per Green
| R10-28
| [[#903.2.50|903.2.50]]
| 24 X 30
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|Forest Route||-||-||X||-||-||-||-||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| XX Vehicles per Green Each Lane
| R10-29
| [[#903.2.50|903.2.50]]
| 36 X 24
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|Street Name||-||-||-||X||-||-||-||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Right Turn on Red Must Yield to U-Turn
| R10-30
| [[#903.2.49|903.2.49]]
| 30 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|Destination||-||-||-||X||-||-||-||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Right Turn Must Yield To U-Turn
| R10-30a
| [[#903.2.49|903.2.49]]
| 36 X 24
| -
| -
| -
|-
|-
|Reference Location||-||-||-||X||-||-||-||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Keep Off Median
| R11-1
| [[#903.2.51|903.2.51]]
| 48 X 60
| 48 X 60
| -
| -
|-
|-
|align="left"|Information||-||X||-||X||-||-||-||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Road Closed
| R11-2
| [[#903.2.52|903.2.52]]
| 48 X 30
|  
|  
| -
|-
|-
|Evacuation Route||-||X||-||-||-||-||-||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Road Closed _ Miles Ahead Local Traffic Only
| R11-3
| [[#903.2.52|903.2.52]]
| 60 X 30
|  
|  
| -
|-
|-
|Road User Service||-||X||-||-||-||-||-||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Road Closed to Thru Traffic
| R11-4
| [[#903.2.52|903.2.52]]
| 60 X 30
|  
|  
| -
|-
|-
|Recreational||-||-||X||X||-||-||-||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Weight Limit XX Tons
| R12-1
| [[#903.2.53|903.2.53]]
| 36 X 48
|  
|  
| 36 X 48
|-
|-
|align="left"|Temporary Traffic Control<sup>'''1'''</sup>||-||-||-||-||X||-||-||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Weigh Station Signs
| R13 series
| [[#903.2.54|903.2.54]]
| Varies
|  
|  
| Varies
|-
|-
|align="left"|Incident Management||-||-||-||-||X||-||-||-||-||-||X
! style="text-align:left;"| Truck Route
| R14-1
| [[#903.2.55|903.2.55]]
| 24 X 18
|  
|  
| -
|-
|-
|align="left"|School||-||-||-||-||-||-||-||-||-|-||X||-
! style="text-align:left;"| State Law Move Over or Slow Down for Stopped Emergency Vehicles
| R16-25
| [[#903.2.57|903.2.57]]
| 120 X 60
|  
|  
| 120 X 60
|-
|-
|align="left"|ETC-Account Only||-||-||-||-||-||-||-||X<sup>'''3'''</sup>||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Primary Seatbelt City/Country
| R16-27B
| -
| 30 X 36
|  
|  
| -
|-
|-
|align="left"|Changeable Message Signs<sup>'''1'''</sup>||-||-||-||-||-||-||-||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| State Law Buckle Up / Phone Down
| R16-30
| [[#903.2.59|903.2.59]]
| 48 X 30
|  
|  
| -
|-
|-
|Regulatory|| X || - ||-||-||- ||- ||- ||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| State Law Buckle Up / Phone Down
| R16-30a
| [[#903.2.59|903.2.59]]
| -
|  
|  
| 72 X 48
|-
|-
|Warning|| X || - ||-||-||- ||- ||- ||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Roadside Park Signs
| R20-1
| [[#903.2.66|903.2.66]]
| 30 X 30
|  
|  
| -
|-
|-
|Temporary Traffic Control|| X || - ||-||-||- ||- ||- ||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Rest Area Regulations
| R20-2
| [[#903.2.67|903.2.67]]
| 30 X 36
|  
|  
| -
|-
|-
|Guide|| X || - ||-||X<sup>'''2'''</sup>||- ||- ||- ||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Commuter Parking Regulations
| R20-3
| [[#903.2.67|903.2.67]]
| 42 X 48
|  
|  
| -
|-
|-
|Motorist Services|| X || X<sup>'''2'''</sup> ||-||-||- ||- ||- ||-||-||-||-
! style="text-align:left;"| Rest Area Signs
|-
| R20 Series
|Incident Management|| X || - ||-||-||- ||- ||- ||-||-||-||-
| [[#903.2.67|903.2.67]]
|-
|  
|School, Pedestrian, Bicycle|| X || - ||-||-||- ||- ||- ||-||-||-||-
|  
|-
|  
|colspan="12" align="left"|<sup>'''1'''</sup>  Exceptions to fluorescent orange is detailed in the standard plans.
| Varies
|-
|}
|colspan="12" align="left"|<sup>'''2'''</sup> These alternative background colors would be provided by blue or green lighted pixels such that the entire CMS would be lighted, not just the legend.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.4}}903.2.4  STOP Sign (R1-1) and ALL-WAY Plaque (R1-3P) (MUTCD Section 2B.04)==
 
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|-
|colspan="12" align="left"|<sup>'''3'''</sup> The use of the color purple on signs is restricted.
|[[image:R1-1.gif|left|120px|thumb|<center>'''R1-1'''</center>]]||[[File:R1-3P.gif|left|110px|thumb|<center>'''R1-3P'''</center>]]
|}
|}


==903.2.13 Dimensions (MUTCD Section 2A.11)==
'''Standard. '''When it is determined that a full stop is always required on an approach to an intersection, a STOP (R1-1) sign shall be used.
 
Secondary legends shall not be used on STOP sign faces.
 
The STOP sign shall not be displayed using a changeable message sign.


'''Support.'''  The ''MUTCD Standard Highway Signs and Markings'' book prescribes design details for up to five different sizes depending on the type of traffic facility, including bikeways. MoDOT has predetermined the sizes for all highway signs; refer to the appropriate EPG article. Smaller sizes are designed to be used on bikeways and some other off-road applications. Larger sizes are designed for use on freeways and expressways and can also be used to enhance road user safety and convenience on other facilities, especially on multi-lane divided highways and on undivided highways having five or more lanes of traffic and/or high speeds. The intermediate sizes are designed to be used on other highway types.
At intersections where all approaches are controlled by STOP signs (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.11|EPG 903.2.11]]), an ALL-WAY (R1-3P) supplemental plaque shall be mounted below each STOP sign. The ALL-WAY plaque shall have a white legend and border on a red background.


'''Standard.'''  The sign dimensions prescribed in the sign size table in various EPG articles shall be used unless engineering judgment determines that other sizes are appropriate.  Where engineering judgment determines that sizes smaller than the prescribed dimensions are appropriate for use, the sign dimensions shall not be less than the minimum dimensions specified in this article.  Where engineering judgment determines that sizes that are different than the prescribed dimensions are appropriate for use, standard shapes and colors shall be used and standard proportions shall be retained as much as practical.
Supplemental plaques with legends such as 2-WAY, 3-WAY, 4-WAY, or other numbers of ways shall not be used with STOP signs.


'''Guidance.''' Increases above the prescribed sizes should be used where greater legibility or emphasis is needed. If signs larger than the prescribed sizes are used, the overall sign dimensions should be increased in 12-inch increments.
'''Support. '''The use of the CROSS TRAFFIC DOES NOT STOP (W4-4P Series) and other plaques with variations of this legend is described in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.65|EPG 903.3.65]].


When supplemental plaques are installed with larger sized signs, a corresponding increase in the size of the plaque and its legend should also be made. The resulting plaque size should be approximately in the same relative proportion to the larger sized sign as the conventional sized plaque is to the conventional sized sign.
'''Guidance. '''The TRAFFIC FROM LEFT (RIGHT) DOES NOT STOP (W4-4aP) plaque or ONCOMING TRAFFIC DOES NOT STOP (W4-4bP) plaque should be used at intersections where STOP signs control all but one approach to the intersection, unless the only non-stopped approach is from a one-way street.


==903.2.14 Symbols (MUTCD Section 2A.12)==
'''Support. '''The design and application of Stop Beacons are described in [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.5|EPG 902.18.5]].


'''Standard.''' Symbol designs shall in all cases be unmistakably similar to those shown in the EPG and the ''MUTCD Standard Highway Signs and Markings'' book.
=={{SpanID|903.2.5}}903.2.5 YIELD Sign (R1-2) (MUTCD Section 2B.05)==


'''Support.''' New symbol designs are adopted by the Federal Highway Administration based on research evaluations to determine road user comprehension, sign conspicuity, and sign legibility.
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|[[image:R1-2.gif|left|120px|thumb|<center>'''R1-2'''</center>]]
||[[File:R1-2aP.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R1-2aP'''</center>|95px]]
|}


Sometimes a change from word messages to symbols requires significant time for public education and transition. Therefore, this article sometimes includes the practice of using educational plaques to accompany new symbol signs.  
'''Support. '''The YIELD sign requires road users to yield the right-of-way to other traffic on certain approaches to an intersection or on a two-way approach to a one-way section of roadway, such as a narrow bridge or underpass. Vehicles controlled by a YIELD sign need to slow down to a speed that is reasonable for the existing conditions or stop when necessary to avoid interfering with conflicting traffic.  


'''Guidance.''' An educational plaque should accompany new warning or regulatory symbol signs not readily recognizable by the public.  
'''Standard. '''The YIELD (R1-2) sign shall not be displayed using a changeable message sign.


'''Option.''' State and/or local highway agencies may conduct research studies to determine road user comprehension, sign conspicuity, and sign legibility.  
=={{SpanID|903.2.6}}903.2.6  General Considerations (MUTCD Section 2B.06)==


Educational plaques may be left in place as long as they are in serviceable condition.  
'''Support. '''Unsignalized intersections represent the most common form of intersection right-of-way control. Selection of control type might be impacted by specific requirements of State law or local ordinances.


'''Guidance.''' Although most standard symbols are oriented facing left, mirror images of these symbols should be used where the reverse orientation might better convey to road users a direction of movement.
Roundabouts and traffic circles are circular intersection designs and are not traffic control devices. The decision to convert an intersection from a conventional intersection to a circular intersection is an engineering design decision and not a traffic control device decision. As such, criteria for conversion from a conventional intersection to a circular intersection are not included in [[:Category:903 Highway Signing (MUTCD Part 2)|EPG 903]].  


'''Standard.''' A symbol used for a given category of signs (regulatory, warning or guide) shall not be used for a different category of signs, except as specifically authorized in this article.
'''Guidance. '''The type of traffic control used at an unsignalized intersection should be the least restrictive that provides appropriate levels of safety and efficiency for all road users.


Except as provided in this article, a recreational and cultural interest area symbol shall not be used on streets or highways outside of recreational and cultural interest areas.
'''Support. '''Some types of right-of-way control that can exist at an unsignalized intersection in order from the least restrictive to the most restrictive are the following:


A recreational and cultural interest area guide sign symbol shall not be used on any regulatory or warning sign on any street, road or highway.
::A. Yield control (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.9|EPG 903.2.9]]): YIELD signs are placed on all approaches (for a circular intersection), or in the median of a divided highway. The YIELD signs are placed on the minor road.


'''Option.''' A recreational and cultural interest area guide sign symbol may be used on a highway guide sign outside a recreational and cultural interest area to supplement a comparable word message for which there is no approved symbol for that message.
::B. Minor road stop control (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.10|EPG 903.2.10]]): STOP signs are typically placed on opposing approaches (for a four-leg intersection) or on a single approach (for a three-leg intersection). The STOP signs are normally placed on the minor road.  [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.7|EPG 903.2.7]] contains guidance on selecting the minor road.


==903.2.15 Word Messages (MUTCD Section 2A.13)==
::C. All-way stop control (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.11|EPG 903.2.11]]): STOP signs are placed on all approaches to the intersection.


'''Standard.''' Except as provided in [[#903.2.6 Sign Design (MUTCD Section 2A.06)|EPG 903.2.6 Sign Design]], all word messages shall use standard wording and letters as shown in this article, the EPG and the MUTCD ''Standard Highway Signs and Markings'' book. Any non-standard or variable sign shall be detailed by Central Office Highway Safety and Traffic Division.
'''Guidance. '''When selecting a form of intersection control, the following factors should be considered:
::A. Motor vehicle, bicycle, and pedestrian traffic volumes on all approaches'''; '''where the term units/day or units/hour is indicated, it should be the total of motor vehicle, bicycle, and pedestrian volume;
::B. Driver yielding behavior with regard to all modes of conflicting traffic, including bicyclists and pedestrians;
::C. Number and angle of approaches;
::D. Approach speeds;
::E. Sight distance available on each approach;
::F. Reported crash experience; and  
::G. The presence of a grade crossing near the intersection.


'''Guidance.''' Word messages should be as brief as possible and the lettering is to be large enough to provide the necessary legibility distance. A minimum specific ratio of 1 in. of letter height per 30 ft. of legibility distance should be used.  
'''Standard. '''YIELD or STOP signs shall not be used for speed control.


Abbreviations (refer to [[:Category:900 TRAFFIC CONTROL|EPG 900 Traffic Control]]) should be kept to a minimum.
Access to the state highway system from city streets, county roads or other significant private road approaches shall be controlled by installation of MoDOT STOP signs. Significant private roads are those that service 3 or more private residences.


Word messages should not contain periods, apostrophes, question marks, ampersands or other punctuation or characters that are not letters, numerals or hyphens unless necessary to avoid confusion.
'''Option. '''Stop signs, based on engineering judgment and a traffic study justifying the need, may be installed for a private road approach servicing fewer than 3 private residences, or a commercial entrance.


The solidus (slanted line or forward slash) is intended to be used for fractions only and should not be used to separate words on the same line of legend. Instead, a hyphen should be used for this purpose.
'''Standard. '''Because the potential for conflicting commands could create driver confusion, YIELD or STOP signs shall not be used in conjunction with any traffic control signal operation, except in the following cases:
::A. If the signal indication for an approach is a flashing red at all times;
::B. If a minor street or driveway is located within or adjacent to the area controlled by the traffic control signal, but does not require separate traffic signal control because an extremely low potential for conflict exists; or
::C. If a channelized turn lane is separated from the adjacent travel lanes by an island and the channelized turn lane is not controlled by a traffic control signal.  


'''Standard.''' Fractions shall be displayed with the numerator and denominator diagonally arranged about the solidus (slanted line or forward slash). The overall height of the fraction is measured from the top of the numerator to the bottom of the denominator, each of which is vertically aligned with the upper and lower ends of the solidus. The overall height of the fraction shall be determined by the height of the numerals within the fraction, and shall be 1.5 times the height of an individual numeral within the fraction.
STOP signs and YIELD signs shall not be installed on different approaches to the same unsignalized intersection if those approaches conflict with or oppose each other, except as provided for in Items A and B in the first paragraph of [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.9|EPG 903.2.9]].  


'''Support.''' The MUTCD ''Standard Highway Signs and Markings'' book contains details regarding the layouts of fractions on signs.
Portable or part-time STOP or YIELD signs shall not be used except for emergency and temporary traffic control zone purposes.  


'''Guidance.''' When initials are used to represent an abbreviation for separate words (such as “U S” for United States route), the initials should be separated by a space of between ½ and ¾ of the letter height of the initials. When an Interstate route is displayed in text form instead of using the route shield, a hyphen should be used for clarity, such as “I-70”.
A portable or part-time (folding) STOP sign that is manually placed into view and manually removed from view shall not be used during a power outage to control a signalized approach unless the maintaining agency establishes that the signal indication that will first be displayed to that approach upon restoration of power is a flashing red signal indication and that the portable STOP sign will be manually removed from view prior to resuming stop-and-go operation of the traffic control signal.  


'''Standard.''' All sign lettering shall be in upper-case letters as established in the EPG and the MUTCD ''Standard Highway Signs and Markings'' book unless otherwise provided in this article for a particular sign or type of message.
'''Option. '''When a STOP sign or YIELD sign is knocked down and it is not possible to repair the assembly immediately, a temporary sign of the same likeness (STOP sign for STOP and YIELD sign for YIELD) may be installed on a portable sign support at the location until the permanent assembly can be repaired. See [[:Category:948 Incident Response Plan and Emergency Response Management|EPG 948]] for additional information regarding Incident Response Planning.
The sign lettering for names of places, streets and highways shall be composed of a combination of lower-case letters with initial upper-case letters.


'''Support.''' Letter height is expressed in terms of the height of an upper-case letter. For mixed-case legends (those composed of an initial upper-case letter followed by lower-case letters), the height of the lower-case letters is derived from the specified height of the initial upper-case letter based on prescribed ratio. Letter heights for mixed-case legends might be expressed in terms of both the upper- and lower-case letters, or in terms of the initial upper-case letter alone. When the height of a lower-case letter is specified or determined from the prescribed ratio, the reference is to the nominal loop height of the letter. The term loop height refers to the portion of a lower-case letter that excludes any ascending or descending stems or tails of the letter, such as with the letters “d” or “q”. The nominal loop height is equal to the actual height of a non-rounded lower-case letter whose form does not include ascending or descending stems or tails, such as the letter “x.” The rounded portions of a lower-case letter extend slightly above and below the baselines projected from the top and bottom of such a non-rounded letter so that the appearance of a uniform letter height within a word is achieved. The actual loop height of a rounded lower-case letter is slightly greater than the nominal loop height and this additional height is excluded from the expression of the lower-case letter height.
'''Support. '''The use of STOP signs at grade crossings is described in [[913.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 8B) #913.2.4|EPG 913.2.4]] and [[913.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 8B) #913.2.5|EPG 913.2.5]].


'''Standard.''' When a mixed-case legend is used, the height of the lower-case letters shall be ¾ of the height of the initial upper-case letter.
[[914.2 Regulatory Signs (MUTCD Chapter 9B) #914.2.1|EPG 914.2.1]] contains provisions regarding the assignment of priority where a shared-use path crosses a roadway.


The unique letter forms for each of the Standard Alphabet series shall not be stretched, compressed, warped or otherwise manipulated.
=={{SpanID|903.2.7}}903.2.7  Determining the Minor Road for Unsignalized Intersections (MUTCD Section 2B.07)==


'''Support.''' [[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.4 Size of Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.04)|EPG 903.7.4 Size of Signs]] contains information regarding the acceptable methods of modifying the length of a word for a given letter height and series.
'''Guidance. '''The selection of the minor road to be controlled by STOP signs should be based on one or more of the following criteria:
::A. A roadway intersecting a highway,
::B. A roadway with the lower functional classification,
::C. A roadway with the lower traffic volume,
::D. A roadway with the lower speed limit, and/or
::E. A roadway that intersects with a roadway that has a higher priority for one or more modes of travel.


==903.2.16 Sign Borders (MUTCD Section 2A.14)==
When two roadways that have relatively equal volumes, speeds, and/or other characteristics intersect, the following factors should be considered in selecting the minor road for installation of STOP signs:
'''Standard.''' Unless otherwise provided, each sign illustrated in the EPG shall have a border of the same color as the legend, at or just inside the edge.
::A. Controlling the direction that conflicts the most with established pedestrian crossing activity or school walking routes;
::B. Controlling the direction that has obscured vision, dips, or bumps that already require drivers to use lower operating speeds;
::C. Controlling the direction that has the best sight distance from a controlled position to observe conflicting traffic; and
::D. Stopping the direction that has the longest distance of uninterrupted flow approaching the intersection.


The corners of all sign borders shall be rounded, except for STOP signs.
=={{SpanID|903.2.8}}903.2.8  Right-of-Way Intersection Control Considerations (MUTCD Section 2B.08)==


'''Guidance.''' A dark border on a light background should be set in from the edge, while a light border on a dark background should extend to the edge of the sign.
'''Guidance. '''Before converting to a more restrictive form of right-of-way control at an unsignalized intersection, the following alternative treatments to address safety, operational, or other concerns should be among those to be considered:
::A. Where stop controlled, installing Stop Ahead signs on the appropriate approaches to the intersection;
::B. Removing parking on one or more approaches;
::C. Removing sight distance obstructions;
::D. Installing signs along the major street to warn road users approaching the intersection;
::E. Relocating the stop line(s) and making other changes to improve the sight distance at the intersection;
::F. Installing measures designed to reduce speeds on the approaches;
::G. Installing an Intersection Control Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.2|EPG 902.18.2]]) or Stop Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.5|EPG 902.18.5]]) at the intersection to supplement STOP sign control;
::H. Installing a Warning Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3)]] on warning signs in advance of a stop-controlled intersection on major-street and/or minor-street approaches;
::I. Adding one or more lanes on a minor-street approach to reduce the number of vehicles per lane on the approach;
::J. Revising the geometrics at the intersection to channelize vehicular movements and reduce the time required for a vehicle to complete a movement, which could also assist pedestrians;
::K. Revising the geometrics at the intersection to add pedestrian median refuge islands and/or curb extensions;
::L. Installing roadway lighting if a disproportionate number of crashes occur at night;
::M. Restricting one or more turning movements on a full-time or part-time basis if alternate routes are available;
::N. Installing on the major street a pedestrian-actuated device: Warning Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]]), rectangular rapid-flashing beacon (see [[902.12 Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4L) #902.12.1|EPG 902.12.1]]), or In-Roadway Warning Lights (see [[902.20 In-Roadway Warning Lights (MUTCD Chapter 4U) #902.20|EPG 902.20]]), if pedestrian safety is the major concern;
::O. If the warrant is satisfied, installing all-way stop control;
::P. Installing a pedestrian hybrid beacon (see [[902.10 Pedestrian Hybrid Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4J) #902.10|EPG 902.10]]) on the major street to address pedestrian safety;
::Q. Installing a circular intersection; and
::R. Employing other alternatives, depending on conditions at the intersection.


==903.2.17 Enhanced Conspicuity for Standard Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.15)==
=={{SpanID|903.2.9}}903.2.9 Yield Control (MUTCD Section 2B.10)==
[[image:903.2.25.1 2015.jpg|right|575px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 903.2.17.1 Examples of Enhanced Conspicuity for Signs '''</center>]]


'''Option.''' Based upon engineering judgment, where the improvement of the conspicuity of a standard regulatory, warning, or guide sign is desired, any of the following methods may be used, as appropriate, to enhance the sign’s conspicuity (see Fig. 903.2.17.1):
'''Guidance. '''YIELD signs should be installed at an intersection when any of the following conditions apply:
::A. At the second intersection of a divided highway crossing or median break functioning as two separate intersections (see [[#fig903.2.41.2|Figure 903.2.41.2]]). In this case, a YIELD sign should be installed at the entrance to the second intersection.
::B. For a channelized turn lane that is separated from the adjacent travel lanes by an island, even if the adjacent lanes at the intersection are controlled by a highway traffic control signal or by a STOP sign.
::C. At an intersection where a special problem exists and where engineering judgment indicates the problem to be susceptible to correction by the use of the YIELD sign.
::D. On an approach to an intersection where the only permissible movement is a right-turn movement with an intersection geometry similar to a channelized right-turn lane or an approach to a roundabout.


A. Increasing the size of a standard regulatory, warning, or guide sign.
'''Support. '''YIELD signs are generally not to be installed at entrance ramps on MoDOT freeways or expressways where an acceleration lane is provided. The intention is for drivers to accelerate to improve merging traffic operation. YIELD signs may cause drivers to decelerate, thus negatively impacting merging traffic operation. For cloverleaf interchanges, the loop entrance ramps can result in low speeds on ramps and short weave sections. Therefore, YIELD signs are installed at cloverleaf interchanges.  


B. Doubling-up of a standard regulatory, warning, or guide sign by adding a second identical sign on the left-hand side of the roadway.
'''Standard. '''YIELD signs shall be used at a cloverleaf interchange where the in-loop traffic merges with the acceleration and deceleration traffic movement.  


C. Adding one or more red flags (cloth or retroreflective sheeting) above a standard regulatory or warning sign, with the flags oriented so as to be at 45 degrees to the vertical.
'''Option. '''YIELD signs may be installed facing the entering roadway for a merge-type movement if engineering judgment indicates that control is needed because acceleration geometry and/or sight distance is not adequate for merging traffic operation. The design criteria contained in Section 10.9.6.5 of the “AASHTO Green Book – A Policy on Geometric Design Of Highways and Streets,” 7th Edition, 2018, AASHTO should be used to evaluate acceleration lane geometry. (See [[903.15 Typical Signing Applications #fig903.16.23|Figure 903.15.23]]).


D. Adding a solid fluorescent yellow rectangular plaque above a standard regulatory sign, with the width of the panel corresponding to the width of the standard regulatory sign.  A legend of “NOTICE” may be added in black letters within the plaque determined by engineering judgment (see [[903.6 Warning Signs#903.6.58 NOTICE Plaque (W16-18P) (MUTCD Section 2A.15)|EPG 903.6.58 NOTICE Plaque]]).
'''Standard. '''A YIELD sign shall be used to require road users to yield the right-of-way to other traffic at the entrance to a roundabout. YIELD signs at roundabouts shall be used to control the approach roadways and shall not be used to control the circulatory roadway.  


E. Adding a diagonally striped black and fluorescent yellow strip of retroreflective sheeting around the perimeter of a standard warning sign.  
YIELD signs shall not be placed on all of the approaches to an intersection, except at roundabouts.


F. Adding a warning beacon (see [[:Category:902 Signals|EPG 902 Signals]]) to a standard regulatory (other than a STOP or a Speed Limit sign), warning, or guide sign.
=={{SpanID|903.2.10}}903.2.10  Minor Road Stop Control (MUTCD Section 2B.11)==


G. Adding a speed limit sign beacon (see EPG 902) to a standard Speed Limit sign.
'''Standard.''' All city street and county road access to the state highway system shall be controlled by a stop sign except as described in [[#903.2.9|EPG 903.2.9]] and [[:Category:902 Signals|EPG 902]].


H. Adding a stop beacon (see EPG 902) to a STOP sign.
=={{SpanID|903.2.11}}903.2.11  All-Way Stop Control (MUTCD Section 2B.12)==


I. Adding light emitting diode (LED) units within the symbol or legend of a sign or border of a standard regulatory, warning, or guide sign, as provided in [[#903.2.9 Retroreflectivity and Illumination (MUTCD Section 2A.07)|EPG 903.2.9]].
'''Support. '''The provisions in the following sections describe warrants for the recommended engineering study to determine all-way stop control. Warrants are not a substitute for engineering judgment. The fact that a warrant for a particular traffic control device is met is not conclusive justification to install or not install all-way stop control. Because each intersection will have unique characteristics that affect its operational performance or safety, it is the engineering study for a given intersection that is ultimately the basis for a decision to install or not install all-way stop control.


J. Adding a strip of retroreflective material to the sign support. The retroreflective strip is an aluminum sub straight 4 in. wide and 6 ft. long mounted to sign support directly below the sign.  The color of the retroreflective materials shall match the background color of the sign, expect that the color of the strip for YIELD and DO NOT ENTER signs shall be red.
All-way stop controls at intersections with substantially differing approach volumes can reduce the effectiveness of these devices for all roadway users.


K. Using other methods that are specifically allowed for certain signs as described elsewhere in the EPG.
'''Guidance. '''The decision to establish all-way stop control at an unsignalized intersection should be based on an engineering study. The engineering study for all-way stop control should include an analysis of factors related to the existing operation and safety at the intersection, the potential to improve these conditions, and the applicable factors contained in the following all-way stop control warrants:
[[image:903.2.25.2 2020.jpg|right|425px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 903.2.17.2 Example of WATCH FOR APPROACHING TRAFFIC Signing '''</center>]]
::A. All-Way Stop Control Warrant A: Crash Experience (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.12|EPG 903.2.12]])
::B. All-Way Stop Control Warrant B: Sight Distance (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.13|EPG 903.2.13]])
::C. All-Way Stop Control Warrant C: Transition to Signal Control or Transition to Yield Control at a Circular Intersection (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.14|EPG 903.2.14]])
::D. All-Way Stop Control Warrant D: 8-Hour Volume (Vehicles, Pedestrians, Bicycles) (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.15|EPG 903.2.15]])
::E. All-Way Stop Control Warrant E: Other Factors (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.16|EPG 903.2.16]])


'''Support.''' Sign conspicuity improvements can also be achieved by removing non-essential and illegal signs from the right of way (see [[:Category:900 TRAFFIC CONTROL|EPG 900]]), and by relocating signs to provide better spacing.
'''Standard. '''The satisfaction of an all-way stop control warrant or warrants shall not in itself require the installation of all-way stop control at an unsignalized intersection.


'''Standard.''' Strobe lights shall not be used to enhance the conspicuity of highway signs.  
=={{SpanID|903.2.12}}903.2.12 All-Way Stop Control Warrant A: Crash Experience (MUTCD Section 2B.13)==


If installed for improvement of the conspicuity of intersection signing, the WATCH FOR APPROACHING TRAFFIC (special) sign shall be used, see Fig. 903.2.17.2.  
'''Option. '''All-way stop control may be installed at an intersection where an engineering study indicates that:
::A. For a four-leg intersection, there are five or more reported crashes in a 12-month period or six or more reported crashes in a 36-month period that were of a type susceptible to correction by the installation of all-way stop control.
::B. For a three-leg intersection, there are four or more reported crashes in a 12-month period or five or more reported crashes in a 36-month period that were of a type susceptible to correction by the installation of all-way stop control.


If plaques are used, they shall be installed below the main sign, up to two plaques.
=={{SpanID|903.2.13}}903.2.13  All-Way Stop Control Warrant B: Sight Distance (MUTCD Section 2B.14)==


A warning beacon shall be set on steady flash if a problem would occur with the beacon.
'''Option. '''All-way stop control may be installed at an intersection where an engineering study indicates that sight distance on the minor-road approaches controlled by a STOP sign is not adequate for a vehicle to turn onto or cross the major (uncontrolled) road.


If a strip of retroreflective material is used on the sign support, it shall be at least 4 inches wide, it shall be placed for the full length of the support from the sign to within 4 feet above the edge of the roadway, and its color shall match the background color of the sign, except that the color of the strip for the YIELD and DO NOT ENTER signs shall be red.
'''Support. '''At such a location, a road user, after stopping, cannot see conflicting traffic and is not able to negotiate the intersection unless conflicting cross traffic is also required to stop.  


'''Option.''' The FROM LEFT or FROM RIGHT (special) plaque may be used.
=={{SpanID|903.2.14}}903.2.14  All-Way Stop Control Warrant C: Transition to Signal Control or Transition to Yield Control at a Circular Intersection (MUTCD Section 2B.15)==


'''Guidance.''' Routine inspection of the beacon should be done and determined by the district.
'''Option. '''All-way stop control may be installed at locations where all-way stop control is an interim measure that can be installed to control traffic while arrangements are being made for the installation of a traffic control signal (see [[902.3 Traffic Control Signal Needs Studies (MUTCD Chapter 4C) #902.3|EPG 902.3]]) at the intersection or for the installation of yield control at a circular intersection.


==903.2.18 Standardization of Sign Location (MUTCD Section 2A.16)==
=={{SpanID|903.2.15}}903.2.15  All-Way Stop Control Warrant D: 8-Hour Volume (Vehicles, Pedestrians, Bicycles) (MUTCD Section 2B.16)==


'''Support.''' Standardization of position cannot always be attained in practice. Examples of heights and lateral locations of signs for typical installations are illustrated in Fig. 903.2.18.1 and examples of locations for typical signs at intersections are illustrated in Fig. 903.2.18.2.
'''Option. '''All-way stop control may be installed at an intersection where an engineering study indicates:
::A. The combined motor vehicle, bicycle, and pedestrian volume entering the intersection from the major-street approaches is at least 300 units per hour for each of any 8 hours of a typical day; and
::B. The combined motor vehicle, bicycle, and pedestrian volume entering the intersection from the minor-street approaches is at least 200 units per hour for each of any of the same 8 hours.


[[903.5 Regulatory Signs|EPG 903.5]], [[903.6 Warning Signs|EPG 903.6]] and [[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs|EPG 903.7]] contain provisions regarding the application of regulatory, warning and conventional guide signs, respectively.
If the 85th-percentile approach speed of the major-street traffic exceeds 40 mph, the minimum vehicular volume warrants may be reduced to 70 percent of the values given in Items A and B in the preceding paragraph.  


'''Standard.'''  Signs requiring separate decisions by the traveler shall be spaced sufficiently far apart for the appropriate decisions to be made.  One of the factors considered when determining the appropriate spacing shall be the posted or 85th-percentile speed.
=={{SpanID|903.2.16}}903.2.16 All-Way Stop Control Warrant E: Other Factors (MUTCD Section 2B.17)==


'''Guidance.''' Mainline signs on freeways and expressways should be visible a minimum of 800 feet and signs on conventional roads should be visible a minimum of 200 feet (minimum sign spacing in the MUTCD sections 2D and 2E). These distances should be considered when determining spacing between signs and when evaluating sign legibility during sign inspections.  When these minimum sign spacing distances are not achievable, engineering judgement should be used to determine if the sign can be relocated to improve visibility, provide advance signing or determine if a reduced sign spacing distance is appropriate.  
'''Option. '''All-way stop control may be installed at an intersection where an engineering study indicates that all-way stop control is needed due to other factors not addressed in the other all-way stop control warrants. Such other factors may include, but are not limited to, the following:
::A. The need to control left-turn conflicts,
::B. An intersection of two residential neighborhood collector (through) streets of similar design and operating characteristics where all-way stop control would improve traffic operational characteristics of the intersection, or  
::C. Where pedestrian and/or bicyclist movements support the installation of all-way stop control.  


Signs should be located on the right-hand side of the roadway where they are easily recognized and understood by travelers.  Signs in other locations should be considered only as supplementary to signs in the normal locations, except as otherwise provided in this article.
=={{SpanID|903.2.17}}903.2.17 STOP Sign or YIELD Sign Placement (MUTCD Section 2B.18)==


Signs should be individually installed on separate posts or mountings except where:
'''Standard. '''The STOP or YIELD sign shall be installed on the near side of the intersection on the right-hand side of the approach to which it applies. When the STOP or YIELD sign is installed at this required location and the sign visibility is restricted, a Stop Ahead sign (see  [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.29|EPG 903.2.29]]) shall be installed in advance of the STOP sign or a Yield Ahead sign (see  [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.29|EPG 903.2.29]]) shall be installed in advance of the YIELD sign.


:A. One sign supplements another, or
The STOP or YIELD sign shall be located as close as practicable to the intersection it regulates, while optimizing its visibility to the road user it is intended to regulate.


:B. Route or directional signs are grouped to clarify information to motorists, or
STOP signs and YIELD signs shall not be mounted on the same post.


:C. Regulatory signs that do not conflict with each other are grouped, such as turn prohibition signs posted with ONE WAY signs or a parking regulation sign posted with a speed limit sign.
'''Support. ''' [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.5|EPG 903.1.5]] contains information about mounting signs back-to-back with a STOP or YIELD sign.


:D. Street name signs are posted with a STOP or YIELD sign.
'''Guidance. '''STOP or YIELD signs should not be placed farther than 50 feet from the edge of the pavement of the intersected roadway (see Drawing F in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #fig903-1-13-1|Figure 903.1.13]]).


Signs should be located so that they:
Supplemental plaques used in conjunction with a STOP or YIELD sign should be limited to those specified for such use in the EPG.


:A. On right of way, are installed on a breakaway assembly, regardless of where they are located;
'''Standard. '''Where drivers proceeding straight ahead must yield to traffic approaching from the opposite direction, such as at a one-lane bridge, a TO ONCOMING TRAFFIC (R1-2aP) plaque shall be mounted below the YIELD sign. See [[#fig903.2.53.2|Figure 903.2.53.2]] and [[#fig903.2.53.3|Figure 903.2.53.3]] in [[#903.2.53|EPG 903.2.53]].


:B. Optimize nighttime visibility;
'''Support. '''[[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.13|Figure 903.1.13]] shows examples of some typical placements of STOP signs and YIELD signs.


:C. Minimize the effects of mud splatter and debris;
[[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.13|EPG 903.1.13]] contains additional information about separate and combined mounting of other signs with STOP or YIELD signs.


:D. Do not obscure each other;
'''Guidance. '''Stop lines that are used to supplement a STOP sign should be located as described in [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.18|EPG 620.2.18]]. Yield lines that are used to supplement a YIELD sign should be located as described in [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.18|EPG 620.2.18]].


:E. Do not obscure the sight distance to approaching vehicles on the major street for drivers who are stopped on minor-street approaches;
Where there is a marked crosswalk at the intersection, the STOP sign should be installed in advance of the edge of the crosswalk that is nearest to the approaching traffic.


:F. Are not hidden from view; and
Except at roundabouts and channelized right-turn lanes, where there is a marked crosswalk at the intersection, the YIELD sign should be installed in advance of the edge of the crosswalk that is nearest to the approaching traffic.


:G. Do not block view of intersection.
Where two roads intersect at an acute angle, the STOP or YIELD sign should be positioned at an angle, or shielded, so that the legend is out of view of traffic to which it does not apply.


'''Support.'''  The clear zone is the roadside border area measured from the edge of the pavement that is available for the safe use by errant vehicles as determined according to the EPG.  The width of the clear zone depends on traffic volumes, speeds and roadside geometry.
At a roundabout intersection, to prevent circulating vehicles from yielding unnecessarily, the face of the YIELD sign is not to be visible from the circulatory roadway.


'''Guidance.'''  Because of increased traffic, an order of sign installation priority should be established to provide travelers with regulatory, warning, and guidance information.
If a raised splitter island is available on the left-hand side of a multi-lane roundabout approach, an additional YIELD sign should be placed on the left-hand side of the approach.


'''Support.''' An order of priority is especially critical where space is limited for sign installation and there is a demand for several different types of signs.  Overloading motorists with too much information is not desirable.
'''Option. '''If a raised splitter island is available on the left-hand side of a single-lane roundabout approach, an additional YIELD sign may be placed on the left-hand side of the approach.


'''Guidance.'''  Because regulatory and warning information is more critical to travelers than guidance information, regulatory and warning signing whose location is critical should be displayed rather than guide signing in cases where conflicts occur.  Community wayfinding and acknowledgment guide signs should have a lower priority as to placement than other guide signs. Information of a lesser critical nature should be moved to less critical locations or omitted.
At wide-throat intersections or where two or more approach lanes of traffic exist on the signed approach, an additional STOP or YIELD sign may be installed on the left-hand side of the road and/or a stop or yield line may be used to improve observance of the right-of-way control. At channelized intersections or at divided roadways separated by a median or divisional island (painted or physical), the additional STOP or YIELD sign may be placed on a channelizing island, or in the median or on the divisional island.  


'''Option.''' Signs may be placed on median islands or on the left-hand side of the road under some circumstances, such as on curves to the right.  A supplementary sign located on the left-hand side of the roadway may be used on a multi-lane road where traffic in a lane to the right might obstruct the view to the right.
'''Standard. '''More than one STOP sign or more than one YIELD sign shall not be placed on the same support facing in the same direction.


'''Guidance.''' In urban areas where crosswalks exist, signs should not be placed within 4 ft. in advance of the crosswalk.
=={{SpanID|903.2.18}}903.2.18 Yield Here To Pedestrians Signs (R1-5 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.19)==


<div id="Fig. 903.2.18.1 Examples"></div>
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
[[image:903.2.26.1.pdf|center|800px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 903.2.18.1, Examples of Heights and Lateral Locations of Signs for Typical Installations''']]
|-
||[[image:R1-5.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R1-5'''</center>|130px]]||
[[image:R1-5d.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R1-5d'''</center>|120px]]
|}


<div id="Fig. 903.2.18.2 Examples"></div>
'''Support. '''The R1-5 series signs are intended to mitigate the scenario that can place pedestrians at risk by blocking other drivers’ view of pedestrians and by blocking the pedestrians' view of the vehicles approaching in the adjacent lanes.
[[image:903.1.26.2.pdf|center|thumb|800px|<center>'''Fig. 903.2.18.2, Examples of Locations for STOP and YIELD Signs at Intersections'''</center>]]


==903.2.19 Sign and Post Inventory and Storage==
'''Standard. '''Yield Here to Pedestrians (R1-5, R1-5a, R1-5c, and R1-5d) signs shall be used if yield lines are used in advance of a marked crosswalk only where it crosses an uncontrolled multi-lane approach. The legend STATE LAW shall not be displayed on the R1-5 series signs.  
'''Support.''' MoDOT allocates millions of dollars each year to maintain almost 700,000 signs installed along its highways. To maintain these signs in an efficient and timely manner, appropriate sign and post inventories need to be maintained.  Sign inventories need to include Priority 1 and Priority 2 signs and may include other high use signs to make ordering and request fulfilment more efficient.


To maintain the appropriate inventory level of priority and high usage signs, the inventory levels need to be based on the historical usage of each sign by the district, a level which will allow timely repairs to signs in the field, yet not represent a waste of resources with an overabundance of inventory or signs that exceed their shelf-life.  
'''Guidance. '''If yield lines and Yield Here to Pedestrians signs are used in advance of a crosswalk that crosses an uncontrolled multi-lane approach, the signs should be placed 20 to 50 feet in advance of the nearest edge of the crosswalk (see  [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.18|EPG 620.2.18]] and [[#fig620.2.18|Figure 620.2.18]]).


Maintaining appropriate inventory levels for each sign post is also critical for timely sign maintenance.  Each post type has different lead times which must be accounted for when determining appropriate inventory levels.  Pipe and Wide Flange posts are MoDOT specific designs and must be fabricated when ordered which results in very long lead times for delivery.  Other post types tend to be more readily available and in stock with our vendors resulting in a shorter delivery time, such as PSST and U-channel posts.
'''Standard. '''When used with a School Crossing assembly within school zones (see [[:Category:908 Traffic Controls for School Areas (MUTCD Part 7)|EPG 908]]), the R1-5a sign shall be used in place of the R1-5 sign in accordance with the second paragraph of this article.


'''Guidance.'''  Given the importance of maintaining an inventory of signs and posts and the value of this resource, districts should consider assigning the duties of warehouse management to an individual, or individuals. Typical duties of an individual(s) who manages these inventories can include ordering signs and posts, receiving and inspecting signs from vendors, maintaining the district warehouse inventory of signs and posts and processing sign and post needs from field crews. This may also include delivering these materials to some or all remote locations within a district.  Without proper management, inventories can easily grow out of control or be insufficient to meet the needs of the field crews.
When used with a Trail Crossing assembly (see  [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.44|EPG 903.3.44]]), the R1-5d sign shall be used in place of the R1-5 sign in accordance with the second paragraph of this article.


'''Standard.''' Districts shall determine their maximum inventory levels by using the sign and post usage reports, running each report at the beginning of each fiscal year.  The reports will identify the maximum and minimum recommended levels for each sign and post commodity.  These reports will calculate the values based on the average usage over the previous 36 months from the date the reports are run.  The average of the past 36 months will flatten spikes in any given year which will result in maximum levels being too high or low.  
'''Guidance. '''When Yield Here to Pedestrians signs are provided in advance of a crosswalk across an multi-lane approach, parking should be prohibited in the area between the yield line and the crosswalk.


===903.2.19.1 Supply Items (Non-Inventory Items)===
Yield lines and Yield Here to Pedestrians signs should not be used in advance of crosswalks that cross an approach to or departure from a roundabout.  
'''Support.'''  There are many components used to install and maintain signs, these can be broken down into two categories; inventory items and supplies, see Table 903.2.19.1.  Supplies are those items that are not individually inventoried and are generally smaller items purchased in larger quantities.  These items will not have commodity codes associated with them as Inventory Items typically do.  Guidance for inventory items can be found in subsequent sections of this article.


<center>'''Table 903.2.19.1'''</center>
'''Option. '''A Pedestrian Crossing (W11-2) warning sign may be placed overhead or may be post-mounted with a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque at the crosswalk location where Yield Here to Pedestrians signs have been installed in advance of the crosswalk.
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:center"
 
|+
'''Standard. '''If a W11-2 sign is post-mounted at the crosswalk location where a Yield Here to Pedestrians sign is used on the approach, the Yield Here to Pedestrians sign shall not be placed on the same post as the W11-2 sign.
!style="background:#BEBEBE" |Inventory Items!!style="background:#BEBEBE" |Supply Items
 
'''Option. '''An advance Pedestrian Crossing (W11-2) warning sign with an AHEAD or a distance supplemental plaque may be used in conjunction with a Yield Here to Pedestrians sign on the approach to the same crosswalk.
 
In-Street Pedestrian Crossing signs and Yield Here to Pedestrians signs may be used together at the same crosswalk.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.19}}903.2.19  In-Street Pedestrian and Trail Crossing Signs (R1-6 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.20)==
 
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|-
|Wide Flange Post / Stub|| Base Bolts / Washers / Nuts / Concrete Anchors
||[[File:R1-6.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R1-6'''</center>|130px]]||
[[File:R1-6d.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R1-6d'''</center>|130px]]
|-
|-
|Pipe Post / Stub|| Bolt Retainer Plates
| colspan="2" style="padding: 4px 8px;border: 1px solid #c8ccd1;background-color: #f8f9fa;;"|'''Note: '''The legend STATE LAW is optional
|}
 
'''Option. '''The In-Street Pedestrian Crossing (R1-6) sign, In-Street Trail Crossing (R1-6d) sign, may be used to remind road users of laws regarding right-of-way at an unsignalized crosswalk. The legend STATE LAW may be displayed at the top of the R1-6 series signs if applicable. On the R1-6 series signs, the legend YIELD may be used instead of the appropriate YIELD sign symbol.
 
MoDOT may develop and apply criteria for determining the applicability of In-Street Pedestrian Crossing signs.
 
'''Standard. '''If used, In-Street Pedestrian or Trail Crossing signs shall only be placed in the roadway at the crosswalk location on a raised island.
 
The In-Street Pedestrian or Trail Crossing sign shall not be post-mounted on the left-hand or right-hand side of the roadway.
 
'''Support. ''' [[620.8 Channelizing Devices used for Emphasis of Pavement Marking Patterns (MUTCD Chapter 3I) #620.8.2|EPG 620.8.2]] contains information about the use of tubular markers to provide additional emphasis for a pedestrian crossing. '''
 
'''Standard. '''When used at an uncontrolled crossing, the In-Street Pedestrian Crossing sign shall be used only as a supplement to a Pedestrian Crossing (W11-2) warning sign with a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque at the crosswalk location.
 
When used at an uncontrolled crossing, the In-Street Trail Crossing sign shall be used only as a supplement to a Trail Crossing (W11-15) warning sign with a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque at the crosswalk location.
 
An In-Street or Trail Crossing sign shall not be placed in advance of the crosswalk to educate road users about the State law prior to reaching the crosswalk, nor shall it be installed as an educational display that is not near any crosswalk.
 
'''Option. '''In-Street Pedestrian or Trail Crossing signs may be mounted back-to-back on a raised island in the median of an undivided roadway.
 
'''Standard. '''The In-Street Pedestrian or Trail Crossing sign shall not be used at crosswalks on approaches controlled by a traffic control signal, pedestrian hybrid beacon, or an emergency-vehicle hybrid beacon.
 
'''Option. '''The In-Street Pedestrian or Trail Crossing sign may be used at intersections or midblock pedestrian crossings with flashing beacons.
 
'''Support. '''The provisions of [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.15|EPG 903.1.15]] concerning mounting height are not applicable for the In-Street Pedestrian Crossing sign.  [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.18|EPG 903.1.18]] contains information about sign mounting methods.
 
'''Standard. '''The top of an In-Street Pedestrian or Trail Crossing sign placed in an island shall be a maximum of 4 feet above the island surface.
 
'''Option. '''The In-Street Pedestrian Crossing or Trail Crossing signs may be used seasonally to prevent damage in winter because of plowing operations, and may be removed at night if the pedestrian activity at night is minimal.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.20}}903.2.20 Speed Limit Sign (R2-1) (MUTCD Section 2B.21)==
 
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|-
|PSST Post / Anchor (7 gauge & 12 gauge)|| Brass Shims
|[[image:R2-1.png|left|thumb|150px|<center>'''R2-1'''</center>]]
|}
 
'''Support. '''In general, the maximum speed limits applicable to roads are established:
::A. Statutorily – a maximum speed limit applicable to a particular class of road, such as freeways or city streets, that is established by State law; or
::B. As speed zones – based on engineering studies.
 
State statutory limits restrict the maximum speed limit that can be established on a particular road, notwithstanding what an engineering study might indicate. Maximum speed limits in Missouri are governed by the Missouri Revised Statutes, Section 304.010.
 
MoDOT can establish non-statutory speed limits or designate reduced speed zones using an engineering study. Setting appropriate speed limits is especially important to ensure safety for all road users in varying types of contexts, particularly on roadways where adjacent land use suggests that trips could be served by varied modes. These situations include urban and suburban non-freeway arterials or rural arterials that serve as main streets in smaller communities, consistent with the context classifications of urban core, urban, suburban, and rural towns found in “A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets,” 2018 Edition, AASHTO. When setting a speed limit, a range of factors such as land-use context, pedestrian and bicyclist activity, crash history, intersection spacing, driveway density, roadway geometry, roadside conditions, roadway functional classification, traffic volume, and observed speeds can influence the speed limit determined in the engineering study. The engineering study will determine which of the recommended factors will prevail in setting the speed limit.
 
MoDOT can use speed limit setting tools and methods such as expert systems and those consistent with the safe system approach as part of the required engineering study for a non-statutory speed limit. As speed limit setting tools vary, practitioners needs to be aware of their limitations and advantages, possible variation between the tools and the need to explore gaps or weaknesses of tools, and weigh the output accordingly in consideration of setting speed limits.
 
To achieve desired operating speeds, agencies often implement other speed management strategies concurrently with setting speed limits, such as traffic calming measures, geometric design features, and increased enforcement. See  [[905.2 Traffic Studies #905.2.14|EPG 905.2.14]] for more information regarding speed limit guidelines.
 
'''Standard. '''Speed zones (other than statutory speed limits) shall only be established on the basis of an engineering study that has been performed in accordance with traffic engineering practices. The engineering study shall consider the roadway context.
 
'''Guidance. '''Among the factors that should be considered when conducting an engineering study for establishing or reevaluating speed limits within speed zones are the following:
::A. Roadway environment (such as roadside development, number and frequency of driveways and access points, and land use), functional classification, public transit volume and location or frequency of stops, parking practices, and pedestrian and bicycle facilities and activity;
::B. Roadway characteristics (such as lane widths, shoulder condition, grade, alignment, median type, and sight distance);
::C. Geographic context (such as an urban district, rural town center, non-urbanized rural area, or suburban area), and multi-modal trip generation;
::D. Reported crash experience for at least a 12-month period;
::E. Speed distribution of free-flowing vehicles including the pace, median (50th-percentile), and 85th-percentile speeds; and
::F. A review of past speed studies to identify any trends in operating speeds.
 
When the 85th-percentile speed is appreciably greater than the posted speed limit, and the roadway context does not support setting a higher speed limit, the engineering study should consider whether changes to geometric features, enforcement, and/or other speed-reduction countermeasures might improve compliance with the posted speed limit. A similar approach should be used if the results of past speed studies indicate that the 85th-percentile speed has consistently increased.
 
On urban and suburban arterials, and on rural arterials that serve as main streets through developed areas of communities, the 85th-percentile speed should not be used to set speed limits without consideration of all factors described in the first Guidance paragraph of this article.
 
On a freeway, expressway, or rural highway (outside urbanized locations or conditions), the speed limit that is posted within a speed zone should be within 5 mph of the 85th-percentile speed of free-flowing motor-vehicle traffic under the following conditions:
::A. All factors described in the first Guidance paragraph of this article have been considered and determined to be non-mitigating, and
::B. The measures described in the second Guidance paragraph of this article have been considered to the extent practicable.
 
See  [[905.2 Traffic Studies #905.2.14|EPG 905.2.14]] for additional information regarding setting speed limits
 
MoDOT should conduct engineering studies to reevaluate non-statutory speed limits on segments of their roadways that have undergone significant changes since the last review (such as changes to roadway context, the addition or elimination of parking or driveways, changes in the number of travel lanes, changes in the configuration of bicycle lanes, changes to road geometrics, changes in traffic control signal coordination, or significant changes in traffic volumes).
 
Speed studies for signalized intersection approaches should be taken outside the influence area of the traffic control signal, which is generally considered to be approximately ½ mile, to avoid obtaining skewed results for the speed distribution. If the signal spacing is less than 1 mile, the speed study should be at approximately the middle of the segment.
 
'''Standard. '''The Speed Limit (R2-1) sign shall display the limit established by law, ordinance, regulation, or as adopted by the authorized agency based on an engineering study. The speed limits displayed shall be in multiples of 5 mph.
 
Speed Limit (R2-1) signs, indicating speed limits for which posting is required by law, shall be located at the points of change from one speed limit to another.
 
At the downstream end of the section to which a particular speed limit applies, a Speed Limit sign showing the next speed limit shall be installed.
 
Speed Limit signs indicating the statutory speed limits shall be installed at entrances to Missouri and at city limits, where appropriate.
 
'''Guidance'''. Additional Speed Limit signs should be installed beyond interchanges and major intersections and at other locations where it is necessary to remind road users of the speed limit that is applicable.
 
Speed Limit signs should not be located at curves or other locations where the legal speed limit is greater than the safe operating speed. If Speed Limit signs are installed on the same sign supports and above a City Limit sign, the sign supports should be sized to properly support both signs.
 
The following are recommended locations for posting a Speed Limit sign:
::A. Downstream from all acceleration ramps on the freeway/expressway system, posted after the route confirmation marker, if space allows;
::B. Downstream from major intersections such as state system junctions, signalized intersections, and major county road junctions;
::C. Where it is necessary to remind road users of the speed limit that is applicable;
::D. In each direction of travel for road users leaving the Interstate system onto a state route. The sign should be located, if practical, approximately 400 ft. beyond the route confirmation assembly. If the crossroad is not located on the state system, the proper jurisdiction should be notified; or
::E. When the speed limit is reduced on the freeway/expressway, an additional sign should be posted in the median.
 
'''Support. '''The “Traffic Control Devices Handbook – 2nd Edition, 2013, ITE.” contains suggested criteria on the spacing of speed limit signs.
 
[[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.32|EPG 903.3.32]] contains information about the use of speed zone signs to inform road users of a reduced or variable speed zone to provide advance notice to comply with the posted speed limit ahead.
 
'''Option. '''If a W3-5b sign is posted to provide notice of a variable speed zone, an END VARIABLE SPEED LIMIT (R2-13) sign may be installed at the downstream end of the zone to provide notice to road users of the termination of the speed zone.
 
Advance traffic control warning signs (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.29|EPG 903.2.29]]), intersection warning signs (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.33|EPG 903.3.33]]), and/or other traffic control devices are appropriate warning prior to a signalized intersection.  A Speed Limit sign should not be used for this purpose.
 
'''Guidance. '''An advisory speed plaque (see  [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]]) mounted below a warning sign should be used to warn road users of an advisory speed for a roadway condition. A Speed Limit sign should not be used for this purpose.
 
'''Option. '''A variable speed limit sign that changes the speed limit for traffic and ambient conditions may be installed provided that the appropriate speed limit is displayed at the proper times and locations in accordance with the third and fourth Guidance paragraphs of this article.
 
'''Standard. '''The variable speed limit sign legend “SPEED LIMIT” shall be a black legend on a white retroreflective background. The variable speed limit legend shall be displayed in white LEDs on an opaque black background.
 
'''Support. ''' [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.13|EPG 903.3.13]] contains information about the use of a Vehicle Speed Feedback plaque mounted below a Speed Limit sign that displays to approaching drivers the speed at which they are traveling.
 
Advisory speed signs and plaques are discussed in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.12|EPG 903.3.12]] and [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|903.3.59]]. Temporary traffic control zone speed signs are discussed in [[:Category:616 Temporary Traffic Control (MUTCD Part 6)|EPG 616]]. The WORK ZONE (G20-5aP) plaque intended for installation above a Speed Limit sign is discussed in [[616.7 TTC Zone Regulatory Signs (MUTCD Chapter 6G) #616.7.7|EPG 616.7.7]]. School Speed Limit signs are discussed in [[908.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 7B) #908.2.5|EPG 908.2.5]]. 
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.21}}903.2.21  Combined Maximum and Minimum Speed Limits Sign (R2-4a) (MUTCD Section 2B.24)==
 
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|-
|Channel Post / Stub|| Dent Breakaway Bolts
|[[image:R2-4a.png|left|thumb|150px|<center>'''R2-4a'''</center>]]
|}
 
'''Standard. '''Combined Maximum and Minimum Speed Limits (R2-4a) signs shall be installed only on interstate routes in lieu of Speed Limit (R2-1) signs to designate the maximum and minimum speed limits that apply.
 
'''Guidance. '''The Combined Maximum and Minimum Speed Limits sign should be located in the same manner as Speed Limit signs (See [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.9|EPG 903.2.9]]). Additionally, the R2-4a sign should be installed on interstate routes at entrances to Missouri and where interstate routes cross county lines. '''
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.22}}903.2.22  Speed Limit XX Except Where Posted Sign (R2-5d)==
 
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|-
|Wood Post|| Wide Flange Breakaway Bolts / Washers / Nuts
|[[image:R2-5d.png|left|thumb|150px|<center>'''R2-5d'''</center>]]
|}
 
'''Standard. '''The SPEED LIMIT XX EXCEPT WHERE POSTED (R2-5d) sign shall be installed only at locations where it has been requested and is required by an enabling ordinance.
 
'''Guidance. '''The SPEED LIMIT XX EXCEPT WHERE POSTED sign should be placed immediately to the right of the City Limit sign on its own post.
 
'''Option. '''The SPEED LIMIT XX EXCEPT WHERE POSTED sign may be used on all state highways and outer roads except the Interstate system.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.23}}903.2.23  Higher Fines Signs and Plaque (MUTCD Section 2B.25)==
 
'''Support. '''See [[907.3 Travel Safe Zones #907.3|EPG 907.3]] for information on Travel Safe Zones.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.24}}903.2.24  Movement Prohibition Signs (R3-1 through R3-4, R3-18, and R3-27) (MUTCD Section 2B.26)==
 
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|-
|PSST 2.25" Insert (72" X 2.25")|| PSST Post Splice (12" X 1.75" and 2.25" PSST)
|[[image:R3-1.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-1'''</center>|95px]]
||[[image:R3-2.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-2'''</center>|95px]]
||[[image:R3-3.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-3'''</center>|95px]]
||[[image:R3-4.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-4'''</center>|95px]]
||[[image:R3-18.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-18'''</center>|95px]]
||[[image:R3-27.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-27'''</center>|95px]]
|}
 
'''Standard. '''Movement Prohibition signs shall be installed where specific movements are prohibited at an intersection approach except as provided in the second Option and fourth Standard paragraphs of this article.
 
'''Support. '''Missouri Statute 304.341, which governs U-turn Movements at signalized intersections, states: It shall be unlawful for the driver of any vehicle to turn such vehicle so as to proceed in the opposite direction at any intersection controlled by a traffic signal or police officer; nor shall such turn be made at any place unless the movement can be made in safety and without interfering with other traffic.
 
Missouri Statute 304.120 allows municipalities, by ordinance, to make additional rules of the road or traffic regulations to meet their needs and traffic conditions, which would allow U-turn Movements to be permitted at certain unsignalized intersections.
 
'''Guidance. '''Movement Prohibition signs should only be used to prohibit a turn or through movement from an entire approach and should not be used to designate movements that are required or permitted from a specific lane or lanes on a multi-lane approach.
 
Movement Prohibition signs should be placed where they will be most easily seen by road users who might be intending to make the movement.
 
If a No Right Turn (R3-1) sign is used, at least one should be placed either over the roadway or at a right-hand corner of the intersection.
 
If a No Left Turn (R3-2) sign is used, at least one should be placed over the roadway, at the far left corner of the intersection, on a median, or in conjunction with the STOP sign or YIELD sign located on the near right corner.
 
Except as provided in Item C of the third Standard paragraph of this article for signalized locations, if a NO TURNS (R3-3) sign is used, two signs should be used, one at a location specified for a No Right Turn sign and one at a location specified for a No Left Turn sign.
 
If a No U-Turn (R3-4) sign or a combination No U or Left Turn (R3-18) sign is used, at least one should be used at a location specified for a No Left Turn sign.
 
The No U-Turn sign (R3-4) should be used sparingly and only where a specific problem has been documented and not as standard practice for median breaks. If used, these signs should be placed at or between intersections to indicate where U-turns are prohibited.
 
If both left turns and U-turns are prohibited, the combination No U or Left Turn (R3-18) sign should be used instead of separate R3-2 and R3-4 signs.
 
'''Standard. '''The No U-Turn sign shall be installed above the AUTHORIZED AND EMERGENCY VEHICLES ONLY (R5-29) sign (See [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.36|EPG 903.2.36]]).
 
'''Support. ''' [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.25|EPG 903.2.25]] through [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.28|EPG 903.2.28]] contain information regarding lane control signs that indicate the required or permitted movements from individual lanes.
 
'''Guidance. '''If a No Straight Through (R3-27) sign is used, at least one should be placed either over the roadway or at a location where it can be seen by road users who might be intending to travel straight through the intersection.
 
If turn prohibition signs are installed in conjunction with traffic control signals:
::A. The No Right Turn sign should be installed adjacent to a signal face viewed by road users in the right-hand lane.
::B. The No Left Turn (or No U-Turn or combination No U or Left Turn) sign should be installed adjacent to a signal face viewed by road users in the left-hand lane.
::C. A NO TURNS sign should be placed adjacent to a signal face viewed by all road users on that approach, or two signs should be used.
 
'''Option. '''If turn prohibition signs are installed in conjunction with traffic control signals, an additional turn prohibition sign may be post-mounted to supplement the sign mounted overhead.
 
Where ONE WAY signs are used (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.40|EPG 903.2.40]]), No Left Turn and No Right Turn signs may be omitted.
 
Where the movement restriction applies to certain vehicle classes, signs incorporating a supplementary legend, modified as appropriate, may be used to indicate the specific vehicle class restriction or exception. When the movement restriction applies during certain time periods only, the following Movement Prohibition signing alternatives may be used and are listed in order of preference:
::A. A blank-out or changeable message sign (see Chapter 2L) that displays the prohibited movement only during the time that the movement prohibition is applicable, especially at signalized intersections.
::B. Permanently-mounted signs incorporating a supplementary legend showing the hours and days during which the prohibition is applicable. Contact the Highway Safety and Traffic Division for the design of supplementary legends and plaques.
::C. Portable signs, installed by proper authority, located off the roadway at each corner of the intersection. The portable signs are only to be used during the time that the movement prohibition is applicable.
 
'''Standard. '''The blank-out part-time electronic-display Movement Prohibition sign shall consist of a red circle and diagonal with a white prohibited movement on an opaque black background.
 
'''Option. '''Movement Prohibition signs may be omitted at a ramp entrance to an expressway or a channelized intersection where the design is such as to indicate clearly the one-way traffic movement on the ramp or turning lane.
 
'''Standard. '''The No Left Turn (R3-2) sign, the No U-Turn (R3-4) sign, and the combination No U or Left Turn (R3-18) sign shall not be used at approaches to roundabouts to prohibit drivers from turning left onto the circulatory roadway of a roundabout.
 
'''Support. '''At roundabouts, the use of R3-2, R3-4, or R3-18 signs to prohibit left turns onto the circulatory roadway might confuse drivers about the possible legal turning movements around the roundabout. ONE WAY (R6-1 or R6-2) signs are appropriate to indicate the travel direction within a roundabout.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.25}}903.2.25 Intersection Lane Control Signs (R3-5 through R3-8) (MUTCD Section 2B.27)==
 
'''Standard. '''Intersection Lane Control signs, if used, shall require road users in certain lanes to turn, shall permit turns from a lane where such turns would otherwise not be permitted, shall require a road user to stay in the same lane and proceed straight through an intersection, or shall indicate permitted movements from a lane.
 
Intersection Lane Control signs shall not be used in lieu of turn prohibition signs, such as No Right-Turn (R3-1).
 
'''Support. '''Intersection Lane Control signs have three applications:
::A. Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-5 series and R3-7 series) signs,
::B. Optional Movement Lane Control (R3-6 series) signs, and
::C. Advance Intersection Lane Control (R3-8 series) signs.
 
'''Guidance. '''When Intersection Lane Control signs are mounted overhead, each sign used should be placed over the lane or a projection of the lane to which it applies.
 
On signalized approaches where through lanes that become mandatory turn lanes, multiple-lane turns that include shared lanes for through and turning movements, ramps with two or more lanes or other lane-use regulations are present that would be unexpected by unfamiliar road users, overhead Intersection Lane Control signs should be installed approximately 250 ft. in advance of the stop bar over the appropriate lanes. A one-arm cantilever tubular truss to support these signs should be used to eliminate an obstacle on one side of the roadway.
 
'''Option. '''A signal mast arm design (without signal head) may be used to mount Intersection Lane Control signs, which allows a longer arm than standard one or two arm tubular sign supports. The upright post may be placed on either side of the roadway, and if possible, placed so that roadway geometrics draw traffic away from the post and footing.
 
'''Guidance. '''The Left Only (R3-5L) sign should be installed on the back side of the mast arms over the left turn lanes where practical.
 
Where overhead mounting on the approach is impracticable for the Advance and/or Intersection Lane Control signs, one of the following alternatives should be employed:
::A. At locations where through lanes become mandatory turn lanes, a Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-7) sign should be post-mounted on the left-hand side of the roadway where a through lane is becoming a mandatory left-turn lane on a one-way street or where a median of sufficient width for the signs is available, or on the right-hand side of the roadway where a through lane is becoming a mandatory right-turn lane.
::B. At locations where a through lane is becoming a mandatory left-turn lane on a two-way street where a median of sufficient width for the signs is not available, and at locations where multiple-lane turns that include shared lanes for through and turning movements are present, an Advance Intersection Lane Control (R3-8 series) sign should be post-mounted in a prominent location in advance of the intersection, and consideration should be given to the use of an oversized version in accordance with [[#tab903.2.3|Table 903.2.3]].
 
Use of an overhead sign for one approach lane should not require installation of overhead signs for the other lanes of that approach.
 
'''Option. '''Intersection Lane Control signs may be omitted where:
::A. A turn bay has been provided by physical construction or pavement markings, and
::B. Only the road users using such turn bays are permitted to make a turn in that direction.
 
'''Standard. '''Except as provided in the last paragraph of this article, at roundabouts, Intersection Lane Control (R3-5, R3-6, and R3-8 series) signs shall display curved-stem arrow symbols as shown in [[#fig903.2.25|Figure 903.2.25]].
 
'''Option. '''Normal-stem arrow symbol options may be displayed on Intersection Lane Control (R3-5, R3-6, and R3-8 series) signs at roundabouts where they more effectively indicate road geometry based on engineering judgment.
 
{{SpanID|fig903.2.25}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.25 Intersection Lane Control Signal Arrow Options for Roundabouts.jpg|center|thumb|alt=A: The first example shows a vertical black curved-stem arrow curving up and then slightly to the right and then to the left. Three “match arrows with desired lane-use configuration” are shown attached to the black arrows. One is attached to the arrow indicating a left-turn maneuver. One is attached to the arrow indicating a through maneuver. One is attached to the arrow indicating a right-turn maneuver.
B: The second example shows a vertical black normal-stem arrow curving up and to the left. The arrow is shown curving around an “optional for left-most lane” circle. Three “match arrows with desired lane-use configuration” are shown attached to the black arrows. One is attached to the arrow indicating a left-turn maneuver. One is attached to the arrow indicating a through maneuver. One is attached to the arrow indicating a right-turn maneuver.|800px|'''Figure 903.2.25''' Intersection Lane Control Signal Arrow Options for Roundabouts]]
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.26}}903.2.26  Mandatory Movement Lane Control Signs (R3-5, R3-5a, and R3-7) and Plaques (MUTCD Section 2B.28)==
 
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|-
|PSST Surface Mount Bases (for 2" and 2.5")|| Aluminum Backer Bar
||[[File:R3-5.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-5'''</center>|105px]]
||[[File:R3-5a.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-5a'''</center>|95px]]
||[[File:R3-7L.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-7L'''</center>|130px]]
||[[File:R3-7R.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-7R'''</center>|130px]]
|}
 
'''Standard. '''Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-5, R3-5a, and R3-7) signs, if used, shall indicate only the single vehicle movement that is required from the lane.
 
The Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-5 and R3-5a) symbol signs shall include the legend ONLY and shall be mounted overhead over the specific lanes to which they apply (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.25|EPG 903.2.25]]). The R3-7 sign shall be for post-mounting only. The R3-7 sign shall not be mounted at the far side of the intersection.
 
If used, the Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-7) sign shall be located in advance of the intersection, such as near the upstream end of the mandatory movement lane, and/or at the near side of the intersection where the regulation applies.
 
The use of the Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-7) word message sign shall be limited to only locations where through lanes approaching an intersection become mandatory turn lanes.
 
Mandatory Movement Lane Control Signs shall not be used on roadways with speed limits 50 mph or greater. Contact Highway Safety and Traffic Division for alternatives when speed limits are 50 mph or greater.
 
'''Guidance. '''Mandatory Movement Lane Control signs should be accompanied by lane-use arrow markings, especially where traffic volumes are high, where there is a high percentage of commercial vehicles, or where other distractions exist.
 
'''Option. '''The Through Only (R3-5a) sign may be used to require a road user in a particular lane to proceed straight through an intersection.
 
On an approach to a mandatory turn lane where traffic regularly enters the shoulder to access the turn lane inappropriately, creating safety or operational issues, a DO NOT DRIVE ON SHOULDER (R4-17) sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.35|EPG 903.2.35]]) may be used to supplement the standard Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-5 and/or R3-7 series) signs.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.27}}903.2.27  Optional Movement Lane Control Signs (R3-6 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.29)==
 
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|-
|PSST Redi-Torque Assembly (for 2.5")|| Slip Base Parts (top only, wedge, replacement bolt)
||[[image:R3-6.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-6'''</center>|130px]]
||[[image:R3-6a.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-6a'''</center>|130px]]
||[[image:R3-6b.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-6b'''</center>|130px]]
|}
 
'''Standard. '''Optional Movement Lane Control (R3-6, R3-6a and R3-6b) signs, if used, shall be used for two or more movements from a specific lane or to emphasize permitted movements. The Optional Movement Lane Control sign shall be mounted overhead over the specific lane to which it applies.
 
If used, the Optional Movement Lane Control signs shall indicate all permissible movements from specific lanes.
 
Because more than one movement is permitted from the lane, the word message ONLY shall not be used on an Optional Movement Lane Control sign.
 
Optional Movement Lane Control signs shall be used for two or more movements from a specific lane where a movement, not allowed by State statute or local ordinance, is permitted.
 
The Optional Movement Lane Control signs shall not be used alone to effect a turn prohibition.
 
'''Guidance. '''If used, the Optional Movement Lane Control sign should be located overhead in advance of the intersection, such as near the upstream end of an adjacent mandatory movement lane, and/or overhead at the intersection where the regulation applies.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.28}}903.2.28  Advance Intersection Lane Control Signs (R3-8 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.30)==
 
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align: center;"
|-
|-
|PSST Kleen Break Assemblies (for 2")|| Wood Post Clamps
||[[image:R3-8.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-8'''</center>|130px]]
||[[image:R3-8a.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-8a'''</center>|195px]]
||[[image:R3-8b.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-8b'''</center>|195px]]
|-
|-
|PSST Snap n Safe Couplers (for 2" and 2.5")|| Pipe Post Clamps
||[[image:R3-8xa.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-8xa'''</center>|195px]]
||[[image:R3-8xb.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-8xb'''</center>|195px]]
||[[image:R3-8xc.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-8xc'''</center>|195px]]
|}
 
'''Option. '''Advance Intersection Lane Control (R3-8, R3-8a, and R3-8b) signs may be used to indicate the configuration of all lanes ahead.
 
The word message ONLY or the bicycle symbol, may be used within the border in combination with the arrow symbols of the R3-8 sign series.
 
Where a bicycle lane is between two general-purpose lanes the R3-8 series signs may be modified to show the bicycle lane with a white legend on a black background in accordance with designs of the R3-8x series signs (see [[914.2 Regulatory Signs (MUTCD Chapter 9B) #914.2.2|EPG 914.2.2]]).
 
'''Guidance. '''When used, an Advance Intersection Lane Control sign should be placed at an adequate distance in advance of the intersection, either along the lane tapers or at the beginning of the turn lane so that road users can select the appropriate lane.
 
'''Option. '''An Advance Intersection Lane Control sign may be repeated closer to the intersection along the approach for additional emphasis.
 
'''Standard. '''An Advance Intersection Lane Control (R3-8 series) sign shall not be mounted at the far side of an intersection to which it applies.
 
Where three or more approach lanes are available to traffic, Advance Intersection Lane Control (R3-8 series) signs, if used, shall be post-mounted in advance of the intersection and shall not be mounted overhead.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.29}}903.2.29  Two-Way Left-Turn-Only Signs (R3-9a and R3-9b) and Plaques (MUTCD Section 2B.32)==
 
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|-
|rowspan="6"|  ||Pipe Post Caps
||[[File:R3-9a.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-9a'''</center>|105px]]
||[[File:R3-9b.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-9b'''</center>|85px]]
|}
 
'''Support. '''Missouri Statute 300.215, which governs two-way left turn lane movements states:
 
Designated two-way left turn lanes: Where a special lane for making left turns by drivers proceeding in opposite directions have been indicated by official traffic control devices:
 
::A. A left turn shall not be made from any other lane;
 
::B. A vehicle shall not be driven in the lane except when preparing for or making a left turn from or into the roadway or when preparing for or making a U-turn when otherwise permitted by law;
 
::C. A vehicle shall not be driven in the lane for a distance more than five hundred feet.
 
'''Standard. '''Two-Way Left Turn Only (R3-9a) signs shall be used for overhead installation only. Center Lane Only (R3-9b) signs shall be post mounted installations.
 
'''Guidance. '''A Two-Way Left-Turn-Only (R3-9a or R3-9b) sign should be used in conjunction with the required pavement markings where a non-reversible lane is reserved for the exclusive use of left-turning vehicles in either direction and is not used for passing, overtaking, or through travel.
 
'''Option. '''The post-mounted R3-9b sign may be used as an alternate to or a supplement to the overhead R3-9a sign
 
Additional R3-9b signs may be installed after major intersections, or in situations that require additional emphasis of the proper use of this lane.
 
'''Support. '''Signing is especially helpful to drivers in areas where the two-way left-turn-only maneuver is new, in areas subject to environmental conditions that frequently obscure the pavement markings, and on peripheral streets with two-way left-turn-only lanes leading to an extensive system of routes with two-way left-turn-only lanes.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.30}}903.2.30 Jughandle Signs (R3-23, R3-24, R3-25, and R3-26 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.35)==
 
'''Guidance. '''There are limited cases where these signs are applicable to the MoDOT system. Any use of these signs requires authorization from the Highway Safety and Traffic Division.'''
 
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.31}}903.2.31  DO NOT PASS Sign (R4-1) (MUTCD Section 2B.36)==
 
[[File:R4-1.gif|center|thumb|<center>'''R4-1'''</center>|105px]]
 
'''Option. '''The DO NOT PASS (R4-1) sign may be used in addition to pavement markings (see  [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.3|EPG 620.2.3]]) to emphasize the restriction on passing. The DO NOT PASS sign may be used at one-lane bridges and work zones. Any other use of this sign requires authorization from the Highway Safety and Traffic Division.
 
'''Support. '''Standards for determining the location and extent of no-passing zone pavement markings are set forth in [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.3|EPG 620.2.3]].
 
'''Standard. '''PASS WITH CARE (R4-2) signs shall be used in conjunction with the DO NOT PASS sign.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.32}}903.2.32 PASS WITH CARE Sign (R4-2) (MUTCD Section 2B.37)==
 
[[File:R4-2.png|center|thumb|<center>'''R4-2'''</center>|105px]]
 
'''Guidance. '''The PASS WITH CARE (R4-2) sign should be installed at the downstream end of a no-passing zone if a DO NOT PASS sign has been installed at the upstream end of the zone.
 
'''Standard. '''The PASS WITH CARE sign shall be the same size and shall be erected in the same manner as the DO NOT PASS (R4-1) sign.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.33}}903.2.33  KEEP RIGHT EXCEPT TO PASS Sign (R4-16) and SLOWER TRAFFIC KEEP RIGHT Sign (R4-3) (MUTCD Section 2B.38)==
 
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|-
|PSST Bolts / Washers / Nuts
||[[File:R4-3.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R4-3'''</center>|105px]]
||[[File:R4-16.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R4-16'''</center>|105px]]
|}
 
'''Option. '''The KEEP RIGHT EXCEPT TO PASS (R4-16) sign may be used on roadways where there are two lanes in one direction of travel to direct drivers to stay in the right-hand lane except when they are passing another vehicle.
 
'''Guidance. '''If used, the KEEP RIGHT EXCEPT TO PASS sign should be installed at or just beyond the beginning of a two-lane section of roadway and at selected locations along two-lane roadways where additional emphasis is needed.
 
'''Option. '''The SLOWER TRAFFIC KEEP RIGHT (R4-3) sign may be used on multi-lane through roadways to improve capacity or reduce unnecessary lane changing due to the presence of slower vehicles that impede the normal flow of traffic.
 
'''Standard. '''The SLOWER TRAFFIC KEEP RIGHT (R4-3) sign shall be required for climbing lanes.
 
'''Guidance. '''If used, the SLOWER TRAFFIC KEEP RIGHT sign should be installed at or just beyond the beginning of a multi-lane roadway section or at the beginning of an extra lane provided for trucks and/or other slow-moving traffic, and at selected locations where there is a tendency on the part of some road users to drive in the left-hand lane(or lanes) below the normal speed of traffic. These signs should not be used on the approach to an interchange or through an interchange area where traffic is entering or exiting, or along deceleration or acceleration lanes.
 
If an extra lane has been provided for trucks and other slow-moving traffic, a Lane Ends sign (see  [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.39|EPG 903.3.39]]) should be installed in advance of the point where the extra lane ends. Appropriate pavement markings should be installed at both the upstream and downstream ends of the extra lane (see  [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.14|EPG 620.2.14]] and [[#fig620.2.14|Figure 620.2.14]] ).
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.34}}903.2.34  Keep Right and Keep Left Signs (R4-7 Series and R4-8 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.39)==
 
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|-
|Nylon Sign Washers
||[[File:R4-7.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R4-7'''</center>|105px]]
||[[File:R4-7a.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R4-7a'''</center>|105px]]
||[[File:R4-7b.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R4-7b'''</center>|115px]]
||[[File:R4-7c.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R4-7c'''</center>|85px]]
|-
|-
|Ready-Mix Concrete
||[[File:R4-8.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R4-8'''</center>|105px]]
||[[File:R4-8a.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R4-8a'''</center>|105px]]
||[[File:R4-8b.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R4-8b'''</center>|105px]]
||[[File:R4-8c.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R4-8c'''</center>|85px]]
|}
 
'''Option. '''The Keep Right (R4-7) sign may be used at locations where it is necessary for traffic to pass only to the right-hand side of a roadway feature or obstruction. The Keep Left (R4-8) sign may be used at locations where it is necessary for traffic to pass only to the left-hand side of a roadway feature or obstruction.
 
'''Guidance. '''At locations where it is not readily apparent that traffic is required to keep to the right, a Keep Right sign should be used.
 
'''Standard. '''If Keep Right signs are installed at the start of a median or at a median opening, they shall be placed as close as practicable to the approach ends of the medians, and shall be visible to traffic on the divided highway.
 
'''Guidance. '''If used, the Keep Right sign should be mounted on the face of or just in front of a pier or other obstruction separating opposite directions of traffic in the center of the highway such that traffic will have to pass to the right-hand side of the sign.
 
Where the approach end of the island channelizes traffic away from the approach direction, the word legend (R4-7a, R4-7b, R4-8a, or R4-8b) signs should be used instead of the symbol (R4-7 or R4-8) signs to emphasize the degree of curvature away from the approach direction (see [[#fig903.2.34.1|Figure 903.2.34.1]] ).
 
Where a two-lane, two-way highway transitions to a divided highway, the KEEP RIGHT (R4-7b) sign should be installed within 50 ft. of the gore point, if possible. The edge of the sign should be a minimum of 6 ft. from the curb or shoulder point.
 
'''Standard. '''The Keep Right (Left) sign shall not be installed on the right-hand (left-hand) side of the roadway in a position where traffic must pass to the left-hand (right-hand) side of the sign.
 
'''Option. '''The Keep Right sign may be omitted at intermediate ends of divisional islands and medians.
 
A narrow Keep Right (R4-7c) sign may be installed on the approach end of a median island that is less than 4 feet wide at the point where the sign is to be located.
 
'''Standard. '''A narrow Keep Right (R4-7c) sign shall not be installed on a median island that has a width of 4 feet or more at the point where the sign is to be located.
 
'''Option. '''The Keep Right sign may be installed in the median of a divided highway crossing that functions as a single intersection such that it is visible to traffic on the divided highway as shown in [[#fig903.2.41.3|Figure 903.2.41.3]]  and [[#fig903.2.41.4|Figure 903.2.41.4]] .
 
'''Support. '''[[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.40|EPG 903.2.40]] provides more information about the use of the Keep Right sign in combination with or in lieu of ONE-WAY signs at divided highway crossings.
 
'''Standard. '''The KEEP RIGHT (R4-7b) sign shall be installed as close to the median nose as possible where an undivided highway transitions into a divided highway.
 
{{SpanID|fig903.2.34.1}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.34.1 Examples of Keep Right and Keep Left Sign Placement (Sheet 1 of 2).jpg|center|800px|alt=The first example shows a two-lane vertical roadway on the left of a two-lane horizontal roadway. Both lanes of the horizontal roadway are traveling eastbound. Posted on a triangular median island, which separates the southbound lane from the northbound lane, an R4-7a sign is shown facing south toward northbound traffic merging east onto the horizontal roadway.
 
The second example shows a two-lane vertical roadway intersecting a three-lane horizontal roadway. All lanes of the horizontal roadway are traveling eastbound. Posted on a triangular median island, an R4-7a sign is shown facing south toward northbound traffic merging east onto the horizontal roadway.
 
The third example shows a two-lane vertical roadway curving to the east into a one-lane ramp. Posted on a triangular median island, an R4-7a sign is shown facing south toward northbound traffic merging onto the curved ramp.|thumb|'''Figure 903.2.34.1 '''Examples of Keep Right and Keep Left Sign Placement ''(Sheet 1 of 2)'']]
 
{{SpanID|fig903.2.34.2}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.34.2 Examples of Keep Right and Keep Left Sign Placement (Sheet 2 of 2).jpg|center|800px|alt=The first example shows a three-lane vertical roadway intersecting a two-lane horizontal roadway. Both directions of the vertical roadway are separated by a narrow median island. Posted on the median island, an R4-7 sign is shown facing north toward the horizontal roadway, indicating vehicles must keep right when traveling on the south receiving leg of the intersection.
 
The second example shows a four-lane vertical roadway, two lanes in each direction, separated by a yellow painted median. The median transitions into a wider raised median that tapers outward as it continues north. Posted at the start of the wider median, an R4-7b sign is shown facing south toward northbound traffic, indicating vehicles must keep right.|thumb|'''Figure 903.2.34.2 '''Examples of Keep Right and Keep Left Sign Placement ''(Sheet 2 of 2)'']]
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.35}}903.2.35 DO NOT DRIVE ON SHOULDER Sign (R4-17) (MUTCD Section 2B.43)==
 
[[image:R4-17.jpg|center|thumb|<center>'''R4-17'''</center>|105px]]
 
'''Option. '''The DO NOT DRIVE ON SHOULDER (R4-17) sign may be installed to inform road users that using the shoulder of a roadway as a travel lane is prohibited.
 
'''Guidance. '''The DO NOT DRIVE ON SHOULDER (R4-17) sign should be considered for special conditions if there is a need determined by district traffic engineering staff. The sign should be considered as a temporary tool to aid in the enforcement of the condition. After it appears the problem has been corrected, these signs should be removed.
 
'''Support. '''The R4-17 sign is to be used only where necessary. MoDOT does not want to set driver expectations for general use of this sign.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.36}}903.2.36  Selective Exclusion Signs and Plaques (MUTCD Section 2B.45)==
 
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|-
|Bags of Concrete
||[[image:R5-2.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R5-2'''</center>|105px]]
||[[image:R5-2aP.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R5-2aP'''</center>|105px]]
||[[image:R5-25.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R5-25'''</center>|105px]]
||[[image:R5-29.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R5-29'''</center>|105px]]
|}
 
'''Option. '''Selective Exclusion signs may be used to provide notice to road users that State or local statutes or ordinances exclude designated types of traffic from using particular roadways or facilities.
 
'''Standard. '''Selective Exclusion signs shall clearly indicate the type of traffic that is excluded.
 
'''Support. '''Typical exclusion messages include:
::A. No Trucks (R5-2),
::B. No Pedestrian Crossing (R9-3),
::C. EXCEPT LOCAL DELIVERY (R5-2aP) plaque.
::D. NO VENDING (R5-24)
::E. NO FISHING FROM BRIDGE (R5-25)
::F. AUTHORIZED AND EMERGENCY VEHICLES ONLY (R5-29)
 
'''Guidance. '''If an exclusion is governed by vehicle weight, a Weight Limit sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.53|EPG 903.2.53]]) should be used instead of a Selective Exclusion sign.
 
The Selective Exclusion sign should be placed on the right-hand side of the roadway at an appropriate distance from the intersection so as to be clearly visible to all road users turning into the roadway that has the exclusion. The No Pedestrian Crossing (R9-3) sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.46|EPG 903.2.46]]) should be installed so as to be clearly visible to pedestrians who are at a location where an alternative route is available.
 
'''Option. '''The No Pedestrian Crossing (R9-3) sign may also be used at underpasses or elsewhere where pedestrian facilities are not provided.
 
The EXCEPT LOCAL DELIVERY (R5-2aP) plaque may be mounted below the R5-2 sign.
 
The NO VENDING (R5-24) sign may be used at locations where vending is taking place within the right-of-way.
 
'''Standard. '''When used, the NO FISHING FROM BRIDGE (R5-25) sign shall be mounted at or near the bridge ends.
 
'''Option. '''The NO FISHING FROM BRIDGE (R5-25) sign may be used at locations where fishing from a bridge creates a safety hazard.
 
'''Guidance. '''The AUTHORIZED AND EMERGENCY VEHICLES ONLY (R5-29) sign should be used at emergency crossovers to prohibit vehicles from using the emergency crossover unless they have special permission (such as law enforcement vehicles or emergency vehicles) or are performing official business (such as highway agency vehicles).
 
The No U Turn sign should be installed above the AUTHORIZED AND EMERGENCY VEHICLES ONLY sign.
 
Signing for both directions of traffic should be provided on one post with the signs being installed 90 degrees to the roadway. The signs should be mounted back to back. The post should be located approximately in the middle of the median. If median width is greater than 60 ft., consideration should be given to install separate signs.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.37}}903.2.37  DO NOT ENTER Sign (R5-1) (MUTCD Section 2B.46)==
 
[[image:R5-1.gif|thumb|center|<center>'''R5-1'''</center>|105px]]
 
'''Standard. '''The DO NOT ENTER (R5-1) sign shall be used at the following locations:
::A. Where a two-way roadway becomes a one-way roadway;
::B. The intersection of an interchange exit ramp with a crossroad as specified in [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.39|EPG 903.2.39]] (see [[#fig903.2.39.1|Figure 903.2.39.1]]);
::C. The intersection of a channelized or turning roadway with a two-way undivided crossroad; and
::D. Except as provided in the fourth paragraph of this article, an intersection with a divided highway (see [[#fig903.2.37|Figure 903.2.37]]).
 
If the DO NOT ENTER sign is mounted behind a STOP or YIELD sign:
::A. 36 x 36 inch DO NOT ENTER sign shall be used behind a 48 x 48 inch STOP sign; and
::B. 30 x 30 inch. DO NOT ENTER sign shall be used behind a 60 x 60 inch YIELD sign.
 
'''Guidance. '''A DO NOT ENTER sign should be installed at other locations where additional emphasis is needed where wrong-way movements are prominent or where the intersecting angle of roadways is such that the visibility of ONE WAY signs alone does not sufficiently convey the restriction.
 
'''Option. '''A DO NOT ENTER sign may be omitted on a low-speed urban street that is a divided highway at a crossing that functions as two separate intersections.
 
'''Guidance. '''The DO NOT ENTER sign, if used, should be placed directly in view of a road user at the point where a road user could wrongly enter a divided highway, one-way roadway, or ramp. The sign should be mounted facing traffic that might enter the roadway or ramp in the wrong direction.
 
At a crossing with a divided highway; the sign, if used, should be placed on the outside edge side of the roadway facing traffic that might enter the roadway in the wrong direction.
 
If the DO NOT ENTER sign would be visible to traffic to which it does not apply, the sign should be turned away from, or shielded from, the view of that traffic.
 
A second DO NOT ENTER sign should be used, particularly where traffic approaches from an intersecting roadway ([[#fig903.2.37|Figure 903.2.37]]).
 
[[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.12|EPG 903.1.12]] contains the provisions for the use of continuously-operated or actuated LEDs to enhance the conspicuity of signs.
 
{{SpanID|fig903.2.37}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.37 Locations of DO NOT ENTER and WRONG WAY Signing for Divided Highway Crossings that Function as Two Separate Intersections.jpg|thumb|800px|alt=A vertical two-lane roadway intersects a horizontal divided highway with two eastbound lanes, a median, and two westbound lanes. Each direction of the horizontal highway has a left-turn lane at its intersection with the vertical roadway.
Along the eastbound lanes, a required R5-1 “DO NOT ENTER” sign is posted on the median to the left of the left-turn lane, facing westbound traffic. A second R5-1 sign is posted to the right of the eastbound right lane at the intersection, also facing westbound traffic. Farther west along the eastbound lanes, two R5-1a “WRONG WAY” signs are installed outside of the travel lanes, one on each side of the roadway, both facing westbound traffic.
Along the westbound lanes, a required R5-1 “DO NOT ENTER” sign is posted on the median to the left of the left-turn lane, facing eastbound traffic. A second R5-1 sign is posted to the right of the westbound right lane at the intersection, also facing eastbound traffic. Farther east along the westbound lanes, two R5-1a “WRONG WAY” signs are installed outside of the travel lanes, one on each side of the roadway, both facing eastbound traffic.
Spacing guidance is shown: the R5-1 signs are placed 50 to 80 feet from the intersection, while the R5-1a signs are placed 200 to 250 feet from the R5-1 signs.|center|'''Figure 903.2.37 '''Locations of DO NOT ENTER and WRONG WAY Signing for Divided Highway Crossings that Function as Two Separate Intersections]]
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.38}}903.2.38  WRONG WAY Sign (R5-1a) (MUTCD Section 2B.47)==
 
[[image:R5-1a.gif|thumb|center|<center>'''R5-1a'''</center>|105px]]
 
'''Option. '''The WRONG WAY (R5-1a) sign may be used as a supplement to the DO NOT ENTER sign where a crossroad intersects a one-way roadway in a manner that does not physically discourage or prevent wrong-way entry (see [[#fig903.2.37|Figure 903.2.37]]).
 
'''Guidance. '''If used, the WRONG WAY sign should be placed at a location along the one-way roadway farther from the crossroad than the DO NOT ENTER sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.37|EPG 903.2.37]]).
 
The WRONG WAY sign should be placed on the same side of the road as the DO NOT ENTER sign.
 
'''Support. '''[[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.12|EPG 903.1.12]] contains the provisions for the use of continuously-operated or actuated LEDs to enhance the conspicuity of signs.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.39}}903.2.39  Wrong-Way Traffic Control at Interchange Ramps (MUTCD Section 2B.48)==
 
'''Standard. '''At interchange exit ramp terminals where the ramp intersects a crossroad in such a manner that wrong-way entry could inadvertently be made, the following signs shall be used (see [[#fig903.2.39.1|Figure 903.2.39.1]]):
::A. At least one ONE WAY sign for each direction of travel on the crossroad shall be placed where the exit ramp intersects the crossroad.
::B. At least one DO NOT ENTER sign shall be conspicuously placed near the downstream end of the exit ramp in positions appropriate for full view of a road user starting to enter wrongly from the crossroad.
::C. At least one WRONG WAY sign shall be placed on the exit ramp facing a road user traveling in the wrong direction.
 
'''Guidance. '''In addition, the following pavement markings should be used (see [[#fig903.2.39.1|Figure 903.2.39.1]]):
::A. On two-lane paved crossroads at interchanges, solid double yellow lines should be used as a center line for an adequate distance on both sides approaching the ramp intersections.
::B. Where crossroad channelization or ramp geometrics do not make wrong-way movements difficult, a lane-use arrow should be placed in each lane of an exit ramp near the crossroad terminal where it will be clearly visible to a potential wrong-way road user.
 
'''Option. '''The following traffic control devices may be used to supplement the signs and pavement markings described in the first and second paragraphs of this article:
::A. Additional ONE WAY signs may be placed, especially on two-lane rural crossroads, appropriately in advance of the ramp intersection to supplement the required ONE WAY sign(s).
::B. Additional WRONG WAY signs may be used.
::C. Slender, elongated wrong-way arrow pavement markings (see [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #fig3b21|Figure 620.2.22.1]]) intended primarily to warn wrong-way road users that they are traveling in the wrong direction may be placed upstream from the ramp terminus (see [[#fig903.2.39.1|Figure 903.2.39.1]] ) to indicate the correct direction of traffic flow. Wrong-way arrow pavement markings may also be placed on the exit ramp at appropriate locations near the crossroad junction to indicate wrong-way movement.
::D. Lane-use arrow pavement markings may be placed on the exit ramp and crossroad near their intersection to indicate the permissive direction of flow.
::E. Lane control signs or movement prohibition signs may be used on the approaches to the exit ramp.
::D. A Keep Right (R4-7 or R4-7c) may be used on a ramp median nose for wrong-way traffic control.
 
'''Guidance. '''On interchange entrance ramps where the ramp merges with the through roadway and the design of the interchange does not clearly make evident the direction of traffic on the separate roadways or ramps, a ONE WAY sign visible to traffic on the entrance ramp and through roadway should be placed on each side of the through roadway near the entrance ramp merging point.
 
'''Option. '''On interchange entrance ramps where the ramp merges with the through roadway and the design of the interchange does not clearly make evident the direction of traffic on the separate roadways or ramps a No Left Turn (R3-2) sign may be located on the left-hand side of the entrance ramp at the gore. If a No Left Turn (R3-2) sign is located on the left-hand side, a supplemental R3-2 sign may be installed on the right-hand side of the entrance ramp.
 
On interchange entrance ramps where the ramp merges with the through roadway and the design clearly indicates the direction of flow, a ONE WAY sign may be placed visible to traffic on the entrance ramp and/or a NO TURNS (R3-3) sign may be placed visible to traffic on the entrance ramp and through roadway at the gore area.
 
'''Support. '''[[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.37|EPG 903.2.37]], [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.38|EPG 903.2.38]], and [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.40|EPG 903.2.40]] contain further information on signing to avoid wrong-way movements at at-grade intersections on expressways.
 
{{SpanID|fig903.2.39.1}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.39.1. Example of Application of Regulatory Signing and Pavement Markings at an Exit Ramp Termination to Deter Wrong-Way Entry.jpg|800px|alt=The example shows a horizontal two-lane roadway with an entrance ramp connecting from the north and a vertical exit ramp intersecting from the south.
At the top of the figure, on the horizontal roadway, a guide sign for “I-70 East Columbia” is shown to the right of the roadway, adjacent to a R3-1 “No Right Turn” sign and two R6-1 one-way signs, all facing eastbound traffic. Further east, at the intersection, there are two additional R6-1 one-way signs, back to back—one facing eastbound traffic and the other facing westbound traffic.
At the bottom of the figure, on the vertical exit ramp, two R5-1a “WRONG WAY” signs are shown, one on each side of the roadway, both facing north. A Wrong-Way arrow is marked on the pavement between the signs. Further north, two R5-1 “DO NOT ENTER” signs are shown on both sides of the roadway, both facing north. As the exit ramp approaches the intersection, it splits into two lanes, one for right turns and one for through/left turns, separated by a triangular-shaped channelizing island.
At the intersection of the exit ramp right-turn lane, a Wrong-Way arrow is marked on the pavement. A yield line pavement marking is shown across the lane. Adjacent to this marking and on the right side of the lane, an R1-2 “Yield” sign is shown, with an optional R1-1 “Stop” sign alternative, in which case the marking should be a stop line. Immediately behind these signs, an R5-1 “DO NOT ENTER” sign is shown facing toward the northeast and the horizontal roadway.
In the through/left-turn lane of the exit ramp, an R1-1 “Stop” sign is posted on the island in front of two back-to-back R6-1 one-way signs that face both directions of the horizontal roadway.
Spacing guidance is shown: the R5-1 signs are placed 50 to 80 feet from the intersection, while the R5-1a “WRONG WAY” signs are placed 200 to 250 feet from the DO NOT ENTER sign.|thumb|center|'''Figure 903.2.39.1.''' Example of Application of Regulatory Signing and Pavement Markings at an Exit Ramp Termination to Deter Wrong-Way Entry]]
 
{{SpanID|fig903.2.39.2}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.39.2. Locations of Wrong-Way signing for Divided Highways with Offset Left Turn Lanes.jpg|800px|alt=The example shows a horizontal divided highway intersected by a vertical two-lane roadway. The divided highway has two eastbound lanes, a median, and two westbound lanes, each with a left-turn lane at the intersection.
Starting with the eastbound approach, two R5-1a “WRONG WAY” signs are located outside of the travel lane, one on each side of the roadway, both facing east. Just east of these, an R5-1 “DO NOT ENTER” sign is posted on the median to the left of the eastbound left-turn lane, and another R5-1 sign is posted to the right of the eastbound right lane. Additionally, a third “DO NOT ENTER” sign is placed just east of the first sign on the right.
On the westbound approach, two R5-1a “WRONG WAY” signs are located outside of the travel lane, one on each side of the roadway, both facing west. Just west of these, an R5-1 “DO NOT ENTER” sign is posted on the median to the left of the westbound left-turn lane, and another R5-1 sign is posted to the right of the westbound right lane. Additionally, a third “DO NOT ENTER” sign is placed just west of the first sign on the right.
In total, six R5-1 “DO NOT ENTER” signs and four R5-1a “WRONG WAY” signs are shown, oriented toward drivers who may mistakenly travel the wrong way.|thumb|center|'''Figure 903.2.39.2. ''' Locations of Wrong-Way signing for Divided Highways with Offset Left Turn Lanes<br/><br/>'''Notes:'''<br/>
<ol style="margin-left: 1.5em;">
<li>Distances may be adjusted up to 20’ +/- based on engineering judgement</li>
<li>4”x72” red sign post delineators are optional</li>
<li>MoDOT maintained signs shall not be installed on the back of non-MoDOT maintained signs</li>
<li>See [[#fig903.2.41.1 |Figure 903.2.41.4 ]] for ONE WAY signing for Divided Highways with Offset Left Turn Lanes</li>
</ol>
]]
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.40}}903.2.40  ONE WAY Signs (R6-1 and R6-2) (MUTCD Section 2B.49)==
 
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|-
|Pole Setting Foam
||[[image:R6-1.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R6-1'''</center>|170px]]
|[[image:R6-2.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R6-2'''</center>|110px]]
|}
|}


'''Guidance.''' While supplies are not tracked and counted as inventory, these items should still be managed in an efficient manner. Like inventoried items, the quantity of any given supply should be based on the district’s average 36-month usage. The maximum inventory level for each supply item should not exceed the average 3-month usage rate and the minimum inventory level should be based on the time it takes to order and receive the supply item.
'''Standard. '''Except as provided in the sixth paragraph of this article, the ONE WAY (R6-1 or R6-2) sign shall be used to indicate streets or roadways upon which vehicular traffic is allowed to travel in one direction only.
 
ONE WAY signs shall be placed parallel to the one-way street at all alleys and roadways that intersect one-way roadways.
 
At the crossing of a roadway with a divided highway that functions as two separate intersections, ONE WAY signs shall be placed, visible to each crossroad approach, on the near right and far left corners of each intersection with the directional roadways (see [[#fig903.2.41.1|Figures 903.2.41.1]] and [[#fig903.2.41.2|903.2.41.2]]).
 
At the crossing of a roadway with a divided highway that functions as a single intersection Keep Right (R4-7) signs (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.34|EPG 903.2.34]]) and/or ONE WAY signs shall be installed (see [[#fig903.2.41.3|Figure 903.2.41.3]] and [[#fig903.2.41.4|Figure 903.2.41.4]]). If Keep Right signs are installed, they shall be placed as close as practicable to the approach ends of the medians and shall be visible to traffic on the divided highway as shown in [[#fig903.2.41.3|Figure 903.2.41.3]] and [[#fig903.2.41.4|Figure 903.2.41.4]]. If ONE WAY signs are installed, they shall be placed on the near right and far left corners of the intersection and shall be visible to each crossroad approach.
 
'''Option. '''At the crossing of a roadway with a divided highway, regardless of function as a single or separate intersections, ONE WAY signs may also be placed on the far right corner of the intersection as shown in [[#fig903.2.41.1|Figure 903.2.41.1]], [[#fig903.2.41.2|Figure 903.2.41.2]], [[#fig903.2.41.3|Figure 903.2.41.3]] and [[#fig903.2.41.4|Figure 903.2.41.4]].
 
ONE WAY signs may be omitted on the one-way roadways of divided highways, where the design of interchanges indicates the direction of traffic on the separate roadways.
 
'''Support. ''' [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.39|EPG 903.2.39]] contains information for the placement of ONE WAY signs at a crossroad with an interchange.
 
'''Standard. '''If used at unsignalized intersections with one-way streets, ONE WAY signs shall be placed on the near right and the far left corners of the intersection facing traffic entering or crossing the one-way street.


===903.2.19.2 Sign Inventory ===
If used at signalized intersections with one-way streets, ONE WAY signs shall be placed near the appropriate signal faces, on the poles holding the traffic signals, on the mast arm or span wire holding the signals, or at the locations specified for unsignalized intersections.
'''Support.''' Signs have a shelf-life and a warranty; the warranty begins the day the sign is fabricated.  All signs have a manufacturer’s ID decal on the back of the sign which includes the date of manufacturing that can be used to determine the age of signs in inventory.


The need for inventory of signs is based on the priorities assigned to sign replacement and maintenance and is focused on Priority 1 and Priority 2 signs.  These are signs which are critical to the safety of the roadway and need to be readily available to repair or replace damaged or missing signs in a short period of time, see [[#903.2.23 Emergency Response|EPG 903.2.23 Emergency Response]] for lists of priority signs and the required repair time.  Priority 1 and Priority 2 sign repairs cannot wait for a sign to be ordered, manufactured and shipped resulting in the need to keep a reasonable number of each type of sign on hand to fulfill these work orders.  
At unsignalized T-intersections where the roadway at the top of the T-intersection is a one-way roadway, ONE WAY signs shall be placed on the near-right and the far side of the intersection facing traffic on the stem approach.


'''Standard.'''  Priority 1 and Priority 2 signs shall be maintained in inventory to facilitate timely repairs.  For Priority 2 signs with usage less than 1 per year, a single sign shall be inventoried, or a 7-day accelerated order shall be used to acquire the sign when needed.
ONE WAY (R6-2) signs may be used in lieu of ONE WAY (R6-1) signs on mast arms for signals or where lateral space is limited.
Inventory levels for signs shall be based on the district’s average 36-month usage report for all sign commodities.  The maximum inventory level for each sign commodity shall not exceed the average 3-month usage rate.  The minimum inventory should be no less than your average usage in one month.


The maximum inventory levels for signs are maintained at the district warehouse.  Local maintenance buildings shall keep small inventories of Priority 1 signs and may keep a small inventory of select Priority 2 signs (see Figures 903.2.19.2.1 thru 903.2.19.2.2.5).
Where the central island of a roundabout allows for the installation of signs, ONE WAY signs may be used to direct traffic counter-clockwise around the central island (see [[#fig903.2.40.2|Figure 903.2.40.2]] and [[#fig903.2.40.3|Figure 903.2.40.3]]).


As signs are pulled from MoDOT inventories, the oldest signs shall be used first to ensure the department gets the maximum life from any given sign and to ensure inventory doesn’t exceed its shelf-life.  The age of the sign is determined by the manufacturing date found on the manufacture’s ID on the back of the sign.
'''Guidance. '''Where used on the central island of a roundabout, the mounting height of a ONE WAY sign should be at least 4 feet, measured vertically from the bottom of the sign to the elevation of the near edge of the traveled way.


'''Option.'''  Maximum inventory levels of signs may exceed the 3-month usage when signs are ordered to fulfill the needs of specific work orders generated by annual sign log inspections. To avoid an overabundance of signs at a building and to avoid overloading our vendors, orders need to be submitted at a rate that closely matches the crew’s ability to install the signs once they are delivered. These temporary inventory levels must be installed for the locations they were ordered for in less than a year.
{{SpanID|fig903.2.40.1}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.40.1 Example of Regulatory and Warning Signs for a Mini-Roundabout.png|center|thumb|alt=A central island surrounded by a circular roadway is shown with four roadways that enter from the north, south, east, and west.
On the roadway entering the circular roadway from the south, a sign assembly composed of a W2-6 sign mounted above a W13-1P plaque is shown to the right of the roadway facing south. Farther north, a W11-2 sign mounted above a W16-7P plaque is shown to the right of the roadway facing south in advance of a crosswalk. Just beyond this crosswalk, an R1-2 “YIELD” sign is shown on the right side of the roadway facing south, at the entrance to the mini-roundabout.
On the opposite side of the road, before the same crosswalk, a W11-2 sign mounted above a W16-7P plaque is shown facing north.|800px|'''Figure 903.2.40.1''' Example of Regulatory and Warning Signs for a Mini-Roundabout]]


'''Guidance.'''  Minimum inventory levels for each sign should be equal to the average 1-month usage rate. This would be the quantity of signs expected to be used during the time it takes the vendor to resupply the inventory with a new order.
{{SpanID|fig903.2.40.2}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.40.2 Example of Regulatory and Warning Signs for a One-Lane Roundabout.png|center|thumb|alt=A central island surrounded by a circular roadway is shown with four roadways that enter from the north, south, east, and west.
On the roadway entering the circular roadway from the south, a sign assembly composed of a W2-6 sign mounted above a W13-1P plaque is shown to the right of the roadway facing south. Farther north, a W11-2 sign mounted above a W16-7P plaque is shown to the right of the roadway facing south in advance of a crosswalk. Just beyond this crosswalk, an R1-2 “YIELD” sign is shown on the right side of the roadway facing south as it enters the one-lane roundabout.
Within the central island of the roundabout, an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign is shown facing south. In the median of the north approach, prior to entering the roundabout, an R1-2 “YIELD” sign is shown facing south.
On the opposite side of the south approach (before the same crosswalk), a W11-2 sign mounted above a W16-7P plaque is shown facing north.|800px|'''Figure 903.2.40.2''' Example of Regulatory and Warning Signs for a One-Lane Roundabout]]


<center>'''Table 903.2.19.2, Sign Priority Levels'''</center>
{{SpanID|fig903.2.40.3}}
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:center"
[[File:Figure 903.2.40.3 Example of a Regulatory and Warning Signs for a Two-Lane Roundabout with Consecutive Double lefts.png|center|thumb|alt=A central island surrounded by a circular roadway is shown with four roadways that enter from the north, south, east, and west.
|+
On the roadway entering the circular roadway from the south, a sign assembly composed of a W2-6 sign mounted above a W13-1P plaque is shown to the right of the roadway facing south. Farther north, a W11-2 sign mounted above a W16-7P plaque is shown to the right of the roadway facing south in advance of a crosswalk. Just beyond this crosswalk, an R1-2 “YIELD” sign is shown on the right side of the roadway facing south as it enters the one-lane roundabout.
!style="background:#BEBEBE" rowspan="2"|Sign Priority!!style="background:#BEBEBE" colspan="2"|Inventory Levels*!!style="background:#BEBEBE" rowspan="2"|Kept in Stock
Within the central island of the roundabout, an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign is shown facing south. In the median of the northbound approach, prior to entering the roundabout, an R1-2 “YIELD” sign is shown facing south. Additionally, in this same median, two sign assemblies composed of a W2-6 sign mounted above a W13-1P plaque are shown: one placed before the crosswalk facing south, and another placed just beyond the crosswalk facing north.
On the opposite side of the north approach (before the same crosswalk), a W11-2 sign mounted above a W16-7P plaque is shown facing north.|800px|'''Figure 903.2.40.3''' Example of a Regulatory and Warning Signs for a Two-Lane Roundabout with Consecutive Double lefts]]
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.41}}903.2.41  Divided Highway Crossing Signs (R6-3 and R6-3a) (MUTCD Section 2B.50)==
 
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|-
!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Max !!style="background:#BEBEBE"| Min
||[[image:R6-3.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R6-3'''</center>|150px]]
|[[image:R6-3a.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R6-3a'''</center>|150px]]
|}
 
'''Standard. '''On unsignalized minor-street approaches from which both left turns and right turns are permitted onto a divided highway at a crossing that functions as two separate intersections (see  [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.23|EPG 903.1.23]]), a Divided Highway Crossing (R6-3 or R6-3a) sign shall be used to advise road users that they are approaching an intersection with a divided highway (see [[#fig903.2.41.1|Figure 903.2.41.1]] and [[#fig903.2.41.2|Figure 903.2.41.2]]).
 
If a Divided Highway Crossing sign is used at a four-leg intersection, the R6-3 sign shall be used. If used at a T-intersection, the R6-3a sign shall be used.
 
The Divided Highway Crossing sign shall be located on the near right corner of the intersection, mounted beneath a STOP or YIELD sign or on a separate support.
 
The DIVIDED HIGHWAY (R6-3b) sign may be used in situations where the R6-3 or R6-3a Divided Highway Crossing signs may be confusing.
 
{{SpanID|fig903.2.41.1}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.41.1 ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Median Widths Greater than 150 Feet.png|center|thumb|alt=The example shows a horizontal divided highway intersected by a vertical two-lane roadway. The divided highway has two lanes to the east, a wide median greater than 150 feet, and two lanes to the west, each with a left-turn lane at the intersection.
On the vertical roadway, northbound approach, on the right just before the intersection with the east lanes there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with an R1-1 “STOP” sign and an R6-3 “Divided Highway” sign, all facing south. Behind these signs, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing north. Just past the intersection with the east lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign on the right corner facing south.
Further north, at the intersection with the west lanes, an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with an R1-1 “STOP” sign faces south. Behind this sign, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing north. Just past the intersection with the west lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign on the right corner facing south.
On the vertical roadway, southbound approach, the signing is mirrored. On the right just before the intersection with the west lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with an R1-1 “STOP” sign and an R6-3 “Divided Highway” sign, all facing north. Behind these signs, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing south. Just past the intersection with the west lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign on the right corner facing north.
Further south, at the intersection with the east lanes, an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with an R1-1 “STOP” sign faces north. Behind this sign, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing south. Just past the intersection with the east lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign on the right corner facing north.|800px|'''Figure 903.2.41.1''' ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Median Widths Greater than 150 Feet]]
 
{{SpanID|fig903.2.41.2}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.41.2 ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Median Widths of 60 Feet to 150 Feet.png|center|thumb|alt=The example shows a horizontal divided highway intersected by a vertical two-lane roadway. The divided highway has two lanes to the east, a median width between 60 and 150 feet, and two lanes to the west, each with a left-turn lane at the intersection.
On the vertical roadway, northbound approach, on the right just before the intersection with the east lanes there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with an R1-1 “STOP” sign and an R6-3 “Divided Highway” sign, all facing south. Behind these signs, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing north. Just past the intersection with the east lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign on the right side of the roadway facing south.
Further north, at the intersection with the west lanes, an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with either an R1-1 “STOP” sign or an R1-2 “YIELD” sign faces south. Behind this sign, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing north. Just past the intersection with the west lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign on the right corner facing south.
On the vertical roadway, southbound approach, the signing is mirrored. On the right just before the intersection with the west lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with an R1-1 “STOP” sign and an R6-3 “Divided Highway” sign, all facing north. Behind these signs, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing south. Just past the intersection with the west lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign on the right side of the roadway facing north.
Further south, at the intersection with the east lanes, an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with either an R1-1 “STOP” sign or an R1-2 “YIELD” sign faces north. Behind this sign, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing south. Just past the intersection with the east lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign on the right corner facing north.|800px|'''Figure 903.2.41.2''' ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Median Widths of 60 Feet to 150 Feet]]
 
{{SpanID|fig903.2.41.3}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.41.3 ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Median Widths Narrower Than 60 Feet.png|center|thumb|alt=A vertical two-lane roadway intersects a horizontal highway with two lanes to the east, a median narrower than 60 feet, and two lanes to the west. Each direction of the horizontal highway has a left-turn lane at its intersection with the vertical roadway.
On the vertical roadway, northbound approach, on the right just before the intersection with the east lanes there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with an R1-1 “STOP” sign and an R6-3 “Divided Highway” sign, all facing south. Behind these signs, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing north. Just past the intersection with the east lanes, there is an R4-7 “KEEP RIGHT” sign posted on the median facing west.
Further north, past the intersection with the west lanes, an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign faces south (optional).
On the vertical roadway, southbound approach, the signing is mirrored. On the right just before the intersection with the west lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with an R1-1 “STOP” sign and an R6-3 “Divided Highway” sign, all facing north. Behind these signs, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing south. Just past the intersection with the west lanes, there is an R4-7 “KEEP RIGHT” sign posted on the median facing east.
Further south, past the intersection with the east lanes, an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign faces north (optional).|800px|'''Figure 903.2.41.3''' ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Median Widths Narrower Than 60 Feet]]
 
{{SpanID|fig903.2.41.4}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.41.4 ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Offset Left Turn Lanes.png|center|thumb|alt=A vertical two-lane roadway intersects a horizontal highway with two lanes to the east, a median, and two lanes to the west. Each direction of the horizontal highway has a left-turn lane at its intersection with the vertical roadway, and the left-turn lanes are offset across the median.
On the vertical roadway, north approach, on the right just before the intersection with the east lanes there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with an R1-1 “STOP” sign and an R6-3 “Divided Highway” sign, all facing south. Behind these signs, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing north. Just past the intersection with the east lanes, there is an R4-7 “KEEP RIGHT” sign posted on the median facing west.
Further north, past the intersection with the west lanes, an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign faces south (optional).
On the vertical roadway, south approach, the signing is mirrored. On the right just before the intersection with the west lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with an R1-1 “STOP” sign and an R6-3 “Divided Highway” sign, all facing north. Behind these signs, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing south. Just past the intersection with the west lanes, there is an R4-7 “KEEP RIGHT” sign posted on the median facing east.
Further south, past the intersection with the east lanes, an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign faces north (optional).|800px|'''Figure 903.2.41.4''' ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Offset Left Turn Lanes]]
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.42}}903.2.42  Parking, Standing, and Stopping Signs (R7 and R8 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.52)==
 
'''Support. '''Parking signs pertain to the parking, standing, and stopping of vehicles along the roadway and in designated parking areas. They cover a wide variety of regulations, and only general guidance can be provided here. The word “standing” when used on the R7 and R8 series of signs refers to the practice of a driver keeping the vehicle in a stationary position while continuing to occupy the vehicle. The word “stopping” when used on the R7 and R8 series signs refers to any vehicle, occupied by a driver or not, that stops other than to avoid conflict with other traffic or to comply with official direction. Other types of activities such as active loading, active passenger loading, and/or waiting might be established in State or local codes for use on R7 and R8 series signs.
 
Parking signs are categorized as either (1) prohibiting parking or (2) permitting parking with restrictions on how parking is allowed.
 
The types of parking, standing, or stopping prohibitions that might be encountered include, but are not limited to:
::A. Prohibited at all times;
::B. Prohibited only at certain times of the day and/or days of the week;
::C. Prohibited with exceptions, such as for bus stops, loading/unloading zones, persons with disabilities, or electric vehicle charging stations; or
::D. Prohibited under certain conditions, such as Snow Emergency Routes.
 
Permissive parking signs allowing parking with restrictions include, but are not limited to:
::A. Parking only allowed for limited time duration (such as 30 minutes or for 1 hour);
::B.  Metered parking requiring payment at an individual or a multi-space parking meter, or through electronic means such as by telephone or mobile application.;
::C. Parking only for specific persons (such as those with disabilities or patrons or employees of a business) or specific vehicle types (such as electric vehicles, police/government vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles, or taxis);
::D. Angled or back-in angled parking when it is not commonly used in the area;
::E. Parking programs such as neighborhood/residential permits, school areas, or special events; and
::F. Emergency parking or stopping only.
 
The District Engineer is authorized to act on requests for parking restrictions within incorporated areas upon receipt of a city ordinance requesting the same.
 
'''Option. '''The District Engineer may authorize parking restrictions after completion of a study by the district staff and review by county and local law enforcement.
 
Within interchange areas and on ramps the standard NO PARKING ANYTIME (R7-1) sign may be used.
 
'''Guidance. '''Local law enforcement agencies should be consulted when determining if there is a need for no parking signs to be installed.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.43}}903.2.43  Design of Parking, Standing, and Stopping Signs (MUTCD Section 2B.53)==
<center>
{| style="text-align: center;"
|-
|-
|Priority 1|| 3 months|| 1 month|| Required
| [[File:R7-1.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-1 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-108.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-108 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-111.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-111 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-111a.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-111a '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-112.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-112 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-112a.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-112a '''</center>]]
|-
|-
|Priority 2|| 3 months|| 1 month|| Required
| [[File:R7-112b.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-112b '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-113.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-113 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-113aP.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-113aP '''</center>]][[File:R7-113bP.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-113bP '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-114a.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-114a '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-114b.jpg|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-114b '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-201P.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-201P '''</center>]]
|-
|-
|Priority 3 high usage|| 3 months|| 1 month|| Optional
| [[File:R7-202P.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-202P '''</center>]]
|-
| [[File:R7-5.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-5 '''</center>]]
|Priority 3 low usage|| 0|| 0|| Not Recommended
| [[File:R7-8.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-8 '''</center>]]
|-
| [[File:R7-8aP.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-8aP '''</center>]]
|colspan="4"|'''*''' Inventory levels of each sign number are based on the 36-month average usage for the district
| [[File:R7-35.png|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-35 '''</center>]]
 
|}
|}
</center>
'''Standard. '''Parking, standing, or stopping signs shall be rectangular.
Public agencies shall follow established law (State law, local ordinance, or regulation) as adopted by the authorized agency regarding what messages are allowed on parking signs.
The legend on parking signs shall state applicable regulations. Parking signs shall comply with the standards of shape, color, and location.
Prohibitive parking signs shall be used where parking is prohibited at all times or at specific times. Except as otherwise provided in this article, parking signs shall have a red legend and border on a white background and, when the parking prohibition symbol is used, the symbol “P” shall be black.
Permissive parking signs shall be used where only time-limited parking or parking in a particular manner is allowed. Permissive parking signs shall have a green legend and border on a white background.
'''Guidance. '''Parking information, should be displayed from top to bottom of the sign, as applicable, in the following order:
::A. The restriction or prohibition;
::B. The times of the day that it is applicable, if not all hours;
::C. The days of the week that it is applicable, if not every day;
::D. Qualifying or supplementary information;
::E. Exemptions to the restriction of prohibition; and
::F. Any tow-away message or symbol.
If the parking regulation applies to a limited area or zone, the limits of the regulation should be shown by arrows or supplemental plaques. If arrows are used and if the sign is at the end of a parking zone, there should be a single-headed arrow pointing in the direction that the regulation is in effect. If the sign is at an intermediate point in a zone, there should be a double-headed arrow pointing both ways. When a single sign is used at the transition point between two parking zones, it should display a right arrow and a left arrow pointing in the direction that the respective regulations apply.
'''Standard. '''The times and days for which the parking regulations are in effect shall be posted if they are not in effect at all times of day or all days of the week.


[[image: 903.2.19.2.2.jpg|center|600px]]
'''Option. '''As an alternate to the use of arrows to show designated restriction zones, the following word messages may be used: BEGIN, END, HERE TO CORNER, HERE TO ALLEY, and THIS SIDE OF SIGN.
<center>'''Figure 903.2.19.2.1'''</center>
 
[[image: 903.2.19.2.3.jpg|center|600px]]
<center>'''Figure 903.2.19.2.2'''</center>


'''Standard. '''Where parking spaces are reserved for persons with disabilities, the Accessible Parking (R7-8) sign shall be used to designate the space and shall display the official International Symbol of Accessibility.


[[image: 903.2.19.2.4.jpg|center|600px]]
Where parking spaces that are reserved for persons with disabilities are designed to accommodate wheelchair vans, a VAN ACCESSIBLE (R7-8aP) plaque shall be mounted below the R7-8 sign.  
<center>'''Figure 903.2.19.2.3'''</center>


The RESERVED PARKING for Persons with Disabilities (R7-8) sign shall be installed in rest area parking lots 10 ft. to 16 ft. from the edge of the handicap ramp.


[[image: 903.2.19.2.5.jpg|center|500px]]
'''Support. '''The R7-8L has a left arrow and the R7-8R a right arrow. The R7-8 does not have an arrow.
<center>'''Figure 903.2.19.2.4'''</center>


'''Guidance. '''Where parking spaces are designated for parking of electric vehicles, an Electric Vehicle Parking (R7-111 series, R7-112 series, and R7-113) sign should be installed adjacent to the designated spaces. Where there is no time limit, the R7-111 series sign should be used. Where parking is subject to a time limit, the R7-112 series sign should be used.


Where parking spaces are only designated for charging of electric vehicles, an R7-113 sign or R7-114 series sign should be installed adjacent to the designated spaces.


[[image: 903.2.19.2.6.jpg|center|700px]]
Where additional restrictions apply while a vehicle occupies the designated space, the R7-113P series plaques should be installed below the R7-113 sign or the R7-114 series signs.
<center>'''Figure 903.2.19.2.5'''</center>


===903.2.19.3 Sign Storage and Handling===
'''Option. '''A Tow-Away Zone (R7-201P or R7-201aP) plaque may be mounted below any parking prohibition sign. The word legend TOW-AWAY ZONE may be incorporated into the parking prohibition sign in lieu of using a separate plaque.  
'''Support.''' Proper storage and handling of highway signs before and during installation is critical to achieve the maximum sign life and effectiveness. Sign sheeting is easily damaged by impacts, abrasions, weight, heat and moisture before installation.  Sign sheeting has a minimum of a 10-year warranty from the date of fabrication, however, this warranty is void if the sheeting is damaged due to improper storage or handling.


'''Standard.'''  Flat sheet signs shall be stored indoors in a cool and dry environment with the signs being placed in the racks on their edge.  If for some reason signs are wet in storage or shipping, they shall be removed from any packaging immediately, separated and placed on their vertical edge so they can air dry.
The R7-201P plaque may have a black or red symbol and border on a white background.  


'''Support.''' Extruded panel signs should be stored indoors in a cool and dry location, however, given the size of these signs this is not always possible.  If extruded panel must be stored outdoors, they need to be kept dry.  Ideally, signs would be removed from their packaging, assembled (in whole or in pieces) and temporarily mounted to posts or an A-frame trailer so water can shed off of the sign face and air dry as if they were installed permanently.
'''Guidance. '''When a legend other than that on the standard parking signs is necessary, letter height, symbol size, and basic sign layout should be consistent with the those shown on the standard parking signs as detailed in the FHWA “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see  [[911 General (MUTCD Part 1) #911.1.5|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]). '''


During transport, flat sheet signs should be carried on their vertical edge and both flat sheet and extruded signs (and pieces of signs) should be secured so the sign sheeting side of the signs do not rub on one another or against the vehicles causing damage.
In general, the letter height of the principal legend on parking signs sized for urbanized applications should be at least 2 inches.  


===903.2.19.4 Post Inventory===
The NO PARKING ON BRIDGE sign (R7-35) should be used at bridge ends or on bridges where motorists tend to block or endanger through traffic by parking on the bridge.
'''Support.'''  Unlike signs, sign posts do not have a shelf-life.  While they can be stored indefinitely without loss of integrity, it is still critical to properly manage inventory levels to ensure the best use of MoDOT resources.


<center>'''Table 903.2.19.4, Post Inventory Levels'''</center>
=={{SpanID|903.2.44}}903.2.44  Placement of Parking, Standing, and Stopping Signs (MUTCD Section 2B.54)==
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:center"
 
|+
'''Support. '''The efficacy of parking, standing, and stopping signs, when used on conventional roads in urbanized or developed environments, depends on their visibility and consistent placement along a street or within a particular block. It is often impracticable for the entire legend to be legible from similar distances as for other types of signs. Therefore, it is important that their conventional form be recognizable from an adequate distance such that the road user can obtain the information upon closer inspection.
!style="background:#BEBEBE" rowspan="2"|Post Type!!style="background:#BEBEBE" rowspan="2"|Post Size!!style="background:#BEBEBE" colspan="2"|Inventory Levels!! style="background:#BEBEBE" rowspan="2"|Kept in Stock
 
'''Guidance. '''When signs with arrows are used to indicate the extent of the restricted zones, the signs should be set at an angle of not less than 30 degrees nor more than 45 degrees with the line of traffic flow in order to be visible to approaching traffic.
 
When signs are placed at the head of perpendicular parking stalls, the signs should be parallel to the roadway facing the parking stall.
 
Spacing of signs should be based on legibility, conspicuity, and sign orientation.
 
If the zone is long, signs should be used at intermediate points within the zone.
 
If the signs are mounted at an angle of 90 degrees to the curb line, two signs should  be mounted back to back at the transition point between two parking zones, each with an appended THIS SIDE OF SIGN (R7-202P) supplemental plaque.
 
If the signs are mounted at an angle of 90 degrees to the curb line, signs without any arrows or appended plaques should be used at intermediate points within a parking zone, facing in the direction of approaching traffic. Otherwise, the standards of placement should be the same as for signs using directional arrows.
 
'''Option. '''Blanket parking regulations that apply to an entire jurisdiction may, if legal, be posted in the vicinity of the jurisdictional boundary lines. Blanket parking regulations that apply to a posted zone or district may, if legal, be posted at the entry points to the zone or district.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.45}}903.2.45 Emergency Restriction Signs (R8-7) (MUTCD Section 2B.55)==
 
[[image:R8-7.gif|center|150px|thumb|<center>'''R8-7'''</center>]]
 
'''Standard. '''Emergency Restriction signs shall be rectangular and shall have a black legend and border on a white background.
 
'''Option. '''The EMERGENCY STOPPING ONLY (R8-7) sign  may be used to discourage or prohibit shoulder parking on the interstate and other freeway highway systems based on the Missouri Revised Statutes, Section 304.024.
 
'''Guidance. '''The use of the EMERGENCY STOPPING ONLY sign should be held to a minimum and not erected unless there is a specific problem.
 
'''Support. ''' [[913.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 8B) #913.2.7|EPG 913.2.7]] contains information for the use of the DO NOT STOP ON TRACKS (R8-8) sign to discourage or prohibit parking or stopping on railroad or light rail transit tracks.
 
 
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.46}}903.2.46  Pedestrian Crossing Signs (R9-3) (MUTCD Section 2B.57)==
<center>
{|
|-
|-
!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Max !!style="background:#BEBEBE"| Min*
| [[File:R9-3.jpg|thumb|center|<center>'''R9-3'''</center>|120px]]
| [[File:R9-3a.jpg|thumb|center|<center>'''R9-3a'''</center>|120px]]
|}</center>
 
'''Option. '''Pedestrian Crossing signs may be used to limit pedestrian crossing to specific locations.
 
'''Standard. '''If used, Pedestrian Crossing signs shall be installed to face pedestrian approaches.
 
'''Option. '''The No Pedestrian Crossing (R9-3) sign may be used to prohibit pedestrians from crossing a roadway at an undesirable location or in front of a school or other public building where a crossing is not designated.
 
The NO PEDESTRIAN CROSSING (R9-3a) word message sign may be used as an alternate to the R9-3 symbol sign.
 
'''Support. '''Pedestrians with vision disabilities might need features other than traffic control devices to provide effective communication of the prohibition of pedestrian crossing.
 
=={{SpanID|903.2.47}}903.2.47  Traffic Signal Pedestrian and Bicyclist Actuation Signs (R10-3b, R10-3d, R10-3e, R10-4, and R10-25) (MUTCD Section 2B.58)==
 
<center>
{|
|-
|-
|rowspan="2"|Wood|| 4x4 ||3 months|| 0|| Optional
| [[File:R10-3b.jpg|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-3b'''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-3d.jpg|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-3d'''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-3e.jpg|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-3e'''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-4.jpg|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-4'''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-25.jpg|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-25'''</center>]]
|-
|-
|4x6|| 3 months|| 0|| Optional
|}
|-
</center>
|U-Channel|| 3 lb/ft|| 3 months|| 2 months|| Required
 
|-
'''Standard. '''Where manual actuation of a traffic signal is required for pedestrians or bicyclists to call a signal phase to cross the roadway, traffic signal signs applicable to pedestrian actuation or bicyclist actuation shall be mounted immediately above or incorporated into the push button detector units (see [[902.9 Pedestrian Control Features (MUTCD Chapter 4I) #902.9.5|EPG 902.9.5]]). '''
|rowspan="2"|PSST ||2x2 ||3 months|| 1.5 months|| Required
 
|-
'''Support. '''Traffic signal signs applicable to pedestrians include:
|2.5x2.5|| 3 months|| 1.5 months|| Required
::A. Push Button for Walk Signal (R10-3 series), and
|-
::B. Push Button for Green Signal (R10-4 series).
|rowspan="3"|Pipe***|| 2.5" ID ||6 months ||3 months or 2 posts|| Recommended**
 
|-
'''Option. '''If the signalized intersection has push buttons but no pedestrian heads the PUSH BUTTON FOR GREEN SIGNAL (R10-4) sign may be used instead of the R10-3e and R10-3j signs.
|3" ID ||6 months ||3 months or 2 posts|| Recommended**
 
|-
'''Guidance. '''The finger in the push button symbol on the R10-4 sign should point in the same direction as the arrow on the sign.
|4" ID ||6 months ||3 months or 2 posts ||Recommended**
 
|-
'''Option. '''Where symbolic pedestrian signal indications are used, an educational sign (R10-3b) may be used at signalized intersections. The R10-3d educational sign may be used to inform pedestrians that the pedestrian clearance time is sufficient only for the pedestrian to cross to the median at locations where pedestrians cross in two stages using a median refuge island. The R10-3e educational sign may be used where countdown pedestrian signals have been provided.
|rowspan="6"|Wide Flange***|| #1 ||6 months ||3 months or 3 posts ||Recommended**
 
|-
The R10-3e sign shall be used with pre-timed pedestrian signals. For actuated pedestrian signal, the R10-3eL and R10-3eR shall be mounted immediately above or incorporated in pedestrian pushbutton units.
|#2 ||6 months ||3 months or 3 posts ||Recommended**
 
|-
The R10-25 sign may be used where a push button detector has been installed for pedestrians to activate In-Roadway Warning Lights (see [[902.20 In-Roadway Warning Lights (MUTCD Chapter 4U) #902.20|EPG 902.20]]) or flashing beacons that have been added to the pedestrian warning signs.
|#3 ||6 months ||3 months or 3 posts ||Recommended**
 
|-
=={{SpanID|903.2.48}}903.2.48  Traffic Signal Signs and Plaques (R10-5 through R10-23a) (MUTCD Section 2B.59)==
|#4 ||6 months ||3 months or 3 posts ||Recommended**
<center>
|-
{|
|#5 ||6 months ||3 months or 3 posts ||Recommended**
|-
|-
|#6 ||6 months ||3 months or 3 posts ||Recommended**
| [[File:R10-5.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-5 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-6.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-6 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-7.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-7 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-10.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-10 '''</center>]]
|-
|-
|colspan="5" align="left"|'''*''' Minimum inventory levels based on contract delivery period of each post type
| [[File:R10-12.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-12 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-12a.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-12a '''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-13.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-13 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-14.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-14 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-14a.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-14a '''</center>]]
|-
|-
|colspan="5" align="left"|'''**''' Given the long lead times for acquiring these types of posts, it is recommended districts keep the minimum levels indicated unless a size is extremely rarely used in a district. If one set of posts are retained as a minimum, the longest length that may be needed should be what is retained.
| [[File:R10-14b.jpg|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-14b '''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-15.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-15 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-23.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-23 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-23a.jpg|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-23a '''</center>]]
|-
|-
|colspan="5" align="left"|'''***''' If a district has inventory greater than the maximum listed, the posts shall be retained, and their availability made known to the rest of the state.  They shall not be scrapped unless they no longer meet MoDOT specifications.
|}
|}
</center>
'''Option. '''To supplement traffic signal control, traffic signal (R10-5 through R10-30) signs may be used to regulate road users.
Traffic signal signs may be installed at certain locations to clarify signal control. Among the legends that may be used for this purpose are:
::A. LEFT (RIGHT) ON GREEN ARROW ONLY (R10-5),
::B. STOP HERE ON RED (R10-6) for observance of stop lines,
::C. DO NOT BLOCK INTERSECTION (R10-7) for avoidance of traffic obstructions,
::D. LEFT (RIGHT) TURN SIGNAL (R10-10),
::E. U TURN SIGNAL (R10-10a) for exclusive control of a U-turn movement,
::F. LEFT (RIGHT) TURN YIELD ON GREEN (symbolic circular green) (R10-12), and
::G. LEFT (RIGHT) TURN YIELD ON FLASHING YELLOW ARROW (R10-12a).


====903.2.19.4.1 Wood, U-Channel and PSST Posts====
'''Guidance. '''If used, the LEFT ON GREEN ARROW ONLY sign, the LEFT TURN SIGNAL sign, the LEFT TURN YIELD ON GREEN (symbolic circular green) sign, or the LEFT TURN YIELD ON FLASHING YELLOW ARROW sign should be located adjacent to the left-turn signal face.
'''Standard.''' Inventory levels for these posts shall be based on the district’s average 36-month usage report for all post commodities.  The maximum inventory level for each U-Channel and PSST post commodity shall not exceed the average 3-month usage rate.  Minimum inventory levels for these posts should typically equal the average number of posts used during the length of time it takes to order and receive new posts.


Wood posts shall be purchased on an as needed basis from local sources not only to minimize inventory levels, but to minimize the chances of waste due to the tendency of a wood post to warp and twist over time.
'''Standard. '''The LEFT TURN SIGNAL (R10-10L) sign has been discontinued by MoDOT. These signs shall remain in place until the circular red indication is replaced with a red left arrow (see [[902.6 Steady (Stop-and-Go) Operation of Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 4F) #902.6.6|EPG 902.6.6]] Signal Indications for Protected Only Mode Left-Turn Movements in a Separate Signal Face).


'''Option.'''  Maximum inventory levels of sign posts may exceed 3-month usage when posts are ordered to fulfill the needs of specific work orders generated by annual sign log inspections.  To avoid an overabundance of sign posts at a building and to avoid overloading our vendors, orders need to be submitted at a rate that closely matches the crew’s ability to install signs and posts once they are delivered. These temporary inventory levels must be installed for the locations they were ordered for in less than a year.  
If an existing R10-10L is at the end of its service life, it shall be removed, and the circular red indication shall be replaced with a red left arrow.


====903.2.19.4.2 Pipe and Wide Flange (I-Beam) Posts====
'''Guidance. '''If used, the RIGHT ON GREEN ARROW ONLY sign, the RIGHT TURN SIGNAL sign, or the RIGHT TURN YIELD ON FLASHING YELLOW ARROW sign should be located adjacent to the right-turn signal face.
'''Support.''' Pipe and Wide Flange posts are unique in that they are far more expensive to purchase compared to other MoDOT standard posts.  These designs are specific to MoDOT so a vendor must fabricate these post types as the orders are received resulting in long lead times for delivery.  The usage rates for these posts, especially for certain sizes of posts, are not as regular as other types of posts.  As a result, an inventory based on the 36-month average usage may not result in the proper number of posts in inventory.


Each post type comes in a variety of different lengths and each length is individually inventoried.  This variety of inventoried lengths was established to provide posts in inventory that would be as close to the length needed to reduce the amount of waste as posts were trimmed to the proper length.  This method was established when post usage on all posts was much higher and inventory level management was not as critical.
'''Option. '''If used, a U TURN SIGNAL (R10-10a) sign may be installed adjacent to the signal face that exclusively controls a U-turn movement.


'''Standard.''' Inventory levels for these posts shall be based on the district’s average 36-month usage report for all post commodities. The maximum inventory level for each Pipe and Wide Flange post commodity shall not exceed the average 6-month usage rate.
'''Standard. '''The CROSSWALK—STOP ON RED (symbolic circular red) (R10-23) and STOP ON RED-YIELD ON FLASHING RED AFTER STOP (R10-23a) signs shall only be used in conjunction with pedestrian hybrid beacons (see [[902.10 Pedestrian Hybrid Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4J) #902.10.2|EPG 902.10.2]]).


'''Guidance.'''  Minimum inventory levels for these posts should typically equal the average number of posts used during the length of time it takes to order and receive new posts. However, due to the long delivery lead times for Pipe and Wide Flange posts, the minimum quantity for these posts typically should not be zero unless a size of post is very rarely used in the district. In these cases, a minimum quantity of 2-3 should be kept on hand to repair or install one sign for emergency situations.
The EMERGENCY SIGNAL (R10-13) sign shall be used in conjunction with emergency-vehicle traffic control signals (see [[902.13 Traffic Control Signals for Emergency-Vehicle Access (MUTCD Chapter 4M) #902.13.2|EPG 902.13.2]]).


For low usage post types, such as structural #6 Wide Flange posts, it is important to have posts on hand for unexpected needs; however, maintaining a minimum inventory of all available sizes is not recommended.  For these low usage posts, the longest post length that may be needed in the district is what should be inventoried, and any actual length needed can be cut from this length. While this will likely generate greater waste as more posts may be cut off to size the post for the need, this waste is preferred over excessive numbers of posts of various lengths on inventory.
The EMERGENCY SIGNAL—STOP ON FLASHING RED (R10-14 or R10-14a) sign shall be used in conjunction with emergency-vehicle hybrid beacons (see [[902.14 Hybrid Beacons for Emergency-Vehicle Access (MUTCD Chapter 4N) #902.14.2|EPG 902.14.2]]).


====903.2.19.4.3 Post Storage and Handling====
'''Option. '''If needed for extra emphasis, a STOP HERE ON FLASHING RED (R10-14b) sign may be installed with an emergency-vehicle hybrid beacon.


'''Support.''' Unlike signs, posts do not have a shelf life and can be stored indefinitely without loss of integrity if stored properly.
'''Standard. '''The Left Turn Yield to Bicycles (R10-12b) sign shall be limited to applications where the conflicting bicyclist movement would be unexpected in direction, location, or similar condition that would tend to violate the expectation of a turning motorist.


'''Standard.''' Sign posts shall be stored up off the ground to avoid corrosion that would result from ground contact.
'''Guidance. '''The Left Turn Yield to Bicycles sign should be located adjacent to the left-turn signal face.  


'''Guidance.''' If the galvanized coating of the posts is damaged, it should be patched using a zinc-based product to prevent corrosion.
Currently the R10-12b sign is not used by MoDOT.  Contact the Highway Safety and Traffic division when considering the use of this sign.


==903.2.20 Sign and Post Ordering==
Where conditions might warrant additional emphasis to drivers turning at a signalized intersection where potential pedestrian conflicts might not be readily apparent, a Turning Vehicles Yield to Pedestrians (R10-15) sign may be used.
'''Support.'''  Ordering practices have a direct impact on pricing and vendor participation in our contracts.  The primary factor is the quantity of materials ordered at one time and more specifically placing small orders for items which are expensive to ship like sign posts and signs.  Shipping costs per item for large items tends to decrease as quantities increase.  As an example, the shipping costs for 20 posts on a flatbed truck is the same as it is for a shipment of 200 posts, but if posts are ordered in quantities of 20, the cost of each post is higher as the shipping costs are associated to a smaller number of posts.


===903.2.20.1 Sign Ordering===
The R10-15 series signs, where used, should be placed as follows:
'''Support.'''  MoDOT began outsourcing the fabrication of signs for maintenance operations and closed its Sign Production Center in 2012.  This change also incorporated many modifications to the way MoDOT did business. MoDOT eliminated many department specific sign designs and adopted federal sign standards. The funding for the acquisition of signs was transferred from central office to the districts and the sign ordering practices were structured to better accommodate acquiring signs through a 3rd party vendor.  
::A. On the near right corner of the signalized intersection for right-turning vehicles.
::B. On the far left corner of the signalized intersection for the left-turning vehicles onto a two-way street.
::C. On the near left corner of the signalized intersection for left-turning vehicles from a one-way street onto a one-way street.


MoDOT’s sign outsourcing contract is set up on a weekly cycle format.  Orders are submitted to the vendor on Wednesday of each week with normal delivery time being 21 calendar days starting on the next day (Thursday).  There are accelerated delivery timelines for special needs, 7-day and 14-day deliveries, that can be submitted any day of the week.  There is also a 36-hour rush order; however, this is only utilized for critical needs and its use must be approved by Highway Safety and Traffic.  Pricing for signs in this contract is by square foot and the contract is separated into three categories of flat sheet signs, extruded panel signs and a unique category that contains items such as stop/slow paddles and delineators.
=={{SpanID|903.2.49}}903.2.49 No Turn on Red Signs (R10-11 and R10-30a) (MUTCD Section 2B.60)==
The way sign orders are assembled has a dramatic impact on the amount of time it takes to process them once submitted.  The following guidance was developed to help stream-line the process and control the overall cost of the signs MoDOT purchases.


'''Guidance.''' A district sign warehouse inventory should fill a large portion of sign requests for Priority 1 and Priority 2 signs as well as high usage signs.  Requests for signs not kept in inventory should be consolidated and added to a weekly sign order.  Replenishment of inventory should also be added to the weekly sign order.  Weekly orders should be submitted as a normal 21-day order with 7-day and 14-day accelerated orders being reserved for special cases where a sign (or small number of signs) must be received more quickly.  These accelerated orders need to be used sparingly as it places an extra burden on our vendor that can affect their ability to fulfill orders for the rest of the state if overused. 
<center>
{|
| [[File:R10-11.gif|thumb|center|105px|<center>'''R10-11'''</center>]]
|}
</center>


Sign orders are established to match the contract format so like sign types are contained on a given order resulting in one order per week for:
'''Standard. '''Where a right turn on a circular red signal indication (or a left turn on a circular red signal indication from a one-way street to a one-way street) is to be prohibited, a NO TURN ON RED (R10-11) word message sign shall be used.  
:* Flat sheet signs
:::o Adopt-a-Highway (as its own flat sheet order)
:* Structural signs
:* Unique signs.


If the number of sign requests per sign order exceeds the maximum limit of 99 lines, more than one weekly sign order shall be submitted for that sign type.
The NO TURN ON RED (R10-11) sign shall be used to prohibit a right turn on red.


Individual sign requests for like sign numbers and sizes should be pulled from stock, and a consolidated sign request should be submitted to replenish stock. This minimizes the time it takes for Highway Safety and Traffic Division to review and process sign orders, but more importantly, makes it more efficient for our vendor to determine what signs need to be fabricated for the state each week.  
'''Guidance. '''If used, the No Turn on Red sign should be installed near the appropriate signal head.


The weekly sign ordering process takes place as follows:  
A No Turn on Red sign should be considered when an engineering study finds that one or more of the following conditions exists:
::A. Inadequate sight distance to vehicles approaching from the left (or right, if applicable);
::B. Geometrics or operational characteristics of the intersection that might result in unexpected conflicts;
::C. An exclusive pedestrian or bicycle phase;
::D. An unacceptable number of conflicting pedestrian movements with right-turn-on-red maneuvers, especially involving children, older pedestrians, or persons with disabilities;
::E. More than three right-turn-on-red crashes reported in a 12-month period for the particular approach; or
::F. The skew angle of the intersecting roadways creates difficulty for drivers to see traffic approaching from their left (or right, if applicable).


:* Thursday through Tuesday – District warehouses receive and process sign requests from the field, filling requests from stock when possible and adding others to the list of signs to add to the weekly vendor order in the Sign Management System (SMS).
'''Standard. '''If an R10-11 sign with conventional road size as shown in [[#tab903.2.3|Table 903.2.3]] is used on an approach on the far side of the intersection and the distance between the stop line and the sign is greater than 120 feet, then a duplicate sign shall be located on the near side of the intersection to supplement the sign on the far side of the intersection.  
:* Tuesday – All vendor orders for the week need to be submitted Tuesday afternoon and no later than 5:00 pm so they will interface with SAM II for the creation of purchase orders that night. The vendor orders may be submitted earlier if employees are out of the office on Tuesday, but this will count toward the districts one purchase order per sign type for the week.
:* Wednesday – All purchase orders should be submitted to Central Office Highway Safety and Traffic Division by 10 am.  
:* Expedited purchase orders – 36-hour rush, 7 day, and 14-day orders may be sent to Central Office Highway Safety and Traffic Division any weekday. A district should give additional notice by phone or email of these orders, preferably in advance when the sign is first requested.
:* Receiving Signs – The district has five (5) business days after receipt of order (ARO) to notify the contractor of any visible damage or specification compliance issues.  After the five (5) working days the contractor will still be responsible for correcting any issues relating to specifications, quantity and quality, but liquidated damages will no longer be applicable.  The contractor will not be responsible to correct any damages not identified within the first five (5) business after receipt of the signs.  The contractor shall replace any sign(s) that fails inspection within the original delivery timeframe.  The contractor shall understand and agree any replacement sign(s) that is shipped beyond the original delivery timeframe shall be subject to liquidated damages.
:* Liquidated Damages – While it is not MoDOT’s intent to negatively impact our vendors by imposing liquidated damages, this contractual condition does ensure MoDOT’s orders receive priority. 
:* Shipping Locations – To keep sign costs as low as possible, the MoDOT shipping locations have been limited to the sign warehouses in NW, NE, KC, CD and SL only.  Due to the geographical size of SW and SE districts, each has a secondary delivery location at their regional offices in Joplin and Willow Springs.  While it would be more efficient for MoDOT to have signs shipped directly to each maintenance building, the shipping costs would be so extreme it would drive the cost of signs beyond acceptable limits.


===903.2.20.2 Post Ordering===
Except as provided by the option below, if right turn on red (RTOR) is restricted, then the NO TURN ON RED (R10-11) sign shall be used in lieu of the RIGHT TURN SIGNAL sign.
'''Guidance.'''  Post orders should incorporate quantities to replenish inventories at the district warehouse location as well as any additional needs at the various maintenance buildings to make these orders as cost effective as possible.


'''Standard.''' Due to the higher cost, long lead times for acquisition and sometimes erratic usage of Pipe and Wide Flange posts, districts shall first determine if the posts they need are available in any other district before ordering. At the time this guidance was drafted, there was excess inventory in the state for Pipe and Wide Flange posts which needed to be utilized.
'''Guidance. '''If used, the NO TURN ON RED sign should mounted adjacent to the far right signal indication. Refer to [[902.6 Steady (Stop-and-Go) Operation of Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 4F) #902.6.13|EPG 902.6.13]] to determine when a NO TURN ON RED sign should be considered.


'''Option.''' Once the state-wide inventory levels of Pipe and Wide Flange posts are normalized and the excess inventory is used, the practice of looking at state-wide inventories of Pipe and Wide Flange posts may be used to fulfill the need for these posts if the posts are needed more quickly than the vendor can supply them.
'''Option. '''Where space is limited, the square-shaped NO TURN ON RED (R10-11b) sign may be used instead of the R10-11 sign.


==903.2.21 Sign and Post Disposal==
When a no-turn-on-red restriction applies during certain time periods only, the following alternatives may be used:
'''Support.'''  Signs and Posts are state property and as such when no longer needed due to being obsolete, damaged or reaching the end of their service life need to be disposed of through the competitive bid process like any other MoDOT property.
::A Movement Prohibition (R3-1, R3-2, R3-4, R3-18, and R3-27) signs or NO TURN ON RED signs displayed by using a blank-out sign for the time period or one or more portion(s) of a particular cycle of the traffic control signal during which the prohibition is applicable; or


===903.2.21.1 Sign Disposal===
White LEDs may be used in the border and activated during periods of turn prohibition to enhance the sign conspicuity.
'''History.''' During the operations of MoDOT’s Sign Production Center (SPC), old signs were shipped to the Moberly Correctional Center where they were sorted and stored until the SPC submitted a request. Once the request was received, the prison would clean and straighten the appropriate sign blanks from the reclaimed inventory and ship to the SPC for production. At the peak, 75% of the sign the SPC produced were on these reclaimed sign blanks. When sign production was first outsourced, the use of reclaimed sign blanks was investigated; however, the shipping cost to the prison and then to the vendor was cost prohibitive, making the use of reclaimed sign blanks more expensive than the use of new aluminum. As a result, old signs are now sold for scrap at the end of their service life.


'''Support.''' All signs, including those that have reached the end of their service life or signs in warehouses which have become obsolete, are state property and must be disposed of as scrap. MoDOT’s policy does not permit the transfer ownership of its signs, other than selling signs as scrap, to other entities.  This makes prosecution for sign theft easy as anyone who is in the possession of one of these signs could not have legally acquired it.  
A RIGHT TURN ON RED MUST YIELD TO U-TURN (R10-30) sign may be installed to remind road users that they must yield to conflicting U-turn traffic on the street or highway onto which they are turning right on a red signal after stopping.


'''Standard.'''  When signs are removed from the field or warehouse inventory, they shall be collected and sold as scrap following General Services policies for the disposal of state materials.  The disposal of signs that are traffic control devices, whose use is regulated by state and federal law, includes an additional step.  Any traffic control devices which are taken out of service and scrapped (signs, signal heads, changeable message signs, etc.) must be sold using the GS-23 Bill of Sale of Traffic Control Devices.   The GS-23 contains a legal statement the purchaser of these materials is prohibited from reselling them in the form of traffic control devices, and reads:
A RIGHT TURN MUST YIELD TO U-TURN (R10-30a) sign may be installed under a yield sign to remind road users that they must yield to conflicting U-turn traffic on the street or highway on to which they are turning right controlled by a yield sign.


::''(3) TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES TO BE USED AS SCRAP ONLY:  The Buyer shall use traffic control devices purchased under this Bill of Sale for purposes other than traffic control unless the buyer is a political subdivision of the State of Missouri or authorized contractor. These materials shall not be sold or distributed in their current forms as traffic control devices.  In the event the Buyer chooses to sell said traffic control devices, the Buyer shall, prior to any sale, permanently deface or otherwise disable the traffic control devices to impede their use in current form as traffic control devices. Buyer also acknowledges that the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices, 23 CFR 655, 23 USC 109(d) and 23 USC 402(a) apply to the use of traffic control devices and do not allow the presentation of advertising messages or other messages unrelated to traffic control on a traffic control device. Buyer also acknowledges that Buyer has read and understands Missouri Statute 304.321, attached.''
=={{SpanID|903.2.50}}903.2.50 Ramp Metering Signs (R10-28 and R10-29) (MUTCD Section 2B.61)==


When sign inventory levels are managed correctly, there is typically no need to dispose of new/unused signs unless they are damaged.  However, if guidance from Highway Safety and Traffic Division is given to purge certain signs from inventory before use, these signs shall be disposed of in the same manner as used signs.
<center>
{|
| [[File:R10-28.jpg|thumb|center|95px|<center>'''R10-28'''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-29.jpg|thumb|center|125px|<center>'''R10-29'''</center>]]
|}
</center>


===903.2.21.2 Post Disposal===
'''Option. '''When ramp control signals (see [[902.16 Traffic Control Signals for Freeway Entrance Ramps (MUTCD Chapter 4P) #902.2.16|EPG 902.16]]) are used to meter traffic on a freeway or expressway entrance ramp, regulatory signs with legends appropriate to the control may be installed adjacent to the ramp control signal faces.


'''Support.''' Unlike signs, posts do not have a shelf-life so they can be stored indefinitely until needed.
For entrance ramps with only one controlled lane, an XX VEHICLE(S) PER GREEN (R10-28) sign may be used to inform road users of the number of vehicles that are permitted to proceed during each short display of the green signal indication. For entrance ramps with more than one controlled lane, an XX VEHICLE(S) PER GREEN EACH LANE (R10-29) sign may be used to inform road users of the number of vehicles that are permitted to proceed from each lane during each short display of the green signal indication.


'''Standard.''' The only time unused sign posts, stubs, hardware, etc. shall be sold as scrap is if those materials have been identified as no longer meeting state specifications. These materials shall remain in inventory until the district, or another district, is able to utilize them.  Used and damaged sign posts, stubs and hardware shall be disposed of as scrap following standard GS procedures.
'''Support. '''[[903.12 Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2L) #903.12|EPG 903.12]] contains provisions for the use of blank-out or changeable message signs when the metering is limited by time, day, or condition.


==903.2.22 Sign Inspection==
=={{SpanID|903.2.51}}903.2.51 KEEP OFF MEDIAN Sign (R11-1) (MUTCD Section 2B.62)==
'''Support.''' Sign inspection is critical to the maintenance of MoDOT’s highway signs.  The process assures we identify deficient signs, establishes the sign maintenance program for the year and is the department’s means to complying with federal sign maintenance standards.


Night time visual sign inspections are used to evaluate MoDOT’s signs as sign visibility is the most critical and difficult to achieve during dark conditions.  Signs become more critical at night as other visual cues a driver needs are going to fade away in the dark (trees, ditches, etc.).  Night time crashes are also typically higher compared to daytime crashes making highly visible signs a key tool to help reduce crashes. 
<center>
{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:10px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="260px" align="right"
{|
|-
|[[File:R11-1.jpg|thumb|center|105px|<center>'''R11-1'''</center>]]
|'''Training Document'''
|-
|align="center"|''' [http://sp/sites/ts/signing/RefTool/_layouts/15/WopiFrame.aspx?sourcedoc={B0E5C787-0CE8-467D-8B2C-990298C50B2C}&file=Sign%20Log%20Inspection%20Guidance.pptx&action=default Sign Log Inspection Guidance] '''
|}
|}
Inspectors need to view the signs during the inspection from the perspective of the motorist, from the driver seat, traveling in the lane and looking at the signs from the distances a driver needs to see the sign from to make appropriate decisions.  In addition to the guidance which follows, the Sign Log Inspection Guidance Training PowerPoint walks an inspector through the process and provides photographic examples of what to look for during an inspection.
</center>


'''Standard.'''   All MoDOT signs shall be inspected every other year based on the county they are located in.  Figure 903.2.22.1, and Table 903.2.22 for the county inspection schedule, indicates which counties shall be inspected in the even and odd year cycles.
'''Option. '''The KEEP OFF MEDIAN (R11-1) sign may be used to prohibit driving into or parking on the median.


'''Options.''' There are sign deficiencies which can be easily identified during normal day time operations outside the annual night time inspection period.  Typical deficiencies that are easy to identify during the day can include:
'''Guidance. '''The KEEP OFF MEDIAN sign should be installed on the left-hand side of the roadway within the median at random intervals as needed wherever there is a tendency for encroachment.
:* Vegetation growing in front of signs
:* Signs which are leaning and out of plumb or twisted away from traffic
:* Signs mounted on the incorrect post or have the incorrect number of posts
:* Missing breakaway devices or the breakaway device is incorrectly assembled
::o These are deficiencies which cannot be identified at night but can represent serious safety issues for the public.
:* Sign faces which have faded colors, pealing sign legend or sign sheeting
:* Signs which have been physically damaged by impacts, gun shots, etc.


Correcting deficiencies such as these outside the annual night time inspection will result in fewer deficiencies identified during the inspection and will result in the inspection taking less time to complete.
'''Support. '''A median is the area between two roadways of a divided highway measured from edge of travel way to edge of travel way or the area between a highway and an outer road.


<center>'''Table 903.2.22, Sign Inspection Schedule by District'''
=={{SpanID|903.2.52}}903.2.52  ROAD CLOSED Sign (R11-2) and LOCAL TRAFFIC ONLY Signs (R11-3 and R11-4) (MUTCD Section 2B.63)==
[[image:903.2.22-Sign inspection county listing 3-22-23.jpg|800px]]
</center>


<center>
{|
|[[File:R11-2.jpg|thumb|center|135px|<center>'''R11-2'''</center>]]
|[[File:R11-3.jpg|thumb|center|170px|<center>'''R11-3'''</center>]]
|[[File:R11-4.jpg|thumb|center|170px|<center>'''R11-4'''</center>]]
|}
</center>


[[image:903.2.22-Sign inspection map 3-22-23.jpg|center|600px]]
'''Guidance. '''The ROAD CLOSED (R11-2) sign should be installed where roads have been closed to all traffic (except authorized vehicles).
<center>'''Figure 903.2.22.1, Sign Inspection Schedule Map'''</center>


ROAD CLOSED—LOCAL TRAFFIC ONLY (R11-3) or ROAD CLOSED TO THRU TRAFFIC (R11-4) signs should be used where through traffic is not permitted, or for a closure some distance beyond the sign, but where the highway is open for local traffic up to the point of closure.


'''Standard.''' Annual night sign log inspections shall follow these basic criteria:
'''Standard. '''The Road Closed (R11-2, R11-3, and R11-4) signs shall be designed as horizontal rectangles. These signs shall be preceded by the applicable Advance Road Closed warning sign with the secondary legend AHEAD and, if applicable, an Advance Detour warning sign (see  [[616.8 TTC Zone Warning Signs (MUTCD Chapter 6H) #616.8.4|EPG 616.8.4]]).
:* Signs shall be inspected 1 hour after sunset and at least 1 hour prior to sunrise to ensure complete darkness
:* Signs shall be inspected with low beam headlights
:* Keep interior lights off so eyes are acclimated to darkness (dim lights are OK to illuminate computer keyboard)
:* Once frost and/or dew begin to settle on the signs (thus affecting retroreflectivity), discontinue inspections
:* Signs on side streets shall be inspected by driving the side street approaching the sign
:* The sign legend and background colors should be recognizable both day and night (for example, a guide sign's white legend should be clearly visible and the background should be recognizable as green). If not, replace the sign.
:* If inspection takes place after leaves have dropped and tree limbs fall within the view of the sign, but do not obscure sign: trim limbs to account for the time when leaves will regrow
:* Inspection vehicles should be typical cars, SUVs or pickups, 2002 or newer
:* Two-person inspection crews for safety
:* Inspection conducted from travel lane (not shoulder) and conducted at normal travel speed
:* Headlights should be cleaned before inspection begins. Clouded or hazed lenses should be polished
:* Headlights should be checked to ensure they are properly aimed.


Signs shall be visible from the following distances:
=={{SpanID|903.2.53}}903.2.53 Weight Limit Sign (R12-1) (MUTCD Section 2B.64)==
:* <u>Flat Sheet Signs</u> must be visible from approximately 300 ft to provide drivers enough time to see and react to the sign.  Any deficiencies which prohibit a sign from being seen at this minimum distance shall be identified in the inspection and corrected.


:* <u>Structural Signs (Extruded Panel Substrate)</u> must be visible and legible from a minimum of approximately 300 ft. on two-lane roadways and 600 ft. on multilane highways (based on 30 ft. visibility for every 1 in. of legend height, per [[#903.2.15 Word Messages (MUTCD Section 2A.13)|EPG 903.2.15 Word Messages]]).
<center>
{|
|[[File:R12-1.jpg|thumb|center|105px|<center>'''R12-1'''</center>]]
|}
</center>


Issues that can affect sign visibility and shall be corrected are, but are not limited to:
'''Support. '''In 2022, a new load posting policy was implemented by MoDOT in the EPG. This new policy resulted from a plan of corrective action with FHWA. With this new policy, all structures on the national bridge inventory will be categorized under this new policy within the next 10 years. There are 10,387 structures on the state system. 270 of these structures are major or unusual structures and these will be categorized over the next 10 years. The remaining 10,117 structures consist of 6,940 normal bridges and 3,177 culverts. The normal bridges will be categorized in the next 4 years and the culverts will be reviewed in the last 3 years of the 10 year timeline of the plan. The R12-1 sign remains in use, with the remaining MoDOT bridge posting signs being replaced by one of three new bridge posting signs in this article.
:* Sign sheeting which has fallen below acceptable performance levels
:* Vegetation or other obstructions blocking the view of the sign
:* Sign installation location, requiring sign to be moved to a better more visible location
:* Damage to the sign face, such as gun shots, paint ball or other vandalism activities


Sign posts shall be within acceptable tolerances of being vertically plumb (see Figure 903.2.22.2, below) and must hold the sign perpendicular to the travel way unless the sign type and installation intentionally requires the sign to be parallel to the roadway.  Sign posts out of plumb and not supporting the sign in the proper orientation to the roadway shall be repaired or replaced as necessary.
'''Standard. '''Weight limit signs shall be used to indicate a structure that has a vehicle weight restriction.


Signs shall be inspected to assure they are at the proper mounting height above the roadway and above the ground. Any deficiencies shall be corrected as mounting heights affect not only visibility of the sign, but also the breakaway characteristics / safety of the sign (see [[#903.2.18 Standardization of Sign Location (MUTCD Section 2A.16)|EPG 903.2.18 Standardization of Sign Location]] for details):
'''Guidance. '''The units shown on any weight limit sign should be tons.


:* Non-Wide Flange sign installations shall have a mounting height of 5 ft. above the roadway on two-lane roadways and 7 ft. above the roadway inside city limits or on freeways or expressways (does not include object markers, chevrons, supplemental plaques or any other special sign mounting criteria).
'''Standard. '''Weight limit signs shall be installed in accordance with the new bridge posting classifications once completed.  
::o The length of any post of a non-Wide Flange sign installation shall be a minimum of 5 ft measured from the ground to the bottom of the sign
:* Wide Flange sign installations shall have a mounting height of 7 ft 6 in above the roadway.  
::o The length of the shortest post of an Wide Flange sign installation shall be a minimum of 7 ft 9 in measured from the breakaway to the hinge point for breakaway performance.
::o Post spacing for #3 through #6 Wide Flange posts shall be spaced a minimum of 7 ft apart from one another in order to meet federal breakaway standards.


[[image:903 plumb.jpg|center|550px]]
A weight limit sign shall be located at the applicable structure in accordance with (see [[#tab903.2.53|Table 903.2.53]] and [[#fig903.2.53.1|Figures 903.2.53.1]] to [[#fig903.2.53.3|903.2.53.3]]).
<center>'''Figure 903.2.22.2, Sign Post Plumb Tolerances'''</center>


Deficiencies in the number or spacing of posts shall also be identified and corrected.  The number and spacing of posts are based on the guidance found in the post selection tools in EPG 903.3.  Having the proper number, size and spacing of posts not only assures a long-lasting sign assembly, but incorrect installations can dramatically affect the breakaway characteristics of the sign assembly.
An additional weight limit sign, with an advisory distance or directional legend, shall be located in advance of the applicable section of highway or structure so that prohibited vehicles can detour or turn around prior to the limit zone.  


==903.2.23 Emergency Response==
In commercial zones, bridges with the capacity of more the 65 tons shall not be posted, as normally loads in excess of 65 tons will not occur.
'''Support.''' Risk Management has established guidelines concerning the response to replacing signs that have been knocked down or otherwise lost, see Table 903.2.23 for the response plan as it pertains to highway signing.


'''Guidance.''' MoDOT’s Incident Response Plan should be consulted for further details.
Once a bridge has been categorized, the bridge posting signs shall be updated within 30 days of the bridge posting reclassification. This includes installing the correct sign and configuring the sign locations to match the appropriate bridge posting figure (see [[#fig903.2.53.1|Figures 903.2.53.1]] to [[#fig903.2.53.3|903.2.53.3]]).


'''Support.''' Priority ranking are defined as follows:
'''Support. '''If existing weight limit signs need to be replaced prior to a bridge being categorized, contact Highway Safety and Traffic Division, Signing Section, for guidance.


:'''Priority 1''' – Urgent, respond as soon as possible (day or night, weekends or holidays) suspending other lower priority work if necessary. May represent immediate hazard to the public.
<div align="center";>
:'''Priority 2''' – Repair should be accomplished as soon as practical during normal working hours, but only after Priority 1 repairs are completed.
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="text-align:center;"
:'''Priority 3''' – Repair should be accomplished with higher urgency than routine maintenance.
|+ Table 903.2.53, Listing of Bridge Posting Categories
:'''Routine''' – Not urgent, normally considered routine maintenance.
! style="background:#BEBEBE" colspan="6" | Statewide Legal Load Posting Gross Weight Categories
 
|-
<center>'''Table 903.2.23, Incident Response Signing Plan'''</center>
! Classification || Category || Description || Sign Verbiage || Sign || Figure
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:center"
|-
|+  
| Normal Legal || SW-1 || No Posting Required || N/A || N/A || N/A
!style="background:#BEBEBE" rowspan="2"|Signs!!style="background:#BEBEBE" colspan="4"|Priority
|-
| Normal Legal || SW-2 || General Gross Weight Limit || Weight Limit XX Tons || R12-1 || 903.5.36.1
|-
| Normal Legal || SW-3 || Single Unit Vehicle Gross Weight Limit || Weight Limit Single Unit XX Tons || R12-12 || 903.5.36.1
|-
| Normal Legal || SW-4 || Combination Vehicle Gross Weight Limit || Weight Limit Combination XX Tons || R12-13 || 903.5.36.1
|-
| Normal Legal || SW-5 || Single Unit Vehicle and Combination Vehicle Gross Weight Limits || Weight Limit Single Unit XX Tons Combination XX Tons || R12-14 || 903.5.36.1
|-
| colspan="6" | </br>
|-
! style="background:#BEBEBE" colspan="6" | Statewide Legal Load Posting Centerline Restriction with Gross Weight Categories
|-
! Classification || Category || Description || Sign Verbiage || Sign || Figure
|-
| Lane Restricted || LR-1 || Lane Restriction Only || N/A || N/A || 903.5.36.3
|-
| Lane Restricted || LR-2 || Lane Restriction with General Gross Weight Limit || Weight Limit XX Tons || R12-1 || 903.5.36.2
|-
| Lane Restricted || LR-3 || Lane Restriction with Single Unit Vehicle Gross Weight Limit || Weight Limit Single Unit XX Tons || R12-12 || 903.5.36.2
|-
| Lane Restricted || LR-4 || Lane Restriction with Combination Vehicle Gross Weight Limit || Weight Limit Combination XX Tons || R12-13 || 903.5.36.2
|-
| Lane Restricted || LR-5 || Lane Restriction with Single Unit Vehicle and Combination Vehicle Gross Weight Limits || Weight Limit Single Unit XX Tons Combination XX Tons || R12-14 || 903.5.36.2
|-
| colspan="6" | </br>
|-
! style="background:#BEBEBE" colspan="6" | Commercial Zone Areas Gross Weight Categories
|-
|-
!style="background:#BEBEBE" width="150"|1 !!style="background:#BEBEBE" width="150"| 2!!style="background:#BEBEBE" width="150"| 3!!style="background:#BEBEBE" width="150"| Routine
! Classification || Category || Description || Sign Verbiage || Sign || Figure
|-
|-
|Barricades (permanent)|| - ||X || - || -
| Commercial Zone || CZ-1 || No Posting Required || N/A || N/A || N/A
|-
|-
|Delineators|| - || - || - ||X
| Commercial Zone || CZ-2 || General Gross Weight Limit || Weight Limit XX Tons || R12-1 || 903.5.36.1
|-
|-
|Guide<sup>1</sup>|| - || - ||X|| -
| Commercial Zone || CZ-3 || Single Unit Vehicle Gross Weight Limit || Weight Limit Single Unit XX Tons || R12-12 || 903.5.36.1
|-
|-
|Information<sup>1</sup>|| - || - ||X|| -
| Commercial Zone || CZ-4 || Combination Vehicle Gross Weight Limit || Weight Limit Combination XX Tons || R12-13 || 903.5.36.1
|-
|-
|Route Assemblies|| - ||See Fig. 903.2.19.2.3|| - || -
| Commercial Zone || CZ-5 || Single Unit Vehicle and Combination Vehicle Gross Weight Limits || Weight Limit Single Unit XX Tons Combination XX Tons || R12-14 || 903.5.36.1
|-
|-
|Regulatory<sup>1</sup>|| Stop, Yield, Do Not Enter, Wrong Way, One Way|| See Fig. 903.2.19.2.1 & Fig. 903.2.19.2.2||Signs not on the priority 1 or 2 list|| -
| colspan="6" | </br>
|-
|-
|Warning<sup>1</sup>|| - ||See Fig. 903.2.19.2.5||Signs not on the priority 1 or 2 list|| -
! style="background:#BEBEBE" colspan="6" | Other Miscellaneous Load Posting Categories
|-
|-
|School<sup>1</sup>|| - ||See Fig. 903.2.19.2.4||Signs not on the priority 1 or 2 list|| -
! Classification || Category || Description || Sign Verbiage || Sign || Figure
|-
|-
|Visibility (weeds, trees, etc.)|| For Priority 1 Signs|| For Priority 2 signs|| - ||For Priority 3 signs 
| Fire Truck || FT-1|| General Gross Weight Limit for Emergency Vehicles Included in the FAST Act, Federal Reauthorization Bill || Weight Limit XX Tons || R12-1 || 903.5.36.1
|-
|-
|Sign Truss Structure Damage|| Creating a Traffic Hazard|| - || Not A Traffic Hazard|| -
| Closed Bridge || K-CD || Closed to All Traffic || N/A || N/A || N/A
|-
|-
|Lane Closure Notification/ Approval Required<sup>2</sup>|| No|| No|| Yes|| Yes
| Closed Bridge || K-CIF || Closed to All Traffic as the Result of a Critical Inspection Finding || N/A || N/A || N/A
|-
|-
|colspan="5" align="left"|<sup>'''1'''</sup> Damage that makes the sign ineffective.
| Other || OT-1 || For Local Agency Bridges that have Signage that Doesn't Fit the Normal Legal, Lane Restricted, or Commercial Zone Categories || N/A || N/A || N/A
|-
|-
|colspan="5" align="left"|<sup>'''2'''</sup> NHS routes and all other routes with AADT of 1,700 or greater.
|}
|}
</div>


==903.2.24 Guidelines for the use of the Sign Management System (SMS)==
<div class="flex-container1">
'''History.''' MoDOT has a long history of maintaining an inventory of signs located along its roadways and inspecting signs utilizing this database. MoDOT’s original database was housed on a mainframe computer and sign logs were done on paper. The first computer-based system was implemented in the early 2000s and was utilized until 2012 when it was replaced with Sign Management System (SMS), our current system. SMS was developed as a cradle-to-grave sign management system to manage field inventories, but also to manage sign ordering, work orders and warehouse management. MoDOT Management System (MMS) is expected, at later phases of development, to incorporate and possibly replace portions of SMS.
{{SpanID|fig903.2.53.1}}
<div>[[File:Figure 903.2.53.1 Weight Limit Restrictions.png|center|alt=A horizontal segment of roadway is shown. The middle of the roadway segment is illustrated to be crossing a bridge. The centerline of the roadway is a single dashed yellow line with one lane in each direction. On either side of the bridge, a WEIGHT LIMIIT SIGN is posted, facing the oncoming traffic. At the top of the figure are 4 different Weight Limit sign faces with a table below. These sign faces and the table are to help indicate what sign type and size to use at the beginning of a bridge crossing. The signs faces included in the table are R12-1, R12-12, R12-13, and R12-14.
|700px|thumb|<center>'''Figure 903.2.53.1''' Weight Limit Restrictions</center>]] </div>


'''Support.''' SMS has six major components. Details on each component and their specific use can be found in a wiki link and user manuals located on the SMS home page. While the sign catalog is accessible by any MoDOT employee, all other components require a STARTS request to gain access. The STARTS request is granted based on the level of access needed for the user’s role in signing and is approved by Highway Safety and Traffic. The following are the six major components of SMS:
{{SpanID|fig903.2.53.2}}
<div>[[File:Figure 903.2.53.2 One Lane Bridge Weight and Width Restrictions.png|center|alt=A horizontal segment of roadway is shown. The middle of the roadway segment is illustrated to be crossing a bridge. The centerline of the roadway is a double solid yellow line with one lane in each direction. Multiple sign faces are shown at varying distances on either side of the brdige, facing ocoming traffic. These signs include a W5-3,  W12-1,  W3-2, and a R1-2 sign. At the top of the figure are 4 different Weight Limit sign faces with a table below. These sign faces and the table are to help indicate what sign type and size to use at the beginning of a bridge crossing. The signs faces included in the table are R12-1, R12-12, R12-13, and R12-14. There is a note to "See EPG 903.3.72 for placement of Type 3 Object Markers" in the bottom right corner of the figure.|700px|thumb|<center>'''Figure 903.2.53.2''' One Lane Bridge Weight and Width Restrictions</center>]]</div>


:* Sign catalog
{{SpanID|fig903.2.53.3}}
:* Sign ordering
<div>[[File:Figure 903.2.53.3 One Lane Bridge Width Restrictions.png|center|alt=A horizontal segment of roadway is shown. The middle of the roadway segment is illustrated to be crossing a bridge. The centerline of the roadway is a double solid yellow line with one lane in each direction. Multiple sign faces are shown at varying distances on either side of the brdige, facing ocoming traffic. These signs include a W5-3,,  W3-2, and a R1-2 sign. There is a note to "See EPG 903.3.72 for placement of Type 3 Object Markers" in the bottom right corner of the figure.|700px|thumb|<center>'''Figure 903.2.53.3''' One Lane Bridge Width Restrictions</center>]]</div>
:* Field inventory
</div>
:* Sign inspection
:* Work orders
:* Warehouse management


Sign Catalog is the heart of the SMS. It contains the signs and sizes of signs from the MUTCD, and any MoDOT-specific signs used on MoDOT roadways. The information in the catalog is used to populate the sign field inventory for each sign assembly record. The data in the catalog is also used by the sign ordering system to populate the critical fields needed to generate a purchase order.
=={{SpanID|903.2.54}}903.2.54  Weigh Station Sign (R13 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.65)==


Sign Ordering must be used to acquire signs for maintenance operations. This system is made up of a requisition component where sign requests are generated by field crews. These requisitions are sent to the district’s parent sign warehouse where it is either filled from the warehouse inventory, or the request is added to a vendor order. The vendor order component compiles sign requests and then interfaces with the state Financial Management System (FMS) to generate a purchase order. This component is required to be used in order to acquire signs from MoDOT’s sign manufacturer.  
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
||[[image:R13-11.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R13-11'''</center>|130px]]
||[[image:R13-15P.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R13-15P'''</center>|130px]]
||[[image:R13-16.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R13-16'''</center>|80px]]
|}


Field Inventory is the component of SMS which contains records for locations of all signs located on MoDOT right of way, including signs MoDOT does not maintain. This component of SMS must be used to inventory all signs on MoDOT right of way. These records are in terms of "sign assemblies" or a record of a sign support and all of the signs that are mounted on that support. Sign supports can be one of MoDOT’s typical ground-mounted sign posts or the variety of overhead sign mounting structures. Details for each sign assembly can be recorded in this system, including, but not limited to the number of posts, type of post, type of overhead sign structure, sign location (left, overhead, right) and mounting height. The history of each assembly and each sign on each assembly can also be recorded in this system, including but not limited to sign installation date, repair date and inspection date. The only piece of data which is automatically recorded for an assembly record is the inspection history from the inspection component of the system. As with any database, the quality and accuracy of the data available is directly related to the accuracy and management of the data entered into the system. There are many fields for data available for each assembly record, some fields are required and others are optional.
'''Standard. '''The BUSES WEIGH sign (R13-11) should be used at all weigh stations to supplement the standard weigh station signing.


At a minimum an assembly record must include:
'''Guidance. '''The OPEN-CLOSED plaque (R13-15P) should be installed below all WEIGH STATION RIGHT LANE signs whenever an automatic OPEN-CLOSED sign has not been provided.


:* District
The BEFORE PULLING ON SCALE (R13-16) sign should be installed just to the right of the weigh scale and immediately in front thereof. A 30 in. STOP sign should be mounted above the sign.
:* County
:* Travelway ID
:* Maintained by and Org Code
:* GPS sign location (recorded from the travel lane)
:* Sign number/code
:* Support type (post or structure)
:* Post / Structure Type
:* Orientation of sign to the roadway.


Optional fields, but recommended as bests practices include:
=={{SpanID|903.2.55}}903.2.55  TRUCK ROUTE Sign (R14-1) (MUTCD Section 2B.66)==


:* Sign legend, for variable message signs
<center>
:* Number of posts
{|
:* Post type and size
|[[File:R14-1.png|thumb|center|135px|<center>'''R14-1'''</center>]]
:* Post offset from the roadway
|}
:* Footing type
</center>
:* Breakaway.


Sign Inspection must be conducted utilizing the sign inspection tool of SMS. This component is referenced as the "client tool" as it is one of the few components of SMS that is not web-based. The inspection tool is a software component of SMS loaded on individual laptops allowing field inventory data and TMS data to be loaded on the machine. Once on the laptop, the system can be operated independent of a network connection to inspect and update field inventories. Once an inspection is completed and/or inventory is updated, the data must be uploaded back to the web-based system to update the primary database.
'''Guidance. '''The TRUCK ROUTE (R14-1) sign should be used to mark a route that has been designated to allow truck traffic.
Work Orders are used in SMS to process the work generated by sign inspections. Work orders are auto-generated when a deficiency is identified during an inspection. Once generated, a work order must be approved and assigned to the appropriate crew. Once the work is completed, the work order must be closed. The identification of the deficiencies and the completion of the work order create the history of the correction in each record. The work order system can be used for any sign work conducted outside of inspections, but it is not a required use for this application.


Warehouse Management is a component of SMS whose use is optional. This system was created as a user interface for FMS to offer more options in viewing and managing sign inventories. The system was designed to permit warehouse managers to establish minimum inventory levels / order points as well as maximum inventory levels. To help promote the use of excess inventory statewide, the system was designed to show the inventory for any sign with an inventory greater than the maximum set by the manager as "excess" so other districts could see availability. The tool is also designed to give managers the ability to reserve part of their inventory for special projects so these would not appear as excess.
=={{SpanID|903.2.56}}903.2.56  Photo Enforced Signs and Plaques (R10-18a and R10-19P) (MUTCD Section 2B.69)==


==903.2.25 Design Aspects of Signing==
<center>
===903.2.25.1 Scope of Signs and Signing===
{|
'''Standard.''' The extent of signing by contract on any project is determined early in the project scope. Structural guide signs and supports (overhead or post-mounted) are paid for by contract, regardless of the type of facility. Sheet signs and supports are supplied by contract for all route classifications and project conditions. Unless otherwise agreed to among departments or divisions, the following are general guidelines for the extent of contract signing.
|[[File:R10-18a.jpg|thumb|center|<center>'''R10-18a'''</center>|105px]]
|[[File:R10-19P.jpg|thumb|center|<center>'''R10-19P'''</center>|105px]]
|}
</center>


'''Guidance.''' Regulatory and warning signs should be used conservatively because these signs tend to lose effectiveness if they are used to excess. If used, route signs and directional signs should be used frequently because they promote reasonably safe and efficient operations by keeping road users informed of their location.
'''Option. '''A Signal Ahead (W3-3) sign and a Traffic Signal Photo Enforced (R10-18a) sign may be used on the same approach provided that they are on separate supports.


===903.2.25.2 Plan Development Procedure===
A Photo Enforced (R10-19P) plaque may be mounted below a regulatory sign to advise road users that the regulation is being enforced by photographic equipment.
'''Standard.''' The preparation of signing plans requires the cooperation and coordination between the district and Central Office.


When using preexisting structures to accommodate larger new signs, consideration shall be given to the dimensions and load capacity of the existing structure. The larger signs shall properly fit on the existing structure and not exceed the structure’s design capacity.
'''Standard. '''The Traffic Signal Photo Enforced (R10-18a) sign shall be used on approaches to signalized locations where red-light cameras are present.


When the need arises to modify the legend of a sign not built to current standards, the entire sign shall be replaced.
The Traffic Signal Photo Enforced (R10-18a) sign shall not be installed on approaches to signalized locations where red-light cameras are not present on any of the approaches to the signalized location.


'''Guidance.''' [https://modotgov.sharepoint.com/sites/br Bridge Division] should be consulted for mounting signs directly on bridges and other structures.
A Traffic Signal Photo Enforced (R10-18a) sign shall not be installed on the same support in combination with a Signal Ahead (W3-3) sign.


Sign visibility from a distance is critical. Sign locations should be coordinated with other design features that include, but are not limited to bridges, highway lighting, traffic signals, drainage structures, overhead utilities, underground utilities and horizontal and vertical alignments that decrease sign visibility.
If used below a regulatory sign, the Photo Enforced (R10-19P) plaque shall be a rectangle with a black legend and border on a white background.


The district should prepare proposed sign locations and review the plans for standards and quality control.
'''Support. '''For more information about photo enforcement requirements, see [[:Category:950 Automated Traffic Enforcement|EPG 950]].


When the sign is mounted on a truss, all signs on the truss not built to current standards should be replaced after considering the age, future conditions and detail of the sign.
=={{SpanID|903.2.57}}903.2.57  STATE LAW MOVE OVER OR SLOW DOWN FOR STOPPED EMERGENCY VEHICLES Sign (R16-25) (MUTCD Section 2B.71)==


It is recommended that all non-standard signs be identified, with justification for the non-standard designs.
<center>
{|
| [[File:R16-25.jpg|thumb|center|175px|<center>'''R16-25'''</center>]]
|}
</center>


For preliminary discussions, only the sign location plan showing existing and proposed signing is recommended. Sign details, cross-sections, tabulation sheets, computer generated sign designs or other detailed information should not be completed at this time. Once the preliminary location plan is agreed on, the district is to prepare [https://www.modot.org/media/16702 D-29] and [https://www.modot.org/media/16703 D-30], truss data sheets and template cross-sections for trusses and post-mounted signs. Truss cross-sections should not be drawn on the same sheets as ground mounted sign cross-sections. The districts, or consultants, are responsible for accuracy of the preliminary and final detail design.
'''Support. '''The STATE LAW MOVE OVER OR SLOW DOWN FOR STOPPED EMERGENCY VEHICLES (R16-25) sign is used to inform motorists of Missouri Revised Statutes 304.022, which requires motorists to drive with caution when approaching stopped emergency vehicles.


The district finalizes the plans and is to submit them to Design with the roadway plans, or as a separate project if so programmed. Typical signing location plans for interchanges are shown in [[903.16 Typical Signing Applications|EPG 903.16 Typical Signing Applications]]. [https://modotgov.sharepoint.com/sites/DE/ Design Division] is available for consultation during any part of the plan preparation process.
'''Guidance. '''The STATE LAW MOVE OVER OR SLOW DOWN FOR STOPPED EMERGENCY VEHICLES sign should be installed on Interstates entering the state at the state line. The location of the sign should be as close to the state line as possible and placed at the discretion of MoDOT.


All non-standard and special signs are detailed by Central Office Highway Safety and Traffic and the district, or consultant, is responsible for incorporating the signs in [https://www.modot.org/media/16704 Form D-31]. A [https://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/D-28.doc Sign Design Order Form (Design Form D-28)] should be completed for all non-standard and special signs and sent to the signing section of Central Office Highway Safety and Traffic, allowing 30 working days for the review and design to be completed. Each sign should be identified as an [https://epg.modot.org/index.php/903.4_Overhead_Guide_Sign_Mounting overhead] or [https://epg.modot.org/index.php/903.3_Post-Mounted_Signing post-mounted] sign. [http://sp/sites/ts/Pages/default.aspx Traffic] should be provided with a date the sign designs need to be returned for review. The return date needs to allow enough time to design and quantify the trusses, bases and posts.
'''Option. '''Additional STATE LAW MOVE OVER OR SLOW DOWN FOR STOPPED EMERGENCY VEHICLES signs may be installed on U.S. routes entering the state where there are no adjacent interstates and rest areas at the request of the Missouri State Highway Patrol.


'''Option.''' Central Office Design or Highway Safety and Traffic Division may provide comments on the preliminary layout at the district's request. It is suggested that districts form review teams from various departments to review plans at the preliminary layout stage, and at final design. After the district reviews plans, Design Division may be consulted for review at the district's discretion.
'''Standard. '''Requests for additional signs shall be forwarded to the appropriate district engineer for approval. These signs shall only be installed on divided highways. The installation of this sign shall not interfere with or detract from any other regulatory, warning, or guide signs.


Two or more segments of alignment may be shown on one sheet. For ease of design, review and construction, sign locations for interchanges are completely shown on one sheet.
=={{SpanID|903.2.58}}903.2.58  Headlight Use Signs (R16-5a) (MUTCD Section 2B.73)==


In complex areas where many signs exist and will be replaced, proposed signing and existing signing may be shown separately on different plan sheets to avoid clutter and plan confusion; however, combined is preferred, if possible.
'''Support. '''The HEADLIGHTS ON WHEN WIPERS ARE REQUIRED (R16-5a) sign, supported by RSMo 307.020 in 2004, was developed to inform motorists of the new law directing them to turn on headlights when wipers are on and during inclement weather. The use of these signs has been discontinued as the law has been in place for more than 15 years and many vehicles come equipped with headlights that turn on when wipers are activated. Existing signs are to be removed at the end of their sign life.


'''Support.''' Fig. 903.2.25.2.1 and Fig. 903.2.25.2.2 show the steps taken from early plan development to final design.
=={{SpanID|903.2.59}}903.2.59 Seat Belt Symbol (MUTCD Section 2B.74)==


{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
<center>
|-
{|
|[[image:903.2.10.1a.jpg|center|thumb|800px|'''<center>Fig. 903.2.25.2.1, Existing and Preliminary Signing Plans Flowcharts</center>''']]
| [[File:R16-30.jpg|thumb|center|175px|<center>'''R16-30'''</center>]]
|-
|[[image:903.2.10.2a.jpg|center|thumb|800px|'''<center>Fig. 903.2.25.2.2, Final Signing Plans Flowchart</center>''']]
|}
|}
</center>
'''Guidance. '''The seat belt symbol should not be used alone. If used, the seat belt symbol should be incorporated into regulatory sign messages for mandatory seat belt use.
'''Support. '''The seat belt symbol is illustrated in the FHWA “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see  [[911 General (MUTCD Part 1) #911.1.5|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]).
'''Guidance. '''The R16-2, R16-3, R16-24, R16-27, and R16-27a seatbelt signs have been discontinued. These signs should remain in place to the end of their service life.
The STATE LAW BUCKLE UP PHONE DOWN (R16-30) sign should be installed at the end of the on ramp of rest areas and Missouri Welcome Centers on the interstate system. The STATE LAW BUCKLE UP PHONE DOWN (R16-30a) sign should be installed on Interstate and U.S. Routes at the state line entering Missouri. Neither sign should be installed at any other location along a roadway.
'''Support. '''A growing number of cities and counties are passing local ordinances to make seat belt usage a primary law in their communities. To promote the use of seat belts a PRIMARY SEAT BELT CITY / COUNTY - ORDINANCE sign may be installed by MoDOT upon request.
'''Standard. '''If a city/county has an established primary seat belt ordinance, MoDOT will install PRIMARY SEAT BELT CITY / COUNTY - ORDINANCE signs upon request once a copy of the ordinance has been received. When the PRIMARY SEAT BELT CITY / COUNTY - ORDINANCE is installed they shall be mounted to the right of the city limit sign or the entering county line sign.
'''Option. '''If insufficient space is available to mount the assembly to the right of these signs, the assembly shall be installed 200 ft. downstream of the city limit or county line signs at the appropriate sign spacing.
=={{SpanID|903.2.60}}903.2.60  Barricades (MUTCD Section 2B.75)==
'''Option. '''Barricades may be used to mark any of the following conditions:
::A. The end of a roadway,
::B. A ramp or lane that is closed for operational purposes, or
::C. The permanent or semi-permanent closure or termination of a roadway.
'''Standard. '''When used to warn and alert road users of the terminus of a roadway, other than in temporary traffic control zones, barricades shall meet the design criteria of [[616.11 TTC Zone Channelizing Devices (MUTCD Chapter 6K) #616.11.7|EPG 616.11.7]] for a Type 3 Barricade, except that the colors of the stripes shall be retroreflective white and retroreflective red.
'''Option. '''An end-of-roadway marker or markers may be used as described in  [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.73|EPG 903.3.73]].
'''Guidance. '''Appropriate advance warning signs (see [[903.3 Ground-Mounted Sign Supports #903.3|EPG 903.3]]) should be used.
=={{SpanID|903.2.61}}903.2.61  NO PARKING ALL TRAILERS AND TRUCKS OVER 6 TONS (R7-36)==
[[File:R7-36.png|thumb|center|105px|alt=|<center>'''R7-36'''</center>]]
'''Standard. '''NO PARKING ALL TRAILERS AND TRUCKS OVER 6 TONS (R7-36) signs shall be placed in each commuter parking lot. A sign shall be installed at or near each entrance of the commuter parking lot.
'''Support. '''This parking restriction is necessary because commuter lots have been used by commercial trailers and trucks for extended periods of parking.
=={{SpanID|903.2.62}}903.2.62 STOP FOR SCHOOL BUS SIGN (R16-26)==
'''Standard. '''The STOP FOR SCHOOL BUS (R16-26) sign has been discontinued. MoDOT shall no longer provide STOP FOR SCHOOL BUS (R16-26) signs. Existing STOP FOR SCHOOL BUS (R16-26) signs shall be left in place until they reach the end of their service life.
=={{SpanID|903.2.63}}903.2.63 Other Regulatory Signs==
'''Option. '''Regulatory word message signs other than those classified and specified in the EPG and the federal Standard Highway Signs and Markings book may be developed to aid the enforcement of other laws or regulations.
Except for symbols on regulatory signs, minor modifications in the design may be permitted provided that the essential appearance characteristics are met.
'''Standard. '''Special regulatory signs shall be approved by the State Highway Safety and Traffic Engineer.
=={{SpanID|903.2.64}}903.2.64 Engine Brake Muffler Required Signing==
[[File:R5-23.jpg|thumb|center|105px|alt=|<center>'''R5-23'''</center>]]
'''History. '''MoDOT once had a NOISE ORDINANCE ENFORCED policy which was developed to address cities’ requests to install NO JAKE BRAKE signing. These requests were generated when a community experienced excessive noise related to improperly installed/operated engine braking systems on commercial vehicles. Jake brakes, or engine braking systems, are safety features of commercial vehicles. MoDOT was not willing to post signs on state routes which prohibited the use of these safety devices. However, to address the increasing requests for signing, MoDOT did permit the installation of NOISE ORDINANCE ENFORCED signs if a city passed an appropriate ordinance. This program was replaced with the current ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLERS REQUIRED signing in January 2022. This change was designed to address shortcomings of the noise ordinance signing program, which included difficulty in enforcing a noise level and noise ordinances which did not contain language relevant to engine braking noise levels. The current program is based on the direction other states have taken, focusing on the physical equipment on a commercial vehicle which can be more easily inspected and evaluated for deficiencies. This signing program is also targeting the primary concern of excessive noise from engine braking.
'''Support. '''Commercial vehicles are commonly equipped with an engine braking system. These systems supplement the vehicle’s mechanical brakes aiding in slowing these heavy vehicles safely. These safety systems, when not properly installed, can create excessive noise which many communities find objectionable. MoDOT does not permit regulatory signs which prohibit the use of these safety devices, however, the ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLERS REQUIRED signing conveys to truck drivers they must use these safety devices in an appropriate manner.
'''Option. '''If a community experiences issues with excessive noise from improperly used and installed engine braking systems on commercial vehicles, they can pass an ordinance and request MoDOT to install ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLERS REQUIRED signing at their city limit sign locations. MoDOT will install and maintain these signs with only a copy of the ordinance for our records, no fee or contract is involved. A jurisdiction can pass an ordinance specifically related to engine braking or include the language as part of another ordinance, such as a noise ordinance.


Location plans show the proposed pavement geometrics, the sign location, sign number, station, width and height, sign code (if applicable) and special or standard legend. Sign sizes are shown as width x height, in feet and/or inches for sheet signs, and in feet only for structural signs. Tabulated removals and general information are shown for existing signs. The standard sign code (e.g. R5-1a, W10-1, etc.) is shown for signs found in the SMS Sign Catalog.
'''Standard. '''Before MoDOT will install ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLERS REQUIRED signing, a city must pass an appropriate ordinance which will be approved and kept on file by CO Highway Safety and Traffic. The ordinance shall include the following language:


Signs are numbered in a logical order. Existing signs that are removed or remain in place are not numbered. Multiple signs on a single mount are further indicated with lower-case letters (e.g. 45(a), 45(b), 45(c)). If signs are added or deleted at a later date, renumbering all signs is not required. If signs are added, signs may be numbered 43, 43A, 43B, etc., or the next highest sign number may be used. If signs are deleted, a general note listing voided signs is provided.
Engine compression braking devices on any commercial vehicle, as defined in Missouri Revised Statute RSMo Section 301.010, may only be used within the city limits of [CITY NAME] if the truck is equipped with an adequate muffler (factory muffler or equivalent aftermarket muffler) which is properly maintained to prevent any excessive or unusual noise. If the truck’s exhaust system is equipped with a muffler cut-off, bypass, or similar device, that device shall not be activated when the engine brake is being utilized. Unmuffled engine braking system shall only be utilized within the city limits by commercial motor vehicles in emergency situations to protect life or property. Engine braking systems on rescue vehicles, city and state vehicles are exempt from this ordinance if used in the performance of official duties.


Existing signs are shown with dashed lines and are listed as a removal item where appropriate. Existing signs to be relocated to new posts and new signs on existing posts are numbered and noted as such. Existing signs in poor condition should be replaced.
ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLER REQUIRED signing shall only be installed at the city limit location.


When replacing signs for many miles of roadway to be let in sections, it is desirable to generate an overall sign location plan to coordinate guide sign placement through numerous projects. For this situation it is not necessary to show signs other than guide signs. It is recommended to show the limits of each project on this location plan. Signs are identified as truss, bridge- or post-mounted or as strapped to a signal post or column. If applicable, truss type (cantilever, span and butterfly) and location are shown. Whether the truss is box or tubular does not need to be noted on preliminary location plan, but is shown on the final plan. A standard legend identifying symbols is used to alleviate crowding on plans. Typical location plans at interchanges are shown in [[903.16 Typical Signing Applications|EPG 903.16 Typical Signing Applications]].
ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLER REQUIRED signing shall not be installed on freeways or expressways within the city limits where the posted speed limit is 45 mph or greater due to the critical need for the device at higher speeds.


When staged projects are scheduled in unison or closely together, complete signs are provided with the inappropriate legend covered until needed. Legends to be covered are noted on the plans, and the engineer is to approve the covering method. No direct pay is made for covering legends. When structural signs should be erected with only part of the legend in place at the initial time of construction, the sign and legend are shown on the plans with solid lines, and the legend to be placed at a later date is shown with dashed lines. A note is included indicating the dashed legend will be provided by future construction. The omitted legend is included in the roadway contract, which completes the sign.
Existing NOISE ORDINANCE ENFORCED signs shall be removed at the end of the signs’ service life, with no new NOISE ORDINANCE ENFORCED signs being installed after January 2022.


When the legend of an existing sign built to current standards is modified, the existing sign and legend are shown with dashed lines and the legend to be added is shown with solid lines. Sufficient information is provided to show series, type, size and spacing of new legend on the sign detail sheet.
Individual sign installation locations can be denied by MoDOT if engineering judgement determines the prohibition would negatively impact safety, such as on long steep grades or abrupt/unexpected approaches to intersections.


The district prepares tabulation sheets on [https://www.modot.org/media/16702 Forms D-29 (Sign Posts, Footings, Delineators and Mileposts)], [https://www.modot.org/media/16703 D-30 (Signs)] and [https://www.modot.org/media/16705 Data Sheets D-32], [https://www.modot.org/media/16706 D-33] and [https://www.modot.org/media/16707 D-34]. These forms are available as MicroStation seed files.
'''Option. '''If the city limit on a freeway or expressway is within a posted speed limit of 45 mph or greater and the posted speed limit on that route drops to 40 mph or less, the ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLER REQUIRED sign may be installed adjacent to the speed limit sign where the speed limit drops below 45 mph.


On Form D-29, all signs are listed in order according to sign number. This form includes truss footing and pedestal concrete quantities.
At the end of a NOISE ORDINANCE ENFORCED sign’s life, or before, a city may request the new ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLER REQUIRED signing once the appropriate ordinance is passed.


On Form D-30, all standard signs are totaled on the left-hand side of the sheet. The right-hand side is used to list special signs and provides an overall summary of all sign types.
If there is insufficient space to the right of the city limit sign to place the ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLER REQUIRED sign, it may be installed 200 ft. downstream of the city limit sign.


Truss data sheet forms are completed for all trusses. Form D-32 is used for cantilever and butterfly box trusses. Form D-33 is used for span and span-cantilever box trusses. Form D-34 is the truss data sheet used for all tubular sign supports.
=={{SpanID|903.2.65}}903.2.65 Regulatory Signs For Trash/Dumping (R5-26, R5-28)==


Design variances require district justification at the preliminary sign location stage. Signing variances are also noted in the plans. Some deviations from design standards require approval.
[[File:R5-18.gif|thumb|center|220px|alt=|<center>'''R5-28'''</center>]]


Overhead sign support structure foundations are not placed in gore areas or other areas with high exposure to traffic. See [[903.4 Overhead Sign Mounting|EPG 903.4 Overhead Sign Mounting]] for additional overhead sign support structure information.
'''Standard. '''The NO DUMPING sign (R5-28) shall be erected only at locations where the Department of Natural Resources has given us written notice that solid waste is being disposed of on highway right of way. NO MORE TRASH signs (R5-26) are not typically installed along MoDOT roadways. NO MORE TRASH signs (R5-26) should only be installed at commuter lots, rest areas or roadside parks. NO MORE TRASH signs shall only be installed along the roadway if a major liter issue has been identified and the sign is needed for enforcement purposes. Existing NO MORE TRASH signs (R5-26) shall be left in place until they reach the end of their service life.


===903.2.25.3 Signing Plans===
=={{SpanID|903.2.66}}903.2.66 Regulation Signs For Roadside Parks and Commuter Parking Lots (R20-1)==
'''Standard.''' When signing is a separate project, the plans are assembled in the following order:
:1. title sheet
:2. quantity sheets for roadway items
:3. sign location plan sheets
:4. special sheets
:5. traffic control plans
:6. erosion control plan
:7. tabulation sheet [https://www.modot.org/media/16702 (D-29)]
:8. tabulation sheet [https://www.modot.org/media/16703 (D-30)]
:9. special sign detail sheets [https://www.modot.org/media/16704 (D-31)]
:10. design data sheets for cantilever and butterfly box trusses [https://www.modot.org/media/16705 (D-32)]
:11. design data sheets for overhead span box trusses [https://www.modot.org/media/16706 (D-33)]
:12. design data sheet for tubular trusses [https://www.modot.org/media/16707 (D-34)]
:13. truss cross-section sheets
:14. cross-sections for post-mounted signs
:15. special sheets for bridge-mounted signing


Typically, signing is included with the roadway plans. When this is the case, the plans are assembled together, including the quantity sheets. Separate quantity sheets shall not be generated for signing quantities. The signing plans shall be arranged in the following order:
[[image:R19-1.gif|center|thumb|<center>'''R20-1'''</center>|175px]]


:1. sign location plan sheet
'''Support. '''Regulation signs are displayed at MoDOT maintained roadside parks and commuter parking lots to convey the rules and regulations pertaining to each type of facility.
:2. tabulation sheet (D-29)
:3. tabulation sheet (D-30)
:4. special sign detail sheets (D-31)
:5. design data sheets for cantilever and butterfly box trusses (D-32)
:6. design data sheets for overhead span box trusses (D-33)
:7. design data sheet for tubular trusses (D-34)
:8. truss cross-section sheets
:9. cross-sections for post-mounted signs
:10. special sheets for bridge-mounted signs
:11. any miscellaneous special signing detail sheets.


===903.2.25.4 Quantity Computations===
'''Guidance. '''A minimum of one regulation sign should be installed at each MoDOT maintained roadside park and commuter parking lot, with the sign(s) being installed in centralized location(s) where the sign will be within normal sight of visitors once they leave their vehicles.
'''Standard.''' Signs and posts will each be paid for individually. This includes emergency reference markers and object markers. Combined unit prices for sign and support combinations have been discontinued. All signs including stop signs, object markers, emergency reference markers and signal signs shall be totaled on [https://www.modot.org/media/16703 Form D-30] in four categories: Flat Sheet (FS), Flat Sheet Fluorescent (FSF), Structural (ST) and Structural Fluorescent. Structural signs’ width and height are designed to the nearest foot. Each standard, non-standard or special sign shall be calculated to the nearest 0.1 sq. ft., subtotaled to the nearest 0.1 sq. ft., and final pay total should be to the nearest 1.0 sq. ft.


All post quantities shall be calculated and totaled on [https://www.modot.org/media/16702 Form D-29]. All post lengths shall be calculated in increments of 0.25 ft. including the length that extends into the concrete footing or ground as shown on the standard plans. All U-channel post lengths shall include the full length of both pieces when overlaps are required. The post length for wide flange and pipe posts shall be multiplied by the pounds per foot (lb/ft) factor, as shown in the standard plans; each sign's posts are subtotaled to the nearest pound; all sign posts are subtotaled; and the final pay totals are shown to the nearest 10 pounds. All U-channel, wood and perforated square steel tube post length quantities shall be totaled and rounded to the nearest foot. For perforated square steel tube posts, an additional pay item shall be included for the anchor sleeve which is paid for by the linear foot for each post used (and may also include a soil plate). See the Post and Anchor Data Table in Standard Plan 903.03 to select the necessary anchor size. Omni-Directional anchors may be used for installation in weak or loose soil conditions.
=={{SpanID|903.2.67}}903.2.67 Rest Area Regulatory Signing (R20-2, R20-3, R20-4)==


Concrete for sign support structures shall be totaled on Form D-29. Concrete for overhead structure foundations shall be bolted down. Concrete for all post-mounted sign foundations shall be embedded. Bolted down and embedded quantities shall be calculated for each sign to the nearest 0.01 cubic yard, subtotaled to the nearest 0.01 cubic yard and a final pay total is shown to the nearest 0.1 cubic yard.
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|[[image:R20-2.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R20-2'''</center>|195px]]
||[[image:R19-3.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R20-3'''</center>|175px]]
|| [[image:R19-4.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R20-4'''</center>|125px]]
|}


Cantilever and butterfly tubular support trusses shall have standard pay items. Span tubular trusses shall require special pay items. Information in the description shall include span length, truss number and span design type. Structure pay items shall include costs for all labor and materials associated with the structure, from the bottom of the base plate up, on up, as a lump sum item. Each span structure shall have a separate pay item. Structure data shall be provided on [https://www.modot.org/media/16707 Form D-34].
'''Guidance. '''The REST AREA MAINTAINED BY (R20-3) sign should be installed in a prominent area along the entrance ramp to the rest area, preferably in the gore area separating truck / car traffic.


All box trusses shall require a special pay item for each truss. All pay item descriptions shall include span length and truss number. Truss pay items shall include costs for all labor and materials associated with the truss, from the bottom of the base plate up, as a lump sum item. Each box truss, regardless of type, shall have a separate pay item.
'''Standard. '''The TRUCKS-CARS (R20-4) sign shall be installed at the gore point inside the rest area to direct various vehicles to the appropriate parking lot.


See [https://www.modot.org/media/16921 Standard Plan 903.03] for payment of delineators. Delineators shall be paid for per each on Form D-29, and include installation, bolts, post and sign.
A minimum of three REST AREA REGULATIONS (R20-2) signs shall be installed at each rest area.


Perforated Square Steel Tube Post Breakaway assemblies shall be totaled on Form D-29. Breakaway assemblies are incidental for pipe and structural steel posts.
The REST AREA MAINTAINED BY (R20-3) sign shall be installed at all rest areas to inform the public who is responsible to maintain the facility prior to the gore point.


Backing bar lengths and weights shall be shown on Form D-29, and are totaled with the pay item for structural steel posts. No weight deductions shall be made for punched or drilled holes. If no structural steel posts are used on a project, backing bar weights shall be added to pipe post weights.
=={{SpanID|903.2.68}}903.2.68 Access Management Signing (R21-1 through R21-5)==


Signal Sign Mounting Hardware shall be paid for per each on Form D-37A separate from signal signs, which will be paid for by square feet. Signal Sign Hardware will include all mounting hardware necessary to install one sign on the mast arm.
'''Standard. '''ACCESS MANAGEMENT (R22-1 through R22-5) signs have been discontinued. MoDOT shall no longer provide ACCESS MANAGEMENT (R22-1 through R22-5) signs. Existing ACCESS MANAGEMENT (R22-1 through R22-5) signs shall be left in place until they reach the end of their service life.


Special pay items shall not be included for items considered to be small amounts of work such as: strapping signs to lighting or signal posts or truss columns; covering inappropriate legends; "EXIT ONLY" panels on new signs; any symbol, arrow, shield or legend on new guide signs; hinge plates; aluminum wide flange posts for connecting service signs and exit number panels to structural guide signs; etc. No additional payment shall be made for hardware. Other than the above, it shall be left to the designer to decide which items require direct pay.
=={{SpanID|903.2.69}}903.2.69 Trucks and Buses 300 Ft Interval Sign (R4-30)==


'''Option.''' Special pay items for signing may be required. Some examples of special work include: modifying legends, relocating existing signs to new posts, temporary ground mounting guide signs, bridge mounted support brackets, truss painting, pedestal repair, etc. It is left to the designer to decide which items require special pay items.
'''Standard.''' TRUCKS AND BUSES (R4-30) signs have been discontinued. MoDOT shall no longer provide TRUCKS AND BUSES (R4-30) signs. Existing TRUCKS AND BUSES (R4-30) signs shall be left in place until they reach the end of their service life.


'''Support.''' Most jobs include the removal of existing signs and/or trusses. All removals are listed with other roadway Removal of Improvements. It is preferred to list the type of truss to be removed, number of pedestals, posts, footings and a rough estimate of sign area. Consult the District Traffic Engineer or District Constructions and Materials Engineer about which removals to salvage and where the contractor should deliver the salvaged materials. Items to be salvaged and delivery of these items are mentioned in the job special provisions and this work is paid for under Removal of Improvements.
=={{SpanID|903.2.70}}903.2.70 FINES DOUBLED ENDS Sign (R2-20)==


[[File:R2-20.jpg|center|thumb|70px|<center>'''R2-20'''</center>]]


'''Support. '''The FINES DOUBLED ENDS (R2-20) sign is not to be used on a system-wide basis. It is part of a signing package intended for special use at locations where severe crashes are occurring. There is a requirement for regional support to focus a safety campaign involving local law enforcement and public information efforts to reduce the number and severity of crashes within the travel safe zone (see [[907.3 Travel Safe Zones #907.3.2|EPG 907.3.2]]).


[[Category:903 Highway Signing|903.02]]
'''Standard: '''A FINES DOUBLED ENDS sign shall be used to mark the end of a designated travel safe zone. This sign is installed in conjunction with the TRAVEL SAFE ZONE – FINES DOUBLED (W26-1) sign.

Latest revision as of 12:17, 1 December 2025

903.2.1 Application of Regulatory Signs (MUTCD Section 2B.01)

Standard. Regulatory signs shall be used to inform road users of selected traffic laws or regulations and to indicate the applicability of the legal requirements.

Regulatory signs shall be installed at or near where the regulations apply. The signs shall clearly indicate the requirements imposed by the regulations and shall be designed and installed to provide adequate visibility and legibility in order to obtain compliance.

Regulatory signs shall be retroreflective or illuminated (see EPG 903.1.21).

903.2.2 Design of Regulatory Signs (MUTCD Section 2B.02)

Standard. Regulatory signs shall be rectangular unless specifically designated otherwise in the EPG. Regulatory signs shall be designed in accordance with the sizes, shapes, colors, and legends contained in the FHWA “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)).

Support. The use of educational plaques to supplement symbol signs is described in EPG 903.1.9.

The use of LEDs in the border or legend of regulatory signs is described in EPG 903.1.12.

Standard. LED signs displaying a part-time prohibitory message incorporating a red circle and diagonal of a static sign shall display a red symbol that approximates the same red circle and diagonal as closely as possible. The symbol of the action to be prohibited shall be displayed in white LEDs on a black background.

A regulatory sign displayed entirely with LEDs and incorporated within the border of a larger full-matrix changeable message sign shall display the regulatory sign legend in the size, shape, color, and legend of the standard regulatory sign.

903.2.3 Size of Regulatory Signs (MUTCD Section 2B.03)

Standard. Except as provided in EPG 903.1.7, the minimum sizes for regulatory signs shall be as shown in Table 903.2.3.

Support. EPG 903.1.7 contains information regarding the applicability of the various columns in Table 903.2.3.

Guidance. The minimum sizes for regulatory signs facing traffic on exit and entrance ramps at interchanges should be as shown in the column of Table 903.2.3 that corresponds to the mainline roadway classification (Expressway/Freeway).

Standard. The minimum size for WRONG WAY and DO NOT ENTER signs on ramps facing the opposite direction of travel where a road user could wrongly enter the ramp from a conventional road shall be the size listed in the Conventional Road - Standard column of Table 903.2.3. See EPG 903.2.37 and 903.2.38 for additional information.

Option. The minimum size for WRONG WAY and DO NOT ENTER signs on ramps facing the opposite direction of travel where a road user could wrongly enter the ramp from a conventional road may be increased to the size in the Conventional Road – Oversized column of Table 903.2.3 when the need for greater emphasis has been determined based on engineering judgement.

Table 903.2.3, Regulatory Sign and Plaque Sizes
Sign or Plaque Sign Designation EPG Article Conventional Road (in. x in.) Freeway/Expressway (in. x in.)
Standard Oversized Special Mainline and Ramps
Stop R1-1 903.2.4 36 X 36 48 X 48 - 48 X 48
Yield R1-2 903.2.5 48 X 48 X 48 60 X 60 X 60 - 60 X 60 X 60
To Oncoming Traffic (plaque) R1-2aP 903.2.5 36 X 30 - - -
All-Way (plaque) R1-3P 903.2.4 30 X 12 - - -
Yield Here To Pedestrians R1-5 903.2.18 36 X 36 - - -
Yield Here to Trail Crossing R1-5d 903.2.18 36 X 42 - - -
In-Street Pedestrian Crossing - Yield R1-6 903.2.19 12 X 36 - - -
In-Street Trail Crossing - Yield R1-6d 903.2.19 12 X 36 - - -
Speed Limit R2-1 903.2.20 36 X 48 48 X 60 - 48 X 60
Combined Speed Limit R2-4a 903.2.21 - - - 48 X 96
Speed Limit _ Except Where Posted R2-5d 903.2.22 36 X 48 - - 36 X 48
Fines Doubled Ends R2-20 903.2.71 36 X 30 - - 36 X 30
No Right Turn R3-1 903.2.24 36 X 36 48 X 48 24 X 24 - 30 X 30 48 X 48
No Left Turn R3-2 903.2.24 36 X 36 48 X 48 24 X 24 - 30 X 30 48 X 48
No Turns R3-3 903.2.24 36 X 36 48 X 48 24 X 24 - 30 X 30 36 X 36
No U Turn R3-4 903.2.24 36 X 36 48 X 48 24 X 24 - 30 X 30 -
Right (Left/Ahead) Only R3-5, 5a 903.2.26 30 X 36 - - -
Straight and Right (Left) R3-6 903.2.27 30 X 36 - - -
Optional Movement U and Left Turn R3-6a 903.2.27 30 X 36 - - -
Optional Movement Left Turns R3-6b 903.2.27 30 X 36 - - -
Right (Left) Lane Must Turn Right (Left) R3-7 903.2.26 36 X 36 - - -
Advance Intersection Lane Control R3-8,8a,8b,8xa, 8xb,8xc 903.2.28 Varies X 30 - - -
Two-Way Left Turn Only (overhead) R3-9a 903.2.29 30 X 36 - - -
Center Lane Two-Way Left Turn Only (post-mounted) R3-9b 903.2.29 24 X 36 36 X 48 - -
No U Turn/No Left Turn R3-18 903.2.24 36 X 36 48 X 48 24 X 24 - 30 X 30 -
No Straight Through R3-27 903.2.24 36 X 36 48 X 48 24 X 24 - 30 X 30 48 X 48
Do Not Pass R4-1 903.2.31 36 X 48 36 X 48 -
Pass With Care R4-2 903.2.32 36 X 48 48 X 60 -
Slower Traffic Keep Right R4-3 903.2.33 36 X 48 48 X 60 48 X 60 48 X 60
Keep Right R4-7 903.2.34 24 X 30 36 X 48 36 X 48 48 X 60
Keep Right (horizontal arrow) R4-7a 903.2.34 36 X 48 48 X 60 48 X 60 48 X 60
Keep Right (45° arrow) R4-7b 903.2.34 36 X 48 48 X 60 - 84 X 96
Narrow Keep Right R4-7c 903.2.34 18 X 30 - - -
Keep Left R4-8 903.2.34 24 X 30 36 X 48 - 48 X 60
Keep Left (horizontal arrow) R4-8a 903.2.34 36 X 48 48 X 60 - 48 X 60
Keep Left (45° arrow) R4-8b 903.2.34 36 X 48 48 X 60 - 84 X 96
Narrow Keep Left R4-8c 903.2.34 18 X 30 - - -
Keep Right Except to Pass R4-16 903.2.33 36 X 48 - - -
Do Not Drive on Shoulder R4-17 903.2.35 36 X 48 - - -
Next Passing Lane _ Miles R4-28 903.2.69 - - - -
End Passing Lanes R4-29 903.2.69 - - - -
Do Not Enter R5-1 903.2.37 36 X 36 48 X 48 - 48 X 48
Wrong Way R5-1a 903.2.39 42 X 30 - - 42 X 30
No Trucks R5-2 903.2.36 36 X 36 - -
Except Local Deliveries (plaque) R5-2aP 903.2.36 36 X 18 - -
Engine Brake Muffler Required R5-23 - 30 X 30 - - 30 X 30
No Fishing from Bridge R5-25 903.2.36 18 X 24 - - 18 X 24
No Dumping R5-28 903.2.66 - - - 48 X 24
Authorized and Emergency Vehicles Only R5-29 903.2.36 - - - 24 X 30
Do Not Stop on Tracks R5-31 903.2.45 24 X 30 - - -
One Way R6-1 903.2.40 36 X 12 48 X 18 - 48 X 18
One Way R6-2 903.2.40 24 X 30 30 X 36 - -
Divided Highway (4-legged) R6-3 903.2.41 30 X 24 - - 36 X 30
Divided Highway (T-intersection) R6-3a 903.2.41 30 X 24 - - 36 X 30
No Parking Signs R7 series 903.2.43 18 X 24 - - -
Reserved Parking R7-8 903.2.43 18 X 24 - - -
Van Accessible (plaque) R7-8aP 903.2.43 18 X 9 - - -
No Parking on Bridge R7-35 903.2.43 18 X 24 - - 18 X 24
No Parking Trucks and Trailers Over 6 Tons R7-36 903.2.62 18 X 24 36 X 48 - -
Tow Away Zone (plaque) R7-201P, R7-201ap 903.2.43 18 X 9 -
This Side of Sign (plaque) R7-202P 903.2.43 18 X 9 - -
Emergency Stopping Only R8-7 903.2.45 48 X 36 - - 48 X 36
No Pedestrian Crossing (symbol) R9-3 903.2.46 18 X 24 - - -
No Pedestrian Crossing R9-3a 903.2.46 18 X 24 - - -
Pedestrian Signal Series R10-3 & R10-4 series 903.2.47 9 X 15 - - -
Left on Green Arrow Only R10-5 903.2.48 24 X 30 30 X 36 - 30 X 36
Stop Here on Red R10-6 903.2.48 24 X 36 - - -
Do Not Block Intersection R10-7 903.2.48 24 X 30 - - -
Right Turn Signal R10-10R - 30 X 36 - - -
No Turn on Red R10-11 903.2.49 30 X 36 - - -
Left Turn on Green (Ball) R10-12 903.2.48 24 X 30 30 X 36 - 30 X 36
Left Turn Yield on Flashing Yellow Arrow R10-12a 903.2.48 24 X 30 30 X 36 - 30 X 36
Emergency Signal R10-13 903.2.48 36 X 24 - - -
Emergency Signal Stop on Flashing Red R10-14 903.2.48 36 X 42 - - -
Emergency Signal - Stop on Flashing Red (overhead) R10-14a 903.2.48 60 X 24 - - -
Stop Here on Red R10-14b 903.2.48 24 X 36 - - -
Turning Vehicles Yield to Pedestrians R10-15 903.2.48 30 X 30 - - -
Traffic Signal Photo Enforced R10-18a 903.2.56 30 X 42 36 X 54 - -
Photo Enforced (symbol plaque) R10-19P 903.2.56 24 X 12 48 X 24 - -
Crosswalk - Stop on Red R10-23 903.2.48 24 X 30 - - -
Stop on Red - Yield on Flashing Red After Stop R10-23a 903.2.48 24 X 30 - - -
Push Button for Warning Lights - Wait for Gap in Traffic R10-25 903.2.47 9 X 12 - - -
XX Vehicles per Green R10-28 903.2.50 24 X 30 - - -
XX Vehicles per Green Each Lane R10-29 903.2.50 36 X 24 - - -
Right Turn on Red Must Yield to U-Turn R10-30 903.2.49 30 X 36 - - -
Right Turn Must Yield To U-Turn R10-30a 903.2.49 36 X 24 - - -
Keep Off Median R11-1 903.2.51 48 X 60 48 X 60 - -
Road Closed R11-2 903.2.52 48 X 30 -
Road Closed _ Miles Ahead Local Traffic Only R11-3 903.2.52 60 X 30 -
Road Closed to Thru Traffic R11-4 903.2.52 60 X 30 -
Weight Limit XX Tons R12-1 903.2.53 36 X 48 36 X 48
Weigh Station Signs R13 series 903.2.54 Varies Varies
Truck Route R14-1 903.2.55 24 X 18 -
State Law Move Over or Slow Down for Stopped Emergency Vehicles R16-25 903.2.57 120 X 60 120 X 60
Primary Seatbelt City/Country R16-27B - 30 X 36 -
State Law Buckle Up / Phone Down R16-30 903.2.59 48 X 30 -
State Law Buckle Up / Phone Down R16-30a 903.2.59 - 72 X 48
Roadside Park Signs R20-1 903.2.66 30 X 30 -
Rest Area Regulations R20-2 903.2.67 30 X 36 -
Commuter Parking Regulations R20-3 903.2.67 42 X 48 -
Rest Area Signs R20 Series 903.2.67 Varies

903.2.4 STOP Sign (R1-1) and ALL-WAY Plaque (R1-3P) (MUTCD Section 2B.04)

R1-1
R1-3P

Standard. When it is determined that a full stop is always required on an approach to an intersection, a STOP (R1-1) sign shall be used.

Secondary legends shall not be used on STOP sign faces.

The STOP sign shall not be displayed using a changeable message sign.

At intersections where all approaches are controlled by STOP signs (see EPG 903.2.11), an ALL-WAY (R1-3P) supplemental plaque shall be mounted below each STOP sign. The ALL-WAY plaque shall have a white legend and border on a red background.

Supplemental plaques with legends such as 2-WAY, 3-WAY, 4-WAY, or other numbers of ways shall not be used with STOP signs.

Support. The use of the CROSS TRAFFIC DOES NOT STOP (W4-4P Series) and other plaques with variations of this legend is described in EPG 903.3.65.

Guidance. The TRAFFIC FROM LEFT (RIGHT) DOES NOT STOP (W4-4aP) plaque or ONCOMING TRAFFIC DOES NOT STOP (W4-4bP) plaque should be used at intersections where STOP signs control all but one approach to the intersection, unless the only non-stopped approach is from a one-way street.

Support. The design and application of Stop Beacons are described in EPG 902.18.5.

903.2.5 YIELD Sign (R1-2) (MUTCD Section 2B.05)

R1-2
R1-2aP

Support. The YIELD sign requires road users to yield the right-of-way to other traffic on certain approaches to an intersection or on a two-way approach to a one-way section of roadway, such as a narrow bridge or underpass. Vehicles controlled by a YIELD sign need to slow down to a speed that is reasonable for the existing conditions or stop when necessary to avoid interfering with conflicting traffic.

Standard. The YIELD (R1-2) sign shall not be displayed using a changeable message sign.

903.2.6 General Considerations (MUTCD Section 2B.06)

Support. Unsignalized intersections represent the most common form of intersection right-of-way control. Selection of control type might be impacted by specific requirements of State law or local ordinances.

Roundabouts and traffic circles are circular intersection designs and are not traffic control devices. The decision to convert an intersection from a conventional intersection to a circular intersection is an engineering design decision and not a traffic control device decision. As such, criteria for conversion from a conventional intersection to a circular intersection are not included in EPG 903.

Guidance. The type of traffic control used at an unsignalized intersection should be the least restrictive that provides appropriate levels of safety and efficiency for all road users.

Support. Some types of right-of-way control that can exist at an unsignalized intersection in order from the least restrictive to the most restrictive are the following:

A. Yield control (see EPG 903.2.9): YIELD signs are placed on all approaches (for a circular intersection), or in the median of a divided highway. The YIELD signs are placed on the minor road.
B. Minor road stop control (see EPG 903.2.10): STOP signs are typically placed on opposing approaches (for a four-leg intersection) or on a single approach (for a three-leg intersection). The STOP signs are normally placed on the minor road. EPG 903.2.7 contains guidance on selecting the minor road.
C. All-way stop control (see EPG 903.2.11): STOP signs are placed on all approaches to the intersection.

Guidance. When selecting a form of intersection control, the following factors should be considered:

A. Motor vehicle, bicycle, and pedestrian traffic volumes on all approaches; where the term units/day or units/hour is indicated, it should be the total of motor vehicle, bicycle, and pedestrian volume;
B. Driver yielding behavior with regard to all modes of conflicting traffic, including bicyclists and pedestrians;
C. Number and angle of approaches;
D. Approach speeds;
E. Sight distance available on each approach;
F. Reported crash experience; and
G. The presence of a grade crossing near the intersection.

Standard. YIELD or STOP signs shall not be used for speed control.

Access to the state highway system from city streets, county roads or other significant private road approaches shall be controlled by installation of MoDOT STOP signs. Significant private roads are those that service 3 or more private residences.

Option. Stop signs, based on engineering judgment and a traffic study justifying the need, may be installed for a private road approach servicing fewer than 3 private residences, or a commercial entrance.

Standard. Because the potential for conflicting commands could create driver confusion, YIELD or STOP signs shall not be used in conjunction with any traffic control signal operation, except in the following cases:

A. If the signal indication for an approach is a flashing red at all times;
B. If a minor street or driveway is located within or adjacent to the area controlled by the traffic control signal, but does not require separate traffic signal control because an extremely low potential for conflict exists; or
C. If a channelized turn lane is separated from the adjacent travel lanes by an island and the channelized turn lane is not controlled by a traffic control signal.

STOP signs and YIELD signs shall not be installed on different approaches to the same unsignalized intersection if those approaches conflict with or oppose each other, except as provided for in Items A and B in the first paragraph of EPG 903.2.9.

Portable or part-time STOP or YIELD signs shall not be used except for emergency and temporary traffic control zone purposes.

A portable or part-time (folding) STOP sign that is manually placed into view and manually removed from view shall not be used during a power outage to control a signalized approach unless the maintaining agency establishes that the signal indication that will first be displayed to that approach upon restoration of power is a flashing red signal indication and that the portable STOP sign will be manually removed from view prior to resuming stop-and-go operation of the traffic control signal.

Option. When a STOP sign or YIELD sign is knocked down and it is not possible to repair the assembly immediately, a temporary sign of the same likeness (STOP sign for STOP and YIELD sign for YIELD) may be installed on a portable sign support at the location until the permanent assembly can be repaired. See EPG 948 for additional information regarding Incident Response Planning.

Support. The use of STOP signs at grade crossings is described in EPG 913.2.4 and EPG 913.2.5.

EPG 914.2.1 contains provisions regarding the assignment of priority where a shared-use path crosses a roadway.

903.2.7 Determining the Minor Road for Unsignalized Intersections (MUTCD Section 2B.07)

Guidance. The selection of the minor road to be controlled by STOP signs should be based on one or more of the following criteria:

A. A roadway intersecting a highway,
B. A roadway with the lower functional classification,
C. A roadway with the lower traffic volume,
D. A roadway with the lower speed limit, and/or
E. A roadway that intersects with a roadway that has a higher priority for one or more modes of travel.

When two roadways that have relatively equal volumes, speeds, and/or other characteristics intersect, the following factors should be considered in selecting the minor road for installation of STOP signs:

A. Controlling the direction that conflicts the most with established pedestrian crossing activity or school walking routes;
B. Controlling the direction that has obscured vision, dips, or bumps that already require drivers to use lower operating speeds;
C. Controlling the direction that has the best sight distance from a controlled position to observe conflicting traffic; and
D. Stopping the direction that has the longest distance of uninterrupted flow approaching the intersection.

903.2.8 Right-of-Way Intersection Control Considerations (MUTCD Section 2B.08)

Guidance. Before converting to a more restrictive form of right-of-way control at an unsignalized intersection, the following alternative treatments to address safety, operational, or other concerns should be among those to be considered:

A. Where stop controlled, installing Stop Ahead signs on the appropriate approaches to the intersection;
B. Removing parking on one or more approaches;
C. Removing sight distance obstructions;
D. Installing signs along the major street to warn road users approaching the intersection;
E. Relocating the stop line(s) and making other changes to improve the sight distance at the intersection;
F. Installing measures designed to reduce speeds on the approaches;
G. Installing an Intersection Control Beacon (see EPG 902.18.2) or Stop Beacon (see EPG 902.18.5) at the intersection to supplement STOP sign control;
H. Installing a Warning Beacon (see EPG 902.18.3) on warning signs in advance of a stop-controlled intersection on major-street and/or minor-street approaches;
I. Adding one or more lanes on a minor-street approach to reduce the number of vehicles per lane on the approach;
J. Revising the geometrics at the intersection to channelize vehicular movements and reduce the time required for a vehicle to complete a movement, which could also assist pedestrians;
K. Revising the geometrics at the intersection to add pedestrian median refuge islands and/or curb extensions;
L. Installing roadway lighting if a disproportionate number of crashes occur at night;
M. Restricting one or more turning movements on a full-time or part-time basis if alternate routes are available;
N. Installing on the major street a pedestrian-actuated device: Warning Beacon (see EPG 902.18.3), rectangular rapid-flashing beacon (see EPG 902.12.1), or In-Roadway Warning Lights (see EPG 902.20), if pedestrian safety is the major concern;
O. If the warrant is satisfied, installing all-way stop control;
P. Installing a pedestrian hybrid beacon (see EPG 902.10) on the major street to address pedestrian safety;
Q. Installing a circular intersection; and
R. Employing other alternatives, depending on conditions at the intersection.

903.2.9 Yield Control (MUTCD Section 2B.10)

Guidance. YIELD signs should be installed at an intersection when any of the following conditions apply:

A. At the second intersection of a divided highway crossing or median break functioning as two separate intersections (see Figure 903.2.41.2). In this case, a YIELD sign should be installed at the entrance to the second intersection.
B. For a channelized turn lane that is separated from the adjacent travel lanes by an island, even if the adjacent lanes at the intersection are controlled by a highway traffic control signal or by a STOP sign.
C. At an intersection where a special problem exists and where engineering judgment indicates the problem to be susceptible to correction by the use of the YIELD sign.
D. On an approach to an intersection where the only permissible movement is a right-turn movement with an intersection geometry similar to a channelized right-turn lane or an approach to a roundabout.

Support. YIELD signs are generally not to be installed at entrance ramps on MoDOT freeways or expressways where an acceleration lane is provided. The intention is for drivers to accelerate to improve merging traffic operation. YIELD signs may cause drivers to decelerate, thus negatively impacting merging traffic operation. For cloverleaf interchanges, the loop entrance ramps can result in low speeds on ramps and short weave sections. Therefore, YIELD signs are installed at cloverleaf interchanges.

Standard. YIELD signs shall be used at a cloverleaf interchange where the in-loop traffic merges with the acceleration and deceleration traffic movement.

Option. YIELD signs may be installed facing the entering roadway for a merge-type movement if engineering judgment indicates that control is needed because acceleration geometry and/or sight distance is not adequate for merging traffic operation. The design criteria contained in Section 10.9.6.5 of the “AASHTO Green Book – A Policy on Geometric Design Of Highways and Streets,” 7th Edition, 2018, AASHTO should be used to evaluate acceleration lane geometry. (See Figure 903.15.23).

Standard. A YIELD sign shall be used to require road users to yield the right-of-way to other traffic at the entrance to a roundabout. YIELD signs at roundabouts shall be used to control the approach roadways and shall not be used to control the circulatory roadway.

YIELD signs shall not be placed on all of the approaches to an intersection, except at roundabouts.

903.2.10 Minor Road Stop Control (MUTCD Section 2B.11)

Standard. All city street and county road access to the state highway system shall be controlled by a stop sign except as described in EPG 903.2.9 and EPG 902.

903.2.11 All-Way Stop Control (MUTCD Section 2B.12)

Support. The provisions in the following sections describe warrants for the recommended engineering study to determine all-way stop control. Warrants are not a substitute for engineering judgment. The fact that a warrant for a particular traffic control device is met is not conclusive justification to install or not install all-way stop control. Because each intersection will have unique characteristics that affect its operational performance or safety, it is the engineering study for a given intersection that is ultimately the basis for a decision to install or not install all-way stop control.

All-way stop controls at intersections with substantially differing approach volumes can reduce the effectiveness of these devices for all roadway users.

Guidance. The decision to establish all-way stop control at an unsignalized intersection should be based on an engineering study. The engineering study for all-way stop control should include an analysis of factors related to the existing operation and safety at the intersection, the potential to improve these conditions, and the applicable factors contained in the following all-way stop control warrants:

A. All-Way Stop Control Warrant A: Crash Experience (see EPG 903.2.12)
B. All-Way Stop Control Warrant B: Sight Distance (see EPG 903.2.13)
C. All-Way Stop Control Warrant C: Transition to Signal Control or Transition to Yield Control at a Circular Intersection (see EPG 903.2.14)
D. All-Way Stop Control Warrant D: 8-Hour Volume (Vehicles, Pedestrians, Bicycles) (see EPG 903.2.15)
E. All-Way Stop Control Warrant E: Other Factors (see EPG 903.2.16)

Standard. The satisfaction of an all-way stop control warrant or warrants shall not in itself require the installation of all-way stop control at an unsignalized intersection.

903.2.12 All-Way Stop Control Warrant A: Crash Experience (MUTCD Section 2B.13)

Option. All-way stop control may be installed at an intersection where an engineering study indicates that:

A. For a four-leg intersection, there are five or more reported crashes in a 12-month period or six or more reported crashes in a 36-month period that were of a type susceptible to correction by the installation of all-way stop control.
B. For a three-leg intersection, there are four or more reported crashes in a 12-month period or five or more reported crashes in a 36-month period that were of a type susceptible to correction by the installation of all-way stop control.

903.2.13 All-Way Stop Control Warrant B: Sight Distance (MUTCD Section 2B.14)

Option. All-way stop control may be installed at an intersection where an engineering study indicates that sight distance on the minor-road approaches controlled by a STOP sign is not adequate for a vehicle to turn onto or cross the major (uncontrolled) road.

Support. At such a location, a road user, after stopping, cannot see conflicting traffic and is not able to negotiate the intersection unless conflicting cross traffic is also required to stop.

903.2.14 All-Way Stop Control Warrant C: Transition to Signal Control or Transition to Yield Control at a Circular Intersection (MUTCD Section 2B.15)

Option. All-way stop control may be installed at locations where all-way stop control is an interim measure that can be installed to control traffic while arrangements are being made for the installation of a traffic control signal (see EPG 902.3) at the intersection or for the installation of yield control at a circular intersection.

903.2.15 All-Way Stop Control Warrant D: 8-Hour Volume (Vehicles, Pedestrians, Bicycles) (MUTCD Section 2B.16)

Option. All-way stop control may be installed at an intersection where an engineering study indicates:

A. The combined motor vehicle, bicycle, and pedestrian volume entering the intersection from the major-street approaches is at least 300 units per hour for each of any 8 hours of a typical day; and
B. The combined motor vehicle, bicycle, and pedestrian volume entering the intersection from the minor-street approaches is at least 200 units per hour for each of any of the same 8 hours.

If the 85th-percentile approach speed of the major-street traffic exceeds 40 mph, the minimum vehicular volume warrants may be reduced to 70 percent of the values given in Items A and B in the preceding paragraph.

903.2.16 All-Way Stop Control Warrant E: Other Factors (MUTCD Section 2B.17)

Option. All-way stop control may be installed at an intersection where an engineering study indicates that all-way stop control is needed due to other factors not addressed in the other all-way stop control warrants. Such other factors may include, but are not limited to, the following:

A. The need to control left-turn conflicts,
B. An intersection of two residential neighborhood collector (through) streets of similar design and operating characteristics where all-way stop control would improve traffic operational characteristics of the intersection, or
C. Where pedestrian and/or bicyclist movements support the installation of all-way stop control.

903.2.17 STOP Sign or YIELD Sign Placement (MUTCD Section 2B.18)

Standard. The STOP or YIELD sign shall be installed on the near side of the intersection on the right-hand side of the approach to which it applies. When the STOP or YIELD sign is installed at this required location and the sign visibility is restricted, a Stop Ahead sign (see EPG 903.2.29) shall be installed in advance of the STOP sign or a Yield Ahead sign (see EPG 903.2.29) shall be installed in advance of the YIELD sign.

The STOP or YIELD sign shall be located as close as practicable to the intersection it regulates, while optimizing its visibility to the road user it is intended to regulate.

STOP signs and YIELD signs shall not be mounted on the same post.

Support. EPG 903.1.5 contains information about mounting signs back-to-back with a STOP or YIELD sign.

Guidance. STOP or YIELD signs should not be placed farther than 50 feet from the edge of the pavement of the intersected roadway (see Drawing F in Figure 903.1.13).

Supplemental plaques used in conjunction with a STOP or YIELD sign should be limited to those specified for such use in the EPG.

Standard. Where drivers proceeding straight ahead must yield to traffic approaching from the opposite direction, such as at a one-lane bridge, a TO ONCOMING TRAFFIC (R1-2aP) plaque shall be mounted below the YIELD sign. See Figure 903.2.53.2 and Figure 903.2.53.3 in EPG 903.2.53.

Support. Figure 903.1.13 shows examples of some typical placements of STOP signs and YIELD signs.

EPG 903.1.13 contains additional information about separate and combined mounting of other signs with STOP or YIELD signs.

Guidance. Stop lines that are used to supplement a STOP sign should be located as described in EPG 620.2.18. Yield lines that are used to supplement a YIELD sign should be located as described in EPG 620.2.18.

Where there is a marked crosswalk at the intersection, the STOP sign should be installed in advance of the edge of the crosswalk that is nearest to the approaching traffic.

Except at roundabouts and channelized right-turn lanes, where there is a marked crosswalk at the intersection, the YIELD sign should be installed in advance of the edge of the crosswalk that is nearest to the approaching traffic.

Where two roads intersect at an acute angle, the STOP or YIELD sign should be positioned at an angle, or shielded, so that the legend is out of view of traffic to which it does not apply.

At a roundabout intersection, to prevent circulating vehicles from yielding unnecessarily, the face of the YIELD sign is not to be visible from the circulatory roadway.

If a raised splitter island is available on the left-hand side of a multi-lane roundabout approach, an additional YIELD sign should be placed on the left-hand side of the approach.

Option. If a raised splitter island is available on the left-hand side of a single-lane roundabout approach, an additional YIELD sign may be placed on the left-hand side of the approach.

At wide-throat intersections or where two or more approach lanes of traffic exist on the signed approach, an additional STOP or YIELD sign may be installed on the left-hand side of the road and/or a stop or yield line may be used to improve observance of the right-of-way control. At channelized intersections or at divided roadways separated by a median or divisional island (painted or physical), the additional STOP or YIELD sign may be placed on a channelizing island, or in the median or on the divisional island.

Standard. More than one STOP sign or more than one YIELD sign shall not be placed on the same support facing in the same direction.

903.2.18 Yield Here To Pedestrians Signs (R1-5 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.19)

R1-5
R1-5d

Support. The R1-5 series signs are intended to mitigate the scenario that can place pedestrians at risk by blocking other drivers’ view of pedestrians and by blocking the pedestrians' view of the vehicles approaching in the adjacent lanes.

Standard. Yield Here to Pedestrians (R1-5, R1-5a, R1-5c, and R1-5d) signs shall be used if yield lines are used in advance of a marked crosswalk only where it crosses an uncontrolled multi-lane approach. The legend STATE LAW shall not be displayed on the R1-5 series signs.

Guidance. If yield lines and Yield Here to Pedestrians signs are used in advance of a crosswalk that crosses an uncontrolled multi-lane approach, the signs should be placed 20 to 50 feet in advance of the nearest edge of the crosswalk (see EPG 620.2.18 and Figure 620.2.18).

Standard. When used with a School Crossing assembly within school zones (see EPG 908), the R1-5a sign shall be used in place of the R1-5 sign in accordance with the second paragraph of this article.

When used with a Trail Crossing assembly (see EPG 903.3.44), the R1-5d sign shall be used in place of the R1-5 sign in accordance with the second paragraph of this article.

Guidance. When Yield Here to Pedestrians signs are provided in advance of a crosswalk across an multi-lane approach, parking should be prohibited in the area between the yield line and the crosswalk.

Yield lines and Yield Here to Pedestrians signs should not be used in advance of crosswalks that cross an approach to or departure from a roundabout.

Option. A Pedestrian Crossing (W11-2) warning sign may be placed overhead or may be post-mounted with a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque at the crosswalk location where Yield Here to Pedestrians signs have been installed in advance of the crosswalk.

Standard. If a W11-2 sign is post-mounted at the crosswalk location where a Yield Here to Pedestrians sign is used on the approach, the Yield Here to Pedestrians sign shall not be placed on the same post as the W11-2 sign.

Option. An advance Pedestrian Crossing (W11-2) warning sign with an AHEAD or a distance supplemental plaque may be used in conjunction with a Yield Here to Pedestrians sign on the approach to the same crosswalk.

In-Street Pedestrian Crossing signs and Yield Here to Pedestrians signs may be used together at the same crosswalk.

903.2.19 In-Street Pedestrian and Trail Crossing Signs (R1-6 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.20)

R1-6
R1-6d
Note: The legend STATE LAW is optional

Option. The In-Street Pedestrian Crossing (R1-6) sign, In-Street Trail Crossing (R1-6d) sign, may be used to remind road users of laws regarding right-of-way at an unsignalized crosswalk. The legend STATE LAW may be displayed at the top of the R1-6 series signs if applicable. On the R1-6 series signs, the legend YIELD may be used instead of the appropriate YIELD sign symbol.

MoDOT may develop and apply criteria for determining the applicability of In-Street Pedestrian Crossing signs.

Standard. If used, In-Street Pedestrian or Trail Crossing signs shall only be placed in the roadway at the crosswalk location on a raised island.

The In-Street Pedestrian or Trail Crossing sign shall not be post-mounted on the left-hand or right-hand side of the roadway.

Support. EPG 620.8.2 contains information about the use of tubular markers to provide additional emphasis for a pedestrian crossing.

Standard. When used at an uncontrolled crossing, the In-Street Pedestrian Crossing sign shall be used only as a supplement to a Pedestrian Crossing (W11-2) warning sign with a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque at the crosswalk location.

When used at an uncontrolled crossing, the In-Street Trail Crossing sign shall be used only as a supplement to a Trail Crossing (W11-15) warning sign with a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque at the crosswalk location.

An In-Street or Trail Crossing sign shall not be placed in advance of the crosswalk to educate road users about the State law prior to reaching the crosswalk, nor shall it be installed as an educational display that is not near any crosswalk.

Option. In-Street Pedestrian or Trail Crossing signs may be mounted back-to-back on a raised island in the median of an undivided roadway.

Standard. The In-Street Pedestrian or Trail Crossing sign shall not be used at crosswalks on approaches controlled by a traffic control signal, pedestrian hybrid beacon, or an emergency-vehicle hybrid beacon.

Option. The In-Street Pedestrian or Trail Crossing sign may be used at intersections or midblock pedestrian crossings with flashing beacons.

Support. The provisions of EPG 903.1.15 concerning mounting height are not applicable for the In-Street Pedestrian Crossing sign. EPG 903.1.18 contains information about sign mounting methods.

Standard. The top of an In-Street Pedestrian or Trail Crossing sign placed in an island shall be a maximum of 4 feet above the island surface.

Option. The In-Street Pedestrian Crossing or Trail Crossing signs may be used seasonally to prevent damage in winter because of plowing operations, and may be removed at night if the pedestrian activity at night is minimal.

903.2.20 Speed Limit Sign (R2-1) (MUTCD Section 2B.21)

R2-1

Support. In general, the maximum speed limits applicable to roads are established:

A. Statutorily – a maximum speed limit applicable to a particular class of road, such as freeways or city streets, that is established by State law; or
B. As speed zones – based on engineering studies.

State statutory limits restrict the maximum speed limit that can be established on a particular road, notwithstanding what an engineering study might indicate. Maximum speed limits in Missouri are governed by the Missouri Revised Statutes, Section 304.010.

MoDOT can establish non-statutory speed limits or designate reduced speed zones using an engineering study. Setting appropriate speed limits is especially important to ensure safety for all road users in varying types of contexts, particularly on roadways where adjacent land use suggests that trips could be served by varied modes. These situations include urban and suburban non-freeway arterials or rural arterials that serve as main streets in smaller communities, consistent with the context classifications of urban core, urban, suburban, and rural towns found in “A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets,” 2018 Edition, AASHTO. When setting a speed limit, a range of factors such as land-use context, pedestrian and bicyclist activity, crash history, intersection spacing, driveway density, roadway geometry, roadside conditions, roadway functional classification, traffic volume, and observed speeds can influence the speed limit determined in the engineering study. The engineering study will determine which of the recommended factors will prevail in setting the speed limit.

MoDOT can use speed limit setting tools and methods such as expert systems and those consistent with the safe system approach as part of the required engineering study for a non-statutory speed limit. As speed limit setting tools vary, practitioners needs to be aware of their limitations and advantages, possible variation between the tools and the need to explore gaps or weaknesses of tools, and weigh the output accordingly in consideration of setting speed limits.

To achieve desired operating speeds, agencies often implement other speed management strategies concurrently with setting speed limits, such as traffic calming measures, geometric design features, and increased enforcement. See EPG 905.2.14 for more information regarding speed limit guidelines.

Standard. Speed zones (other than statutory speed limits) shall only be established on the basis of an engineering study that has been performed in accordance with traffic engineering practices. The engineering study shall consider the roadway context.

Guidance. Among the factors that should be considered when conducting an engineering study for establishing or reevaluating speed limits within speed zones are the following:

A. Roadway environment (such as roadside development, number and frequency of driveways and access points, and land use), functional classification, public transit volume and location or frequency of stops, parking practices, and pedestrian and bicycle facilities and activity;
B. Roadway characteristics (such as lane widths, shoulder condition, grade, alignment, median type, and sight distance);
C. Geographic context (such as an urban district, rural town center, non-urbanized rural area, or suburban area), and multi-modal trip generation;
D. Reported crash experience for at least a 12-month period;
E. Speed distribution of free-flowing vehicles including the pace, median (50th-percentile), and 85th-percentile speeds; and
F. A review of past speed studies to identify any trends in operating speeds.

When the 85th-percentile speed is appreciably greater than the posted speed limit, and the roadway context does not support setting a higher speed limit, the engineering study should consider whether changes to geometric features, enforcement, and/or other speed-reduction countermeasures might improve compliance with the posted speed limit. A similar approach should be used if the results of past speed studies indicate that the 85th-percentile speed has consistently increased.

On urban and suburban arterials, and on rural arterials that serve as main streets through developed areas of communities, the 85th-percentile speed should not be used to set speed limits without consideration of all factors described in the first Guidance paragraph of this article.

On a freeway, expressway, or rural highway (outside urbanized locations or conditions), the speed limit that is posted within a speed zone should be within 5 mph of the 85th-percentile speed of free-flowing motor-vehicle traffic under the following conditions:

A. All factors described in the first Guidance paragraph of this article have been considered and determined to be non-mitigating, and
B. The measures described in the second Guidance paragraph of this article have been considered to the extent practicable.

See EPG 905.2.14 for additional information regarding setting speed limits

MoDOT should conduct engineering studies to reevaluate non-statutory speed limits on segments of their roadways that have undergone significant changes since the last review (such as changes to roadway context, the addition or elimination of parking or driveways, changes in the number of travel lanes, changes in the configuration of bicycle lanes, changes to road geometrics, changes in traffic control signal coordination, or significant changes in traffic volumes).

Speed studies for signalized intersection approaches should be taken outside the influence area of the traffic control signal, which is generally considered to be approximately ½ mile, to avoid obtaining skewed results for the speed distribution. If the signal spacing is less than 1 mile, the speed study should be at approximately the middle of the segment.

Standard. The Speed Limit (R2-1) sign shall display the limit established by law, ordinance, regulation, or as adopted by the authorized agency based on an engineering study. The speed limits displayed shall be in multiples of 5 mph.

Speed Limit (R2-1) signs, indicating speed limits for which posting is required by law, shall be located at the points of change from one speed limit to another.

At the downstream end of the section to which a particular speed limit applies, a Speed Limit sign showing the next speed limit shall be installed.

Speed Limit signs indicating the statutory speed limits shall be installed at entrances to Missouri and at city limits, where appropriate.

Guidance. Additional Speed Limit signs should be installed beyond interchanges and major intersections and at other locations where it is necessary to remind road users of the speed limit that is applicable.

Speed Limit signs should not be located at curves or other locations where the legal speed limit is greater than the safe operating speed. If Speed Limit signs are installed on the same sign supports and above a City Limit sign, the sign supports should be sized to properly support both signs.

The following are recommended locations for posting a Speed Limit sign:

A. Downstream from all acceleration ramps on the freeway/expressway system, posted after the route confirmation marker, if space allows;
B. Downstream from major intersections such as state system junctions, signalized intersections, and major county road junctions;
C. Where it is necessary to remind road users of the speed limit that is applicable;
D. In each direction of travel for road users leaving the Interstate system onto a state route. The sign should be located, if practical, approximately 400 ft. beyond the route confirmation assembly. If the crossroad is not located on the state system, the proper jurisdiction should be notified; or
E. When the speed limit is reduced on the freeway/expressway, an additional sign should be posted in the median.

Support. The “Traffic Control Devices Handbook – 2nd Edition, 2013, ITE.” contains suggested criteria on the spacing of speed limit signs.

EPG 903.3.32 contains information about the use of speed zone signs to inform road users of a reduced or variable speed zone to provide advance notice to comply with the posted speed limit ahead.

Option. If a W3-5b sign is posted to provide notice of a variable speed zone, an END VARIABLE SPEED LIMIT (R2-13) sign may be installed at the downstream end of the zone to provide notice to road users of the termination of the speed zone.

Advance traffic control warning signs (see EPG 903.2.29), intersection warning signs (see EPG 903.3.33), and/or other traffic control devices are appropriate warning prior to a signalized intersection. A Speed Limit sign should not be used for this purpose.

Guidance. An advisory speed plaque (see EPG 903.3.59) mounted below a warning sign should be used to warn road users of an advisory speed for a roadway condition. A Speed Limit sign should not be used for this purpose.

Option. A variable speed limit sign that changes the speed limit for traffic and ambient conditions may be installed provided that the appropriate speed limit is displayed at the proper times and locations in accordance with the third and fourth Guidance paragraphs of this article.

Standard. The variable speed limit sign legend “SPEED LIMIT” shall be a black legend on a white retroreflective background. The variable speed limit legend shall be displayed in white LEDs on an opaque black background.

Support. EPG 903.3.13 contains information about the use of a Vehicle Speed Feedback plaque mounted below a Speed Limit sign that displays to approaching drivers the speed at which they are traveling.

Advisory speed signs and plaques are discussed in EPG 903.3.12 and 903.3.59. Temporary traffic control zone speed signs are discussed in EPG 616. The WORK ZONE (G20-5aP) plaque intended for installation above a Speed Limit sign is discussed in EPG 616.7.7. School Speed Limit signs are discussed in EPG 908.2.5. 

903.2.21 Combined Maximum and Minimum Speed Limits Sign (R2-4a) (MUTCD Section 2B.24)

R2-4a

Standard. Combined Maximum and Minimum Speed Limits (R2-4a) signs shall be installed only on interstate routes in lieu of Speed Limit (R2-1) signs to designate the maximum and minimum speed limits that apply.

Guidance. The Combined Maximum and Minimum Speed Limits sign should be located in the same manner as Speed Limit signs (See EPG 903.2.9). Additionally, the R2-4a sign should be installed on interstate routes at entrances to Missouri and where interstate routes cross county lines.

903.2.22 Speed Limit XX Except Where Posted Sign (R2-5d)

R2-5d

Standard. The SPEED LIMIT XX EXCEPT WHERE POSTED (R2-5d) sign shall be installed only at locations where it has been requested and is required by an enabling ordinance.

Guidance. The SPEED LIMIT XX EXCEPT WHERE POSTED sign should be placed immediately to the right of the City Limit sign on its own post.

Option. The SPEED LIMIT XX EXCEPT WHERE POSTED sign may be used on all state highways and outer roads except the Interstate system.

903.2.23 Higher Fines Signs and Plaque (MUTCD Section 2B.25)

Support. See EPG 907.3 for information on Travel Safe Zones.

903.2.24 Movement Prohibition Signs (R3-1 through R3-4, R3-18, and R3-27) (MUTCD Section 2B.26)

R3-1
R3-2
R3-3
R3-4
R3-18
R3-27

Standard. Movement Prohibition signs shall be installed where specific movements are prohibited at an intersection approach except as provided in the second Option and fourth Standard paragraphs of this article.

Support. Missouri Statute 304.341, which governs U-turn Movements at signalized intersections, states: It shall be unlawful for the driver of any vehicle to turn such vehicle so as to proceed in the opposite direction at any intersection controlled by a traffic signal or police officer; nor shall such turn be made at any place unless the movement can be made in safety and without interfering with other traffic.

Missouri Statute 304.120 allows municipalities, by ordinance, to make additional rules of the road or traffic regulations to meet their needs and traffic conditions, which would allow U-turn Movements to be permitted at certain unsignalized intersections.

Guidance. Movement Prohibition signs should only be used to prohibit a turn or through movement from an entire approach and should not be used to designate movements that are required or permitted from a specific lane or lanes on a multi-lane approach.

Movement Prohibition signs should be placed where they will be most easily seen by road users who might be intending to make the movement.

If a No Right Turn (R3-1) sign is used, at least one should be placed either over the roadway or at a right-hand corner of the intersection.

If a No Left Turn (R3-2) sign is used, at least one should be placed over the roadway, at the far left corner of the intersection, on a median, or in conjunction with the STOP sign or YIELD sign located on the near right corner.

Except as provided in Item C of the third Standard paragraph of this article for signalized locations, if a NO TURNS (R3-3) sign is used, two signs should be used, one at a location specified for a No Right Turn sign and one at a location specified for a No Left Turn sign.

If a No U-Turn (R3-4) sign or a combination No U or Left Turn (R3-18) sign is used, at least one should be used at a location specified for a No Left Turn sign.

The No U-Turn sign (R3-4) should be used sparingly and only where a specific problem has been documented and not as standard practice for median breaks. If used, these signs should be placed at or between intersections to indicate where U-turns are prohibited.

If both left turns and U-turns are prohibited, the combination No U or Left Turn (R3-18) sign should be used instead of separate R3-2 and R3-4 signs.

Standard. The No U-Turn sign shall be installed above the AUTHORIZED AND EMERGENCY VEHICLES ONLY (R5-29) sign (See EPG 903.2.36).

Support. EPG 903.2.25 through EPG 903.2.28 contain information regarding lane control signs that indicate the required or permitted movements from individual lanes.

Guidance. If a No Straight Through (R3-27) sign is used, at least one should be placed either over the roadway or at a location where it can be seen by road users who might be intending to travel straight through the intersection.

If turn prohibition signs are installed in conjunction with traffic control signals:

A. The No Right Turn sign should be installed adjacent to a signal face viewed by road users in the right-hand lane.
B. The No Left Turn (or No U-Turn or combination No U or Left Turn) sign should be installed adjacent to a signal face viewed by road users in the left-hand lane.
C. A NO TURNS sign should be placed adjacent to a signal face viewed by all road users on that approach, or two signs should be used.

Option. If turn prohibition signs are installed in conjunction with traffic control signals, an additional turn prohibition sign may be post-mounted to supplement the sign mounted overhead.

Where ONE WAY signs are used (see EPG 903.2.40), No Left Turn and No Right Turn signs may be omitted.

Where the movement restriction applies to certain vehicle classes, signs incorporating a supplementary legend, modified as appropriate, may be used to indicate the specific vehicle class restriction or exception. When the movement restriction applies during certain time periods only, the following Movement Prohibition signing alternatives may be used and are listed in order of preference:

A. A blank-out or changeable message sign (see Chapter 2L) that displays the prohibited movement only during the time that the movement prohibition is applicable, especially at signalized intersections.
B. Permanently-mounted signs incorporating a supplementary legend showing the hours and days during which the prohibition is applicable. Contact the Highway Safety and Traffic Division for the design of supplementary legends and plaques.
C. Portable signs, installed by proper authority, located off the roadway at each corner of the intersection. The portable signs are only to be used during the time that the movement prohibition is applicable.

Standard. The blank-out part-time electronic-display Movement Prohibition sign shall consist of a red circle and diagonal with a white prohibited movement on an opaque black background.

Option. Movement Prohibition signs may be omitted at a ramp entrance to an expressway or a channelized intersection where the design is such as to indicate clearly the one-way traffic movement on the ramp or turning lane.

Standard. The No Left Turn (R3-2) sign, the No U-Turn (R3-4) sign, and the combination No U or Left Turn (R3-18) sign shall not be used at approaches to roundabouts to prohibit drivers from turning left onto the circulatory roadway of a roundabout.

Support. At roundabouts, the use of R3-2, R3-4, or R3-18 signs to prohibit left turns onto the circulatory roadway might confuse drivers about the possible legal turning movements around the roundabout. ONE WAY (R6-1 or R6-2) signs are appropriate to indicate the travel direction within a roundabout.

903.2.25 Intersection Lane Control Signs (R3-5 through R3-8) (MUTCD Section 2B.27)

Standard. Intersection Lane Control signs, if used, shall require road users in certain lanes to turn, shall permit turns from a lane where such turns would otherwise not be permitted, shall require a road user to stay in the same lane and proceed straight through an intersection, or shall indicate permitted movements from a lane.

Intersection Lane Control signs shall not be used in lieu of turn prohibition signs, such as No Right-Turn (R3-1).

Support. Intersection Lane Control signs have three applications:

A. Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-5 series and R3-7 series) signs,
B. Optional Movement Lane Control (R3-6 series) signs, and
C. Advance Intersection Lane Control (R3-8 series) signs.

Guidance. When Intersection Lane Control signs are mounted overhead, each sign used should be placed over the lane or a projection of the lane to which it applies.

On signalized approaches where through lanes that become mandatory turn lanes, multiple-lane turns that include shared lanes for through and turning movements, ramps with two or more lanes or other lane-use regulations are present that would be unexpected by unfamiliar road users, overhead Intersection Lane Control signs should be installed approximately 250 ft. in advance of the stop bar over the appropriate lanes. A one-arm cantilever tubular truss to support these signs should be used to eliminate an obstacle on one side of the roadway.

Option. A signal mast arm design (without signal head) may be used to mount Intersection Lane Control signs, which allows a longer arm than standard one or two arm tubular sign supports. The upright post may be placed on either side of the roadway, and if possible, placed so that roadway geometrics draw traffic away from the post and footing.

Guidance. The Left Only (R3-5L) sign should be installed on the back side of the mast arms over the left turn lanes where practical.

Where overhead mounting on the approach is impracticable for the Advance and/or Intersection Lane Control signs, one of the following alternatives should be employed:

A. At locations where through lanes become mandatory turn lanes, a Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-7) sign should be post-mounted on the left-hand side of the roadway where a through lane is becoming a mandatory left-turn lane on a one-way street or where a median of sufficient width for the signs is available, or on the right-hand side of the roadway where a through lane is becoming a mandatory right-turn lane.
B. At locations where a through lane is becoming a mandatory left-turn lane on a two-way street where a median of sufficient width for the signs is not available, and at locations where multiple-lane turns that include shared lanes for through and turning movements are present, an Advance Intersection Lane Control (R3-8 series) sign should be post-mounted in a prominent location in advance of the intersection, and consideration should be given to the use of an oversized version in accordance with Table 903.2.3.

Use of an overhead sign for one approach lane should not require installation of overhead signs for the other lanes of that approach.

Option. Intersection Lane Control signs may be omitted where:

A. A turn bay has been provided by physical construction or pavement markings, and
B. Only the road users using such turn bays are permitted to make a turn in that direction.

Standard. Except as provided in the last paragraph of this article, at roundabouts, Intersection Lane Control (R3-5, R3-6, and R3-8 series) signs shall display curved-stem arrow symbols as shown in Figure 903.2.25.

Option. Normal-stem arrow symbol options may be displayed on Intersection Lane Control (R3-5, R3-6, and R3-8 series) signs at roundabouts where they more effectively indicate road geometry based on engineering judgment.

Figure 903.2.25 Intersection Lane Control Signal Arrow Options for Roundabouts

903.2.26 Mandatory Movement Lane Control Signs (R3-5, R3-5a, and R3-7) and Plaques (MUTCD Section 2B.28)

R3-5
R3-5a
R3-7L
R3-7R

Standard. Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-5, R3-5a, and R3-7) signs, if used, shall indicate only the single vehicle movement that is required from the lane.

The Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-5 and R3-5a) symbol signs shall include the legend ONLY and shall be mounted overhead over the specific lanes to which they apply (see EPG 903.2.25). The R3-7 sign shall be for post-mounting only. The R3-7 sign shall not be mounted at the far side of the intersection.

If used, the Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-7) sign shall be located in advance of the intersection, such as near the upstream end of the mandatory movement lane, and/or at the near side of the intersection where the regulation applies.

The use of the Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-7) word message sign shall be limited to only locations where through lanes approaching an intersection become mandatory turn lanes.

Mandatory Movement Lane Control Signs shall not be used on roadways with speed limits 50 mph or greater. Contact Highway Safety and Traffic Division for alternatives when speed limits are 50 mph or greater.

Guidance. Mandatory Movement Lane Control signs should be accompanied by lane-use arrow markings, especially where traffic volumes are high, where there is a high percentage of commercial vehicles, or where other distractions exist.

Option. The Through Only (R3-5a) sign may be used to require a road user in a particular lane to proceed straight through an intersection.

On an approach to a mandatory turn lane where traffic regularly enters the shoulder to access the turn lane inappropriately, creating safety or operational issues, a DO NOT DRIVE ON SHOULDER (R4-17) sign (see EPG 903.2.35) may be used to supplement the standard Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-5 and/or R3-7 series) signs.

903.2.27 Optional Movement Lane Control Signs (R3-6 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.29)

R3-6
R3-6a
R3-6b

Standard. Optional Movement Lane Control (R3-6, R3-6a and R3-6b) signs, if used, shall be used for two or more movements from a specific lane or to emphasize permitted movements. The Optional Movement Lane Control sign shall be mounted overhead over the specific lane to which it applies.

If used, the Optional Movement Lane Control signs shall indicate all permissible movements from specific lanes.

Because more than one movement is permitted from the lane, the word message ONLY shall not be used on an Optional Movement Lane Control sign.

Optional Movement Lane Control signs shall be used for two or more movements from a specific lane where a movement, not allowed by State statute or local ordinance, is permitted.

The Optional Movement Lane Control signs shall not be used alone to effect a turn prohibition.

Guidance. If used, the Optional Movement Lane Control sign should be located overhead in advance of the intersection, such as near the upstream end of an adjacent mandatory movement lane, and/or overhead at the intersection where the regulation applies.

903.2.28 Advance Intersection Lane Control Signs (R3-8 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.30)

R3-8
R3-8a
R3-8b
R3-8xa
R3-8xb
R3-8xc

Option. Advance Intersection Lane Control (R3-8, R3-8a, and R3-8b) signs may be used to indicate the configuration of all lanes ahead.

The word message ONLY or the bicycle symbol, may be used within the border in combination with the arrow symbols of the R3-8 sign series.

Where a bicycle lane is between two general-purpose lanes the R3-8 series signs may be modified to show the bicycle lane with a white legend on a black background in accordance with designs of the R3-8x series signs (see EPG 914.2.2).

Guidance. When used, an Advance Intersection Lane Control sign should be placed at an adequate distance in advance of the intersection, either along the lane tapers or at the beginning of the turn lane so that road users can select the appropriate lane.

Option. An Advance Intersection Lane Control sign may be repeated closer to the intersection along the approach for additional emphasis.

Standard. An Advance Intersection Lane Control (R3-8 series) sign shall not be mounted at the far side of an intersection to which it applies.

Where three or more approach lanes are available to traffic, Advance Intersection Lane Control (R3-8 series) signs, if used, shall be post-mounted in advance of the intersection and shall not be mounted overhead.

903.2.29 Two-Way Left-Turn-Only Signs (R3-9a and R3-9b) and Plaques (MUTCD Section 2B.32)

R3-9a
R3-9b

Support. Missouri Statute 300.215, which governs two-way left turn lane movements states:

Designated two-way left turn lanes: Where a special lane for making left turns by drivers proceeding in opposite directions have been indicated by official traffic control devices:

A. A left turn shall not be made from any other lane;
B. A vehicle shall not be driven in the lane except when preparing for or making a left turn from or into the roadway or when preparing for or making a U-turn when otherwise permitted by law;
C. A vehicle shall not be driven in the lane for a distance more than five hundred feet.

Standard. Two-Way Left Turn Only (R3-9a) signs shall be used for overhead installation only. Center Lane Only (R3-9b) signs shall be post mounted installations.

Guidance. A Two-Way Left-Turn-Only (R3-9a or R3-9b) sign should be used in conjunction with the required pavement markings where a non-reversible lane is reserved for the exclusive use of left-turning vehicles in either direction and is not used for passing, overtaking, or through travel.

Option. The post-mounted R3-9b sign may be used as an alternate to or a supplement to the overhead R3-9a sign

Additional R3-9b signs may be installed after major intersections, or in situations that require additional emphasis of the proper use of this lane.

Support. Signing is especially helpful to drivers in areas where the two-way left-turn-only maneuver is new, in areas subject to environmental conditions that frequently obscure the pavement markings, and on peripheral streets with two-way left-turn-only lanes leading to an extensive system of routes with two-way left-turn-only lanes.

903.2.30 Jughandle Signs (R3-23, R3-24, R3-25, and R3-26 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.35)

Guidance. There are limited cases where these signs are applicable to the MoDOT system. Any use of these signs requires authorization from the Highway Safety and Traffic Division.


903.2.31 DO NOT PASS Sign (R4-1) (MUTCD Section 2B.36)

R4-1

Option. The DO NOT PASS (R4-1) sign may be used in addition to pavement markings (see EPG 620.2.3) to emphasize the restriction on passing. The DO NOT PASS sign may be used at one-lane bridges and work zones. Any other use of this sign requires authorization from the Highway Safety and Traffic Division.

Support. Standards for determining the location and extent of no-passing zone pavement markings are set forth in EPG 620.2.3.

Standard. PASS WITH CARE (R4-2) signs shall be used in conjunction with the DO NOT PASS sign.

903.2.32 PASS WITH CARE Sign (R4-2) (MUTCD Section 2B.37)

R4-2

Guidance. The PASS WITH CARE (R4-2) sign should be installed at the downstream end of a no-passing zone if a DO NOT PASS sign has been installed at the upstream end of the zone.

Standard. The PASS WITH CARE sign shall be the same size and shall be erected in the same manner as the DO NOT PASS (R4-1) sign.

903.2.33 KEEP RIGHT EXCEPT TO PASS Sign (R4-16) and SLOWER TRAFFIC KEEP RIGHT Sign (R4-3) (MUTCD Section 2B.38)

R4-3
R4-16

Option. The KEEP RIGHT EXCEPT TO PASS (R4-16) sign may be used on roadways where there are two lanes in one direction of travel to direct drivers to stay in the right-hand lane except when they are passing another vehicle.

Guidance. If used, the KEEP RIGHT EXCEPT TO PASS sign should be installed at or just beyond the beginning of a two-lane section of roadway and at selected locations along two-lane roadways where additional emphasis is needed.

Option. The SLOWER TRAFFIC KEEP RIGHT (R4-3) sign may be used on multi-lane through roadways to improve capacity or reduce unnecessary lane changing due to the presence of slower vehicles that impede the normal flow of traffic.

Standard. The SLOWER TRAFFIC KEEP RIGHT (R4-3) sign shall be required for climbing lanes.

Guidance. If used, the SLOWER TRAFFIC KEEP RIGHT sign should be installed at or just beyond the beginning of a multi-lane roadway section or at the beginning of an extra lane provided for trucks and/or other slow-moving traffic, and at selected locations where there is a tendency on the part of some road users to drive in the left-hand lane(or lanes) below the normal speed of traffic. These signs should not be used on the approach to an interchange or through an interchange area where traffic is entering or exiting, or along deceleration or acceleration lanes.

If an extra lane has been provided for trucks and other slow-moving traffic, a Lane Ends sign (see EPG 903.3.39) should be installed in advance of the point where the extra lane ends. Appropriate pavement markings should be installed at both the upstream and downstream ends of the extra lane (see EPG 620.2.14 and Figure 620.2.14 ).

903.2.34 Keep Right and Keep Left Signs (R4-7 Series and R4-8 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.39)

R4-7
R4-7a
R4-7b
R4-7c
R4-8
R4-8a
R4-8b
R4-8c

Option. The Keep Right (R4-7) sign may be used at locations where it is necessary for traffic to pass only to the right-hand side of a roadway feature or obstruction. The Keep Left (R4-8) sign may be used at locations where it is necessary for traffic to pass only to the left-hand side of a roadway feature or obstruction.

Guidance. At locations where it is not readily apparent that traffic is required to keep to the right, a Keep Right sign should be used.

Standard. If Keep Right signs are installed at the start of a median or at a median opening, they shall be placed as close as practicable to the approach ends of the medians, and shall be visible to traffic on the divided highway.

Guidance. If used, the Keep Right sign should be mounted on the face of or just in front of a pier or other obstruction separating opposite directions of traffic in the center of the highway such that traffic will have to pass to the right-hand side of the sign.

Where the approach end of the island channelizes traffic away from the approach direction, the word legend (R4-7a, R4-7b, R4-8a, or R4-8b) signs should be used instead of the symbol (R4-7 or R4-8) signs to emphasize the degree of curvature away from the approach direction (see Figure 903.2.34.1 ).

Where a two-lane, two-way highway transitions to a divided highway, the KEEP RIGHT (R4-7b) sign should be installed within 50 ft. of the gore point, if possible. The edge of the sign should be a minimum of 6 ft. from the curb or shoulder point.

Standard. The Keep Right (Left) sign shall not be installed on the right-hand (left-hand) side of the roadway in a position where traffic must pass to the left-hand (right-hand) side of the sign.

Option. The Keep Right sign may be omitted at intermediate ends of divisional islands and medians.

A narrow Keep Right (R4-7c) sign may be installed on the approach end of a median island that is less than 4 feet wide at the point where the sign is to be located.

Standard. A narrow Keep Right (R4-7c) sign shall not be installed on a median island that has a width of 4 feet or more at the point where the sign is to be located.

Option. The Keep Right sign may be installed in the median of a divided highway crossing that functions as a single intersection such that it is visible to traffic on the divided highway as shown in Figure 903.2.41.3 and Figure 903.2.41.4 .

Support. EPG 903.2.40 provides more information about the use of the Keep Right sign in combination with or in lieu of ONE-WAY signs at divided highway crossings.

Standard. The KEEP RIGHT (R4-7b) sign shall be installed as close to the median nose as possible where an undivided highway transitions into a divided highway.

Figure 903.2.34.1 Examples of Keep Right and Keep Left Sign Placement (Sheet 1 of 2)

Figure 903.2.34.2 Examples of Keep Right and Keep Left Sign Placement (Sheet 2 of 2)

903.2.35 DO NOT DRIVE ON SHOULDER Sign (R4-17) (MUTCD Section 2B.43)

R4-17

Option. The DO NOT DRIVE ON SHOULDER (R4-17) sign may be installed to inform road users that using the shoulder of a roadway as a travel lane is prohibited.

Guidance. The DO NOT DRIVE ON SHOULDER (R4-17) sign should be considered for special conditions if there is a need determined by district traffic engineering staff. The sign should be considered as a temporary tool to aid in the enforcement of the condition. After it appears the problem has been corrected, these signs should be removed.

Support. The R4-17 sign is to be used only where necessary. MoDOT does not want to set driver expectations for general use of this sign.

903.2.36 Selective Exclusion Signs and Plaques (MUTCD Section 2B.45)

R5-2
R5-2aP
R5-25
R5-29

Option. Selective Exclusion signs may be used to provide notice to road users that State or local statutes or ordinances exclude designated types of traffic from using particular roadways or facilities.

Standard. Selective Exclusion signs shall clearly indicate the type of traffic that is excluded.

Support. Typical exclusion messages include:

A. No Trucks (R5-2),
B. No Pedestrian Crossing (R9-3),
C. EXCEPT LOCAL DELIVERY (R5-2aP) plaque.
D. NO VENDING (R5-24)
E. NO FISHING FROM BRIDGE (R5-25)
F. AUTHORIZED AND EMERGENCY VEHICLES ONLY (R5-29)

Guidance. If an exclusion is governed by vehicle weight, a Weight Limit sign (see EPG 903.2.53) should be used instead of a Selective Exclusion sign.

The Selective Exclusion sign should be placed on the right-hand side of the roadway at an appropriate distance from the intersection so as to be clearly visible to all road users turning into the roadway that has the exclusion. The No Pedestrian Crossing (R9-3) sign (see EPG 903.2.46) should be installed so as to be clearly visible to pedestrians who are at a location where an alternative route is available.

Option. The No Pedestrian Crossing (R9-3) sign may also be used at underpasses or elsewhere where pedestrian facilities are not provided.

The EXCEPT LOCAL DELIVERY (R5-2aP) plaque may be mounted below the R5-2 sign.

The NO VENDING (R5-24) sign may be used at locations where vending is taking place within the right-of-way.

Standard. When used, the NO FISHING FROM BRIDGE (R5-25) sign shall be mounted at or near the bridge ends.

Option. The NO FISHING FROM BRIDGE (R5-25) sign may be used at locations where fishing from a bridge creates a safety hazard.

Guidance. The AUTHORIZED AND EMERGENCY VEHICLES ONLY (R5-29) sign should be used at emergency crossovers to prohibit vehicles from using the emergency crossover unless they have special permission (such as law enforcement vehicles or emergency vehicles) or are performing official business (such as highway agency vehicles).

The No U Turn sign should be installed above the AUTHORIZED AND EMERGENCY VEHICLES ONLY sign.

Signing for both directions of traffic should be provided on one post with the signs being installed 90 degrees to the roadway. The signs should be mounted back to back. The post should be located approximately in the middle of the median. If median width is greater than 60 ft., consideration should be given to install separate signs.

903.2.37 DO NOT ENTER Sign (R5-1) (MUTCD Section 2B.46)

R5-1

Standard. The DO NOT ENTER (R5-1) sign shall be used at the following locations:

A. Where a two-way roadway becomes a one-way roadway;
B. The intersection of an interchange exit ramp with a crossroad as specified in EPG 903.2.39 (see Figure 903.2.39.1);
C. The intersection of a channelized or turning roadway with a two-way undivided crossroad; and
D. Except as provided in the fourth paragraph of this article, an intersection with a divided highway (see Figure 903.2.37).

If the DO NOT ENTER sign is mounted behind a STOP or YIELD sign:

A. 36 x 36 inch DO NOT ENTER sign shall be used behind a 48 x 48 inch STOP sign; and
B. 30 x 30 inch. DO NOT ENTER sign shall be used behind a 60 x 60 inch YIELD sign.

Guidance. A DO NOT ENTER sign should be installed at other locations where additional emphasis is needed where wrong-way movements are prominent or where the intersecting angle of roadways is such that the visibility of ONE WAY signs alone does not sufficiently convey the restriction.

Option. A DO NOT ENTER sign may be omitted on a low-speed urban street that is a divided highway at a crossing that functions as two separate intersections.

Guidance. The DO NOT ENTER sign, if used, should be placed directly in view of a road user at the point where a road user could wrongly enter a divided highway, one-way roadway, or ramp. The sign should be mounted facing traffic that might enter the roadway or ramp in the wrong direction.

At a crossing with a divided highway; the sign, if used, should be placed on the outside edge side of the roadway facing traffic that might enter the roadway in the wrong direction.

If the DO NOT ENTER sign would be visible to traffic to which it does not apply, the sign should be turned away from, or shielded from, the view of that traffic.

A second DO NOT ENTER sign should be used, particularly where traffic approaches from an intersecting roadway (Figure 903.2.37).

EPG 903.1.12 contains the provisions for the use of continuously-operated or actuated LEDs to enhance the conspicuity of signs.

Figure 903.2.37 Locations of DO NOT ENTER and WRONG WAY Signing for Divided Highway Crossings that Function as Two Separate Intersections

903.2.38 WRONG WAY Sign (R5-1a) (MUTCD Section 2B.47)

R5-1a

Option. The WRONG WAY (R5-1a) sign may be used as a supplement to the DO NOT ENTER sign where a crossroad intersects a one-way roadway in a manner that does not physically discourage or prevent wrong-way entry (see Figure 903.2.37).

Guidance. If used, the WRONG WAY sign should be placed at a location along the one-way roadway farther from the crossroad than the DO NOT ENTER sign (see EPG 903.2.37).

The WRONG WAY sign should be placed on the same side of the road as the DO NOT ENTER sign.

Support. EPG 903.1.12 contains the provisions for the use of continuously-operated or actuated LEDs to enhance the conspicuity of signs.

903.2.39 Wrong-Way Traffic Control at Interchange Ramps (MUTCD Section 2B.48)

Standard. At interchange exit ramp terminals where the ramp intersects a crossroad in such a manner that wrong-way entry could inadvertently be made, the following signs shall be used (see Figure 903.2.39.1):

A. At least one ONE WAY sign for each direction of travel on the crossroad shall be placed where the exit ramp intersects the crossroad.
B. At least one DO NOT ENTER sign shall be conspicuously placed near the downstream end of the exit ramp in positions appropriate for full view of a road user starting to enter wrongly from the crossroad.
C. At least one WRONG WAY sign shall be placed on the exit ramp facing a road user traveling in the wrong direction.

Guidance. In addition, the following pavement markings should be used (see Figure 903.2.39.1):

A. On two-lane paved crossroads at interchanges, solid double yellow lines should be used as a center line for an adequate distance on both sides approaching the ramp intersections.
B. Where crossroad channelization or ramp geometrics do not make wrong-way movements difficult, a lane-use arrow should be placed in each lane of an exit ramp near the crossroad terminal where it will be clearly visible to a potential wrong-way road user.

Option. The following traffic control devices may be used to supplement the signs and pavement markings described in the first and second paragraphs of this article:

A. Additional ONE WAY signs may be placed, especially on two-lane rural crossroads, appropriately in advance of the ramp intersection to supplement the required ONE WAY sign(s).
B. Additional WRONG WAY signs may be used.
C. Slender, elongated wrong-way arrow pavement markings (see Figure 620.2.22.1) intended primarily to warn wrong-way road users that they are traveling in the wrong direction may be placed upstream from the ramp terminus (see Figure 903.2.39.1 ) to indicate the correct direction of traffic flow. Wrong-way arrow pavement markings may also be placed on the exit ramp at appropriate locations near the crossroad junction to indicate wrong-way movement.
D. Lane-use arrow pavement markings may be placed on the exit ramp and crossroad near their intersection to indicate the permissive direction of flow.
E. Lane control signs or movement prohibition signs may be used on the approaches to the exit ramp.
D. A Keep Right (R4-7 or R4-7c) may be used on a ramp median nose for wrong-way traffic control.

Guidance. On interchange entrance ramps where the ramp merges with the through roadway and the design of the interchange does not clearly make evident the direction of traffic on the separate roadways or ramps, a ONE WAY sign visible to traffic on the entrance ramp and through roadway should be placed on each side of the through roadway near the entrance ramp merging point.

Option. On interchange entrance ramps where the ramp merges with the through roadway and the design of the interchange does not clearly make evident the direction of traffic on the separate roadways or ramps a No Left Turn (R3-2) sign may be located on the left-hand side of the entrance ramp at the gore. If a No Left Turn (R3-2) sign is located on the left-hand side, a supplemental R3-2 sign may be installed on the right-hand side of the entrance ramp.

On interchange entrance ramps where the ramp merges with the through roadway and the design clearly indicates the direction of flow, a ONE WAY sign may be placed visible to traffic on the entrance ramp and/or a NO TURNS (R3-3) sign may be placed visible to traffic on the entrance ramp and through roadway at the gore area.

Support. EPG 903.2.37, EPG 903.2.38, and EPG 903.2.40 contain further information on signing to avoid wrong-way movements at at-grade intersections on expressways.

Figure 903.2.39.1. Example of Application of Regulatory Signing and Pavement Markings at an Exit Ramp Termination to Deter Wrong-Way Entry

Figure 903.2.39.2. Locations of Wrong-Way signing for Divided Highways with Offset Left Turn Lanes

Notes:
  1. Distances may be adjusted up to 20’ +/- based on engineering judgement
  2. 4”x72” red sign post delineators are optional
  3. MoDOT maintained signs shall not be installed on the back of non-MoDOT maintained signs
  4. See Figure 903.2.41.4 for ONE WAY signing for Divided Highways with Offset Left Turn Lanes

903.2.40 ONE WAY Signs (R6-1 and R6-2) (MUTCD Section 2B.49)

R6-1
R6-2

Standard. Except as provided in the sixth paragraph of this article, the ONE WAY (R6-1 or R6-2) sign shall be used to indicate streets or roadways upon which vehicular traffic is allowed to travel in one direction only.

ONE WAY signs shall be placed parallel to the one-way street at all alleys and roadways that intersect one-way roadways.

At the crossing of a roadway with a divided highway that functions as two separate intersections, ONE WAY signs shall be placed, visible to each crossroad approach, on the near right and far left corners of each intersection with the directional roadways (see Figures 903.2.41.1 and 903.2.41.2).

At the crossing of a roadway with a divided highway that functions as a single intersection Keep Right (R4-7) signs (see EPG 903.2.34) and/or ONE WAY signs shall be installed (see Figure 903.2.41.3 and Figure 903.2.41.4). If Keep Right signs are installed, they shall be placed as close as practicable to the approach ends of the medians and shall be visible to traffic on the divided highway as shown in Figure 903.2.41.3 and Figure 903.2.41.4. If ONE WAY signs are installed, they shall be placed on the near right and far left corners of the intersection and shall be visible to each crossroad approach.

Option. At the crossing of a roadway with a divided highway, regardless of function as a single or separate intersections, ONE WAY signs may also be placed on the far right corner of the intersection as shown in Figure 903.2.41.1, Figure 903.2.41.2, Figure 903.2.41.3 and Figure 903.2.41.4.

ONE WAY signs may be omitted on the one-way roadways of divided highways, where the design of interchanges indicates the direction of traffic on the separate roadways.

Support. EPG 903.2.39 contains information for the placement of ONE WAY signs at a crossroad with an interchange.

Standard. If used at unsignalized intersections with one-way streets, ONE WAY signs shall be placed on the near right and the far left corners of the intersection facing traffic entering or crossing the one-way street.

If used at signalized intersections with one-way streets, ONE WAY signs shall be placed near the appropriate signal faces, on the poles holding the traffic signals, on the mast arm or span wire holding the signals, or at the locations specified for unsignalized intersections.

At unsignalized T-intersections where the roadway at the top of the T-intersection is a one-way roadway, ONE WAY signs shall be placed on the near-right and the far side of the intersection facing traffic on the stem approach.

ONE WAY (R6-2) signs may be used in lieu of ONE WAY (R6-1) signs on mast arms for signals or where lateral space is limited.

Where the central island of a roundabout allows for the installation of signs, ONE WAY signs may be used to direct traffic counter-clockwise around the central island (see Figure 903.2.40.2 and Figure 903.2.40.3).

Guidance. Where used on the central island of a roundabout, the mounting height of a ONE WAY sign should be at least 4 feet, measured vertically from the bottom of the sign to the elevation of the near edge of the traveled way.

Figure 903.2.40.1 Example of Regulatory and Warning Signs for a Mini-Roundabout

Figure 903.2.40.2 Example of Regulatory and Warning Signs for a One-Lane Roundabout

Figure 903.2.40.3 Example of a Regulatory and Warning Signs for a Two-Lane Roundabout with Consecutive Double lefts

903.2.41 Divided Highway Crossing Signs (R6-3 and R6-3a) (MUTCD Section 2B.50)

R6-3
R6-3a

Standard. On unsignalized minor-street approaches from which both left turns and right turns are permitted onto a divided highway at a crossing that functions as two separate intersections (see EPG 903.1.23), a Divided Highway Crossing (R6-3 or R6-3a) sign shall be used to advise road users that they are approaching an intersection with a divided highway (see Figure 903.2.41.1 and Figure 903.2.41.2).

If a Divided Highway Crossing sign is used at a four-leg intersection, the R6-3 sign shall be used. If used at a T-intersection, the R6-3a sign shall be used.

The Divided Highway Crossing sign shall be located on the near right corner of the intersection, mounted beneath a STOP or YIELD sign or on a separate support.

The DIVIDED HIGHWAY (R6-3b) sign may be used in situations where the R6-3 or R6-3a Divided Highway Crossing signs may be confusing.

Figure 903.2.41.1 ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Median Widths Greater than 150 Feet

Figure 903.2.41.2 ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Median Widths of 60 Feet to 150 Feet

Figure 903.2.41.3 ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Median Widths Narrower Than 60 Feet

Figure 903.2.41.4 ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Offset Left Turn Lanes

903.2.42 Parking, Standing, and Stopping Signs (R7 and R8 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.52)

Support. Parking signs pertain to the parking, standing, and stopping of vehicles along the roadway and in designated parking areas. They cover a wide variety of regulations, and only general guidance can be provided here. The word “standing” when used on the R7 and R8 series of signs refers to the practice of a driver keeping the vehicle in a stationary position while continuing to occupy the vehicle. The word “stopping” when used on the R7 and R8 series signs refers to any vehicle, occupied by a driver or not, that stops other than to avoid conflict with other traffic or to comply with official direction. Other types of activities such as active loading, active passenger loading, and/or waiting might be established in State or local codes for use on R7 and R8 series signs.

Parking signs are categorized as either (1) prohibiting parking or (2) permitting parking with restrictions on how parking is allowed.

The types of parking, standing, or stopping prohibitions that might be encountered include, but are not limited to:

A. Prohibited at all times;
B. Prohibited only at certain times of the day and/or days of the week;
C. Prohibited with exceptions, such as for bus stops, loading/unloading zones, persons with disabilities, or electric vehicle charging stations; or
D. Prohibited under certain conditions, such as Snow Emergency Routes.

Permissive parking signs allowing parking with restrictions include, but are not limited to:

A. Parking only allowed for limited time duration (such as 30 minutes or for 1 hour);
B. Metered parking requiring payment at an individual or a multi-space parking meter, or through electronic means such as by telephone or mobile application.;
C. Parking only for specific persons (such as those with disabilities or patrons or employees of a business) or specific vehicle types (such as electric vehicles, police/government vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles, or taxis);
D. Angled or back-in angled parking when it is not commonly used in the area;
E. Parking programs such as neighborhood/residential permits, school areas, or special events; and
F. Emergency parking or stopping only.

The District Engineer is authorized to act on requests for parking restrictions within incorporated areas upon receipt of a city ordinance requesting the same.

Option. The District Engineer may authorize parking restrictions after completion of a study by the district staff and review by county and local law enforcement.

Within interchange areas and on ramps the standard NO PARKING ANYTIME (R7-1) sign may be used.

Guidance. Local law enforcement agencies should be consulted when determining if there is a need for no parking signs to be installed.

903.2.43 Design of Parking, Standing, and Stopping Signs (MUTCD Section 2B.53)

R7-1
R7-108
R7-111
R7-111a
R7-112
R7-112a
R7-112b
R7-113
R7-113aP
R7-113bP
R7-114a
R7-114b
R7-201P
R7-202P
R7-5
R7-8
R7-8aP
R7-35

Standard. Parking, standing, or stopping signs shall be rectangular.

Public agencies shall follow established law (State law, local ordinance, or regulation) as adopted by the authorized agency regarding what messages are allowed on parking signs.

The legend on parking signs shall state applicable regulations. Parking signs shall comply with the standards of shape, color, and location.

Prohibitive parking signs shall be used where parking is prohibited at all times or at specific times. Except as otherwise provided in this article, parking signs shall have a red legend and border on a white background and, when the parking prohibition symbol is used, the symbol “P” shall be black.

Permissive parking signs shall be used where only time-limited parking or parking in a particular manner is allowed. Permissive parking signs shall have a green legend and border on a white background.

Guidance. Parking information, should be displayed from top to bottom of the sign, as applicable, in the following order:

A. The restriction or prohibition;
B. The times of the day that it is applicable, if not all hours;
C. The days of the week that it is applicable, if not every day;
D. Qualifying or supplementary information;
E. Exemptions to the restriction of prohibition; and
F. Any tow-away message or symbol.

If the parking regulation applies to a limited area or zone, the limits of the regulation should be shown by arrows or supplemental plaques. If arrows are used and if the sign is at the end of a parking zone, there should be a single-headed arrow pointing in the direction that the regulation is in effect. If the sign is at an intermediate point in a zone, there should be a double-headed arrow pointing both ways. When a single sign is used at the transition point between two parking zones, it should display a right arrow and a left arrow pointing in the direction that the respective regulations apply.

Standard. The times and days for which the parking regulations are in effect shall be posted if they are not in effect at all times of day or all days of the week.

Option. As an alternate to the use of arrows to show designated restriction zones, the following word messages may be used: BEGIN, END, HERE TO CORNER, HERE TO ALLEY, and THIS SIDE OF SIGN.

Standard. Where parking spaces are reserved for persons with disabilities, the Accessible Parking (R7-8) sign shall be used to designate the space and shall display the official International Symbol of Accessibility.

Where parking spaces that are reserved for persons with disabilities are designed to accommodate wheelchair vans, a VAN ACCESSIBLE (R7-8aP) plaque shall be mounted below the R7-8 sign.

The RESERVED PARKING for Persons with Disabilities (R7-8) sign shall be installed in rest area parking lots 10 ft. to 16 ft. from the edge of the handicap ramp.

Support. The R7-8L has a left arrow and the R7-8R a right arrow. The R7-8 does not have an arrow.

Guidance. Where parking spaces are designated for parking of electric vehicles, an Electric Vehicle Parking (R7-111 series, R7-112 series, and R7-113) sign should be installed adjacent to the designated spaces. Where there is no time limit, the R7-111 series sign should be used. Where parking is subject to a time limit, the R7-112 series sign should be used.

Where parking spaces are only designated for charging of electric vehicles, an R7-113 sign or R7-114 series sign should be installed adjacent to the designated spaces.

Where additional restrictions apply while a vehicle occupies the designated space, the R7-113P series plaques should be installed below the R7-113 sign or the R7-114 series signs.

Option. A Tow-Away Zone (R7-201P or R7-201aP) plaque may be mounted below any parking prohibition sign. The word legend TOW-AWAY ZONE may be incorporated into the parking prohibition sign in lieu of using a separate plaque.

The R7-201P plaque may have a black or red symbol and border on a white background.

Guidance. When a legend other than that on the standard parking signs is necessary, letter height, symbol size, and basic sign layout should be consistent with the those shown on the standard parking signs as detailed in the FHWA “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)).

In general, the letter height of the principal legend on parking signs sized for urbanized applications should be at least 2 inches.

The NO PARKING ON BRIDGE sign (R7-35) should be used at bridge ends or on bridges where motorists tend to block or endanger through traffic by parking on the bridge.

903.2.44 Placement of Parking, Standing, and Stopping Signs (MUTCD Section 2B.54)

Support. The efficacy of parking, standing, and stopping signs, when used on conventional roads in urbanized or developed environments, depends on their visibility and consistent placement along a street or within a particular block. It is often impracticable for the entire legend to be legible from similar distances as for other types of signs. Therefore, it is important that their conventional form be recognizable from an adequate distance such that the road user can obtain the information upon closer inspection.

Guidance. When signs with arrows are used to indicate the extent of the restricted zones, the signs should be set at an angle of not less than 30 degrees nor more than 45 degrees with the line of traffic flow in order to be visible to approaching traffic.

When signs are placed at the head of perpendicular parking stalls, the signs should be parallel to the roadway facing the parking stall.

Spacing of signs should be based on legibility, conspicuity, and sign orientation.

If the zone is long, signs should be used at intermediate points within the zone.

If the signs are mounted at an angle of 90 degrees to the curb line, two signs should be mounted back to back at the transition point between two parking zones, each with an appended THIS SIDE OF SIGN (R7-202P) supplemental plaque.

If the signs are mounted at an angle of 90 degrees to the curb line, signs without any arrows or appended plaques should be used at intermediate points within a parking zone, facing in the direction of approaching traffic. Otherwise, the standards of placement should be the same as for signs using directional arrows.

Option. Blanket parking regulations that apply to an entire jurisdiction may, if legal, be posted in the vicinity of the jurisdictional boundary lines. Blanket parking regulations that apply to a posted zone or district may, if legal, be posted at the entry points to the zone or district.

903.2.45 Emergency Restriction Signs (R8-7) (MUTCD Section 2B.55)

R8-7

Standard. Emergency Restriction signs shall be rectangular and shall have a black legend and border on a white background.

Option. The EMERGENCY STOPPING ONLY (R8-7) sign may be used to discourage or prohibit shoulder parking on the interstate and other freeway highway systems based on the Missouri Revised Statutes, Section 304.024.

Guidance. The use of the EMERGENCY STOPPING ONLY sign should be held to a minimum and not erected unless there is a specific problem.

Support. EPG 913.2.7 contains information for the use of the DO NOT STOP ON TRACKS (R8-8) sign to discourage or prohibit parking or stopping on railroad or light rail transit tracks.

 

903.2.46 Pedestrian Crossing Signs (R9-3) (MUTCD Section 2B.57)

R9-3
R9-3a

Option. Pedestrian Crossing signs may be used to limit pedestrian crossing to specific locations.

Standard. If used, Pedestrian Crossing signs shall be installed to face pedestrian approaches.

Option. The No Pedestrian Crossing (R9-3) sign may be used to prohibit pedestrians from crossing a roadway at an undesirable location or in front of a school or other public building where a crossing is not designated.

The NO PEDESTRIAN CROSSING (R9-3a) word message sign may be used as an alternate to the R9-3 symbol sign.

Support. Pedestrians with vision disabilities might need features other than traffic control devices to provide effective communication of the prohibition of pedestrian crossing.

903.2.47 Traffic Signal Pedestrian and Bicyclist Actuation Signs (R10-3b, R10-3d, R10-3e, R10-4, and R10-25) (MUTCD Section 2B.58)

R10-3b
R10-3d
R10-3e
R10-4
R10-25

Standard. Where manual actuation of a traffic signal is required for pedestrians or bicyclists to call a signal phase to cross the roadway, traffic signal signs applicable to pedestrian actuation or bicyclist actuation shall be mounted immediately above or incorporated into the push button detector units (see EPG 902.9.5).

Support. Traffic signal signs applicable to pedestrians include:

A. Push Button for Walk Signal (R10-3 series), and
B. Push Button for Green Signal (R10-4 series).

Option. If the signalized intersection has push buttons but no pedestrian heads the PUSH BUTTON FOR GREEN SIGNAL (R10-4) sign may be used instead of the R10-3e and R10-3j signs.

Guidance. The finger in the push button symbol on the R10-4 sign should point in the same direction as the arrow on the sign.

Option. Where symbolic pedestrian signal indications are used, an educational sign (R10-3b) may be used at signalized intersections. The R10-3d educational sign may be used to inform pedestrians that the pedestrian clearance time is sufficient only for the pedestrian to cross to the median at locations where pedestrians cross in two stages using a median refuge island. The R10-3e educational sign may be used where countdown pedestrian signals have been provided.

The R10-3e sign shall be used with pre-timed pedestrian signals. For actuated pedestrian signal, the R10-3eL and R10-3eR shall be mounted immediately above or incorporated in pedestrian pushbutton units.

The R10-25 sign may be used where a push button detector has been installed for pedestrians to activate In-Roadway Warning Lights (see EPG 902.20) or flashing beacons that have been added to the pedestrian warning signs.

903.2.48 Traffic Signal Signs and Plaques (R10-5 through R10-23a) (MUTCD Section 2B.59)

R10-5
R10-6
R10-7
R10-10
R10-12
R10-12a
R10-13
R10-14
R10-14a
R10-14b
R10-15
R10-23
R10-23a

Option. To supplement traffic signal control, traffic signal (R10-5 through R10-30) signs may be used to regulate road users.

Traffic signal signs may be installed at certain locations to clarify signal control. Among the legends that may be used for this purpose are:

A. LEFT (RIGHT) ON GREEN ARROW ONLY (R10-5),
B. STOP HERE ON RED (R10-6) for observance of stop lines,
C. DO NOT BLOCK INTERSECTION (R10-7) for avoidance of traffic obstructions,
D. LEFT (RIGHT) TURN SIGNAL (R10-10),
E. U TURN SIGNAL (R10-10a) for exclusive control of a U-turn movement,
F. LEFT (RIGHT) TURN YIELD ON GREEN (symbolic circular green) (R10-12), and
G. LEFT (RIGHT) TURN YIELD ON FLASHING YELLOW ARROW (R10-12a).

Guidance. If used, the LEFT ON GREEN ARROW ONLY sign, the LEFT TURN SIGNAL sign, the LEFT TURN YIELD ON GREEN (symbolic circular green) sign, or the LEFT TURN YIELD ON FLASHING YELLOW ARROW sign should be located adjacent to the left-turn signal face.

Standard. The LEFT TURN SIGNAL (R10-10L) sign has been discontinued by MoDOT. These signs shall remain in place until the circular red indication is replaced with a red left arrow (see EPG 902.6.6 Signal Indications for Protected Only Mode Left-Turn Movements in a Separate Signal Face).

If an existing R10-10L is at the end of its service life, it shall be removed, and the circular red indication shall be replaced with a red left arrow.

Guidance. If used, the RIGHT ON GREEN ARROW ONLY sign, the RIGHT TURN SIGNAL sign, or the RIGHT TURN YIELD ON FLASHING YELLOW ARROW sign should be located adjacent to the right-turn signal face.

Option. If used, a U TURN SIGNAL (R10-10a) sign may be installed adjacent to the signal face that exclusively controls a U-turn movement.

Standard. The CROSSWALK—STOP ON RED (symbolic circular red) (R10-23) and STOP ON RED-YIELD ON FLASHING RED AFTER STOP (R10-23a) signs shall only be used in conjunction with pedestrian hybrid beacons (see EPG 902.10.2).

The EMERGENCY SIGNAL (R10-13) sign shall be used in conjunction with emergency-vehicle traffic control signals (see EPG 902.13.2).

The EMERGENCY SIGNAL—STOP ON FLASHING RED (R10-14 or R10-14a) sign shall be used in conjunction with emergency-vehicle hybrid beacons (see EPG 902.14.2).

Option. If needed for extra emphasis, a STOP HERE ON FLASHING RED (R10-14b) sign may be installed with an emergency-vehicle hybrid beacon.

Standard. The Left Turn Yield to Bicycles (R10-12b) sign shall be limited to applications where the conflicting bicyclist movement would be unexpected in direction, location, or similar condition that would tend to violate the expectation of a turning motorist.

Guidance. The Left Turn Yield to Bicycles sign should be located adjacent to the left-turn signal face.

Currently the R10-12b sign is not used by MoDOT. Contact the Highway Safety and Traffic division when considering the use of this sign.

Where conditions might warrant additional emphasis to drivers turning at a signalized intersection where potential pedestrian conflicts might not be readily apparent, a Turning Vehicles Yield to Pedestrians (R10-15) sign may be used.

The R10-15 series signs, where used, should be placed as follows:

A. On the near right corner of the signalized intersection for right-turning vehicles.
B. On the far left corner of the signalized intersection for the left-turning vehicles onto a two-way street.
C. On the near left corner of the signalized intersection for left-turning vehicles from a one-way street onto a one-way street.

903.2.49 No Turn on Red Signs (R10-11 and R10-30a) (MUTCD Section 2B.60)

R10-11

Standard. Where a right turn on a circular red signal indication (or a left turn on a circular red signal indication from a one-way street to a one-way street) is to be prohibited, a NO TURN ON RED (R10-11) word message sign shall be used.

The NO TURN ON RED (R10-11) sign shall be used to prohibit a right turn on red.

Guidance. If used, the No Turn on Red sign should be installed near the appropriate signal head.

A No Turn on Red sign should be considered when an engineering study finds that one or more of the following conditions exists:

A. Inadequate sight distance to vehicles approaching from the left (or right, if applicable);
B. Geometrics or operational characteristics of the intersection that might result in unexpected conflicts;
C. An exclusive pedestrian or bicycle phase;
D. An unacceptable number of conflicting pedestrian movements with right-turn-on-red maneuvers, especially involving children, older pedestrians, or persons with disabilities;
E. More than three right-turn-on-red crashes reported in a 12-month period for the particular approach; or
F. The skew angle of the intersecting roadways creates difficulty for drivers to see traffic approaching from their left (or right, if applicable).

Standard. If an R10-11 sign with conventional road size as shown in Table 903.2.3 is used on an approach on the far side of the intersection and the distance between the stop line and the sign is greater than 120 feet, then a duplicate sign shall be located on the near side of the intersection to supplement the sign on the far side of the intersection.

Except as provided by the option below, if right turn on red (RTOR) is restricted, then the NO TURN ON RED (R10-11) sign shall be used in lieu of the RIGHT TURN SIGNAL sign.

Guidance. If used, the NO TURN ON RED sign should mounted adjacent to the far right signal indication. Refer to EPG 902.6.13 to determine when a NO TURN ON RED sign should be considered.

Option. Where space is limited, the square-shaped NO TURN ON RED (R10-11b) sign may be used instead of the R10-11 sign.

When a no-turn-on-red restriction applies during certain time periods only, the following alternatives may be used:

A Movement Prohibition (R3-1, R3-2, R3-4, R3-18, and R3-27) signs or NO TURN ON RED signs displayed by using a blank-out sign for the time period or one or more portion(s) of a particular cycle of the traffic control signal during which the prohibition is applicable; or

White LEDs may be used in the border and activated during periods of turn prohibition to enhance the sign conspicuity.

A RIGHT TURN ON RED MUST YIELD TO U-TURN (R10-30) sign may be installed to remind road users that they must yield to conflicting U-turn traffic on the street or highway onto which they are turning right on a red signal after stopping.

A RIGHT TURN MUST YIELD TO U-TURN (R10-30a) sign may be installed under a yield sign to remind road users that they must yield to conflicting U-turn traffic on the street or highway on to which they are turning right controlled by a yield sign.

903.2.50 Ramp Metering Signs (R10-28 and R10-29) (MUTCD Section 2B.61)

R10-28
R10-29

Option. When ramp control signals (see EPG 902.16) are used to meter traffic on a freeway or expressway entrance ramp, regulatory signs with legends appropriate to the control may be installed adjacent to the ramp control signal faces.

For entrance ramps with only one controlled lane, an XX VEHICLE(S) PER GREEN (R10-28) sign may be used to inform road users of the number of vehicles that are permitted to proceed during each short display of the green signal indication. For entrance ramps with more than one controlled lane, an XX VEHICLE(S) PER GREEN EACH LANE (R10-29) sign may be used to inform road users of the number of vehicles that are permitted to proceed from each lane during each short display of the green signal indication.

Support. EPG 903.12 contains provisions for the use of blank-out or changeable message signs when the metering is limited by time, day, or condition.

903.2.51 KEEP OFF MEDIAN Sign (R11-1) (MUTCD Section 2B.62)

R11-1

Option. The KEEP OFF MEDIAN (R11-1) sign may be used to prohibit driving into or parking on the median.

Guidance. The KEEP OFF MEDIAN sign should be installed on the left-hand side of the roadway within the median at random intervals as needed wherever there is a tendency for encroachment.

Support. A median is the area between two roadways of a divided highway measured from edge of travel way to edge of travel way or the area between a highway and an outer road.

903.2.52 ROAD CLOSED Sign (R11-2) and LOCAL TRAFFIC ONLY Signs (R11-3 and R11-4) (MUTCD Section 2B.63)

R11-2
R11-3
R11-4

Guidance. The ROAD CLOSED (R11-2) sign should be installed where roads have been closed to all traffic (except authorized vehicles).

ROAD CLOSED—LOCAL TRAFFIC ONLY (R11-3) or ROAD CLOSED TO THRU TRAFFIC (R11-4) signs should be used where through traffic is not permitted, or for a closure some distance beyond the sign, but where the highway is open for local traffic up to the point of closure.

Standard. The Road Closed (R11-2, R11-3, and R11-4) signs shall be designed as horizontal rectangles. These signs shall be preceded by the applicable Advance Road Closed warning sign with the secondary legend AHEAD and, if applicable, an Advance Detour warning sign (see EPG 616.8.4).

903.2.53 Weight Limit Sign (R12-1) (MUTCD Section 2B.64)

R12-1

Support. In 2022, a new load posting policy was implemented by MoDOT in the EPG. This new policy resulted from a plan of corrective action with FHWA. With this new policy, all structures on the national bridge inventory will be categorized under this new policy within the next 10 years. There are 10,387 structures on the state system. 270 of these structures are major or unusual structures and these will be categorized over the next 10 years. The remaining 10,117 structures consist of 6,940 normal bridges and 3,177 culverts. The normal bridges will be categorized in the next 4 years and the culverts will be reviewed in the last 3 years of the 10 year timeline of the plan. The R12-1 sign remains in use, with the remaining MoDOT bridge posting signs being replaced by one of three new bridge posting signs in this article.

Standard. Weight limit signs shall be used to indicate a structure that has a vehicle weight restriction.

Guidance. The units shown on any weight limit sign should be tons.

Standard. Weight limit signs shall be installed in accordance with the new bridge posting classifications once completed.

A weight limit sign shall be located at the applicable structure in accordance with (see Table 903.2.53 and Figures 903.2.53.1 to 903.2.53.3).

An additional weight limit sign, with an advisory distance or directional legend, shall be located in advance of the applicable section of highway or structure so that prohibited vehicles can detour or turn around prior to the limit zone.

In commercial zones, bridges with the capacity of more the 65 tons shall not be posted, as normally loads in excess of 65 tons will not occur.

Once a bridge has been categorized, the bridge posting signs shall be updated within 30 days of the bridge posting reclassification. This includes installing the correct sign and configuring the sign locations to match the appropriate bridge posting figure (see Figures 903.2.53.1 to 903.2.53.3).

Support. If existing weight limit signs need to be replaced prior to a bridge being categorized, contact Highway Safety and Traffic Division, Signing Section, for guidance.

Table 903.2.53, Listing of Bridge Posting Categories
Statewide Legal Load Posting Gross Weight Categories
Classification Category Description Sign Verbiage Sign Figure
Normal Legal SW-1 No Posting Required N/A N/A N/A
Normal Legal SW-2 General Gross Weight Limit Weight Limit XX Tons R12-1 903.5.36.1
Normal Legal SW-3 Single Unit Vehicle Gross Weight Limit Weight Limit Single Unit XX Tons R12-12 903.5.36.1
Normal Legal SW-4 Combination Vehicle Gross Weight Limit Weight Limit Combination XX Tons R12-13 903.5.36.1
Normal Legal SW-5 Single Unit Vehicle and Combination Vehicle Gross Weight Limits Weight Limit Single Unit XX Tons Combination XX Tons R12-14 903.5.36.1

Statewide Legal Load Posting Centerline Restriction with Gross Weight Categories
Classification Category Description Sign Verbiage Sign Figure
Lane Restricted LR-1 Lane Restriction Only N/A N/A 903.5.36.3
Lane Restricted LR-2 Lane Restriction with General Gross Weight Limit Weight Limit XX Tons R12-1 903.5.36.2
Lane Restricted LR-3 Lane Restriction with Single Unit Vehicle Gross Weight Limit Weight Limit Single Unit XX Tons R12-12 903.5.36.2
Lane Restricted LR-4 Lane Restriction with Combination Vehicle Gross Weight Limit Weight Limit Combination XX Tons R12-13 903.5.36.2
Lane Restricted LR-5 Lane Restriction with Single Unit Vehicle and Combination Vehicle Gross Weight Limits Weight Limit Single Unit XX Tons Combination XX Tons R12-14 903.5.36.2

Commercial Zone Areas Gross Weight Categories
Classification Category Description Sign Verbiage Sign Figure
Commercial Zone CZ-1 No Posting Required N/A N/A N/A
Commercial Zone CZ-2 General Gross Weight Limit Weight Limit XX Tons R12-1 903.5.36.1
Commercial Zone CZ-3 Single Unit Vehicle Gross Weight Limit Weight Limit Single Unit XX Tons R12-12 903.5.36.1
Commercial Zone CZ-4 Combination Vehicle Gross Weight Limit Weight Limit Combination XX Tons R12-13 903.5.36.1
Commercial Zone CZ-5 Single Unit Vehicle and Combination Vehicle Gross Weight Limits Weight Limit Single Unit XX Tons Combination XX Tons R12-14 903.5.36.1

Other Miscellaneous Load Posting Categories
Classification Category Description Sign Verbiage Sign Figure
Fire Truck FT-1 General Gross Weight Limit for Emergency Vehicles Included in the FAST Act, Federal Reauthorization Bill Weight Limit XX Tons R12-1 903.5.36.1
Closed Bridge K-CD Closed to All Traffic N/A N/A N/A
Closed Bridge K-CIF Closed to All Traffic as the Result of a Critical Inspection Finding N/A N/A N/A
Other OT-1 For Local Agency Bridges that have Signage that Doesn't Fit the Normal Legal, Lane Restricted, or Commercial Zone Categories N/A N/A N/A

A horizontal segment of roadway is shown. The middle of the roadway segment is illustrated to be crossing a bridge. The centerline of the roadway is a single dashed yellow line with one lane in each direction. On either side of the bridge, a WEIGHT LIMIIT SIGN is posted, facing the oncoming traffic. At the top of the figure are 4 different Weight Limit sign faces with a table below. These sign faces and the table are to help indicate what sign type and size to use at the beginning of a bridge crossing. The signs faces included in the table are R12-1, R12-12, R12-13, and R12-14.
Figure 903.2.53.1 Weight Limit Restrictions

A horizontal segment of roadway is shown. The middle of the roadway segment is illustrated to be crossing a bridge. The centerline of the roadway is a double solid yellow line with one lane in each direction. Multiple sign faces are shown at varying distances on either side of the brdige, facing ocoming traffic. These signs include a W5-3, W12-1, W3-2, and a R1-2 sign. At the top of the figure are 4 different Weight Limit sign faces with a table below. These sign faces and the table are to help indicate what sign type and size to use at the beginning of a bridge crossing. The signs faces included in the table are R12-1, R12-12, R12-13, and R12-14. There is a note to "See EPG 903.3.72 for placement of Type 3 Object Markers" in the bottom right corner of the figure.
Figure 903.2.53.2 One Lane Bridge Weight and Width Restrictions

A horizontal segment of roadway is shown. The middle of the roadway segment is illustrated to be crossing a bridge. The centerline of the roadway is a double solid yellow line with one lane in each direction. Multiple sign faces are shown at varying distances on either side of the brdige, facing ocoming traffic. These signs include a W5-3,, W3-2, and a R1-2 sign. There is a note to "See EPG 903.3.72 for placement of Type 3 Object Markers" in the bottom right corner of the figure.
Figure 903.2.53.3 One Lane Bridge Width Restrictions

903.2.54 Weigh Station Sign (R13 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.65)

R13-11
R13-15P
R13-16

Standard. The BUSES WEIGH sign (R13-11) should be used at all weigh stations to supplement the standard weigh station signing.

Guidance. The OPEN-CLOSED plaque (R13-15P) should be installed below all WEIGH STATION RIGHT LANE signs whenever an automatic OPEN-CLOSED sign has not been provided.

The BEFORE PULLING ON SCALE (R13-16) sign should be installed just to the right of the weigh scale and immediately in front thereof. A 30 in. STOP sign should be mounted above the sign.

903.2.55 TRUCK ROUTE Sign (R14-1) (MUTCD Section 2B.66)

R14-1

Guidance. The TRUCK ROUTE (R14-1) sign should be used to mark a route that has been designated to allow truck traffic.

903.2.56 Photo Enforced Signs and Plaques (R10-18a and R10-19P) (MUTCD Section 2B.69)

R10-18a
R10-19P

Option. A Signal Ahead (W3-3) sign and a Traffic Signal Photo Enforced (R10-18a) sign may be used on the same approach provided that they are on separate supports.

A Photo Enforced (R10-19P) plaque may be mounted below a regulatory sign to advise road users that the regulation is being enforced by photographic equipment.

Standard. The Traffic Signal Photo Enforced (R10-18a) sign shall be used on approaches to signalized locations where red-light cameras are present.

The Traffic Signal Photo Enforced (R10-18a) sign shall not be installed on approaches to signalized locations where red-light cameras are not present on any of the approaches to the signalized location.

A Traffic Signal Photo Enforced (R10-18a) sign shall not be installed on the same support in combination with a Signal Ahead (W3-3) sign.

If used below a regulatory sign, the Photo Enforced (R10-19P) plaque shall be a rectangle with a black legend and border on a white background.

Support. For more information about photo enforcement requirements, see EPG 950.

903.2.57 STATE LAW MOVE OVER OR SLOW DOWN FOR STOPPED EMERGENCY VEHICLES Sign (R16-25) (MUTCD Section 2B.71)

R16-25

Support. The STATE LAW MOVE OVER OR SLOW DOWN FOR STOPPED EMERGENCY VEHICLES (R16-25) sign is used to inform motorists of Missouri Revised Statutes 304.022, which requires motorists to drive with caution when approaching stopped emergency vehicles.

Guidance. The STATE LAW MOVE OVER OR SLOW DOWN FOR STOPPED EMERGENCY VEHICLES sign should be installed on Interstates entering the state at the state line. The location of the sign should be as close to the state line as possible and placed at the discretion of MoDOT.

Option. Additional STATE LAW MOVE OVER OR SLOW DOWN FOR STOPPED EMERGENCY VEHICLES signs may be installed on U.S. routes entering the state where there are no adjacent interstates and rest areas at the request of the Missouri State Highway Patrol.

Standard. Requests for additional signs shall be forwarded to the appropriate district engineer for approval. These signs shall only be installed on divided highways. The installation of this sign shall not interfere with or detract from any other regulatory, warning, or guide signs.

903.2.58 Headlight Use Signs (R16-5a) (MUTCD Section 2B.73)

Support. The HEADLIGHTS ON WHEN WIPERS ARE REQUIRED (R16-5a) sign, supported by RSMo 307.020 in 2004, was developed to inform motorists of the new law directing them to turn on headlights when wipers are on and during inclement weather. The use of these signs has been discontinued as the law has been in place for more than 15 years and many vehicles come equipped with headlights that turn on when wipers are activated. Existing signs are to be removed at the end of their sign life.

903.2.59 Seat Belt Symbol (MUTCD Section 2B.74)

R16-30

Guidance. The seat belt symbol should not be used alone. If used, the seat belt symbol should be incorporated into regulatory sign messages for mandatory seat belt use.

Support. The seat belt symbol is illustrated in the FHWA “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)).

Guidance. The R16-2, R16-3, R16-24, R16-27, and R16-27a seatbelt signs have been discontinued. These signs should remain in place to the end of their service life.

The STATE LAW BUCKLE UP PHONE DOWN (R16-30) sign should be installed at the end of the on ramp of rest areas and Missouri Welcome Centers on the interstate system. The STATE LAW BUCKLE UP PHONE DOWN (R16-30a) sign should be installed on Interstate and U.S. Routes at the state line entering Missouri. Neither sign should be installed at any other location along a roadway.

Support. A growing number of cities and counties are passing local ordinances to make seat belt usage a primary law in their communities. To promote the use of seat belts a PRIMARY SEAT BELT CITY / COUNTY - ORDINANCE sign may be installed by MoDOT upon request.

Standard. If a city/county has an established primary seat belt ordinance, MoDOT will install PRIMARY SEAT BELT CITY / COUNTY - ORDINANCE signs upon request once a copy of the ordinance has been received. When the PRIMARY SEAT BELT CITY / COUNTY - ORDINANCE is installed they shall be mounted to the right of the city limit sign or the entering county line sign.

Option. If insufficient space is available to mount the assembly to the right of these signs, the assembly shall be installed 200 ft. downstream of the city limit or county line signs at the appropriate sign spacing.

903.2.60 Barricades (MUTCD Section 2B.75)

Option. Barricades may be used to mark any of the following conditions:

A. The end of a roadway,
B. A ramp or lane that is closed for operational purposes, or
C. The permanent or semi-permanent closure or termination of a roadway.

Standard. When used to warn and alert road users of the terminus of a roadway, other than in temporary traffic control zones, barricades shall meet the design criteria of EPG 616.11.7 for a Type 3 Barricade, except that the colors of the stripes shall be retroreflective white and retroreflective red.

Option. An end-of-roadway marker or markers may be used as described in EPG 903.3.73.

Guidance. Appropriate advance warning signs (see EPG 903.3) should be used.

903.2.61 NO PARKING ALL TRAILERS AND TRUCKS OVER 6 TONS (R7-36)

R7-36

Standard. NO PARKING ALL TRAILERS AND TRUCKS OVER 6 TONS (R7-36) signs shall be placed in each commuter parking lot. A sign shall be installed at or near each entrance of the commuter parking lot.

Support. This parking restriction is necessary because commuter lots have been used by commercial trailers and trucks for extended periods of parking.

903.2.62 STOP FOR SCHOOL BUS SIGN (R16-26)

Standard. The STOP FOR SCHOOL BUS (R16-26) sign has been discontinued. MoDOT shall no longer provide STOP FOR SCHOOL BUS (R16-26) signs. Existing STOP FOR SCHOOL BUS (R16-26) signs shall be left in place until they reach the end of their service life.

903.2.63 Other Regulatory Signs

Option. Regulatory word message signs other than those classified and specified in the EPG and the federal Standard Highway Signs and Markings book may be developed to aid the enforcement of other laws or regulations.

Except for symbols on regulatory signs, minor modifications in the design may be permitted provided that the essential appearance characteristics are met.

Standard. Special regulatory signs shall be approved by the State Highway Safety and Traffic Engineer.

903.2.64 Engine Brake Muffler Required Signing

R5-23

History. MoDOT once had a NOISE ORDINANCE ENFORCED policy which was developed to address cities’ requests to install NO JAKE BRAKE signing. These requests were generated when a community experienced excessive noise related to improperly installed/operated engine braking systems on commercial vehicles. Jake brakes, or engine braking systems, are safety features of commercial vehicles. MoDOT was not willing to post signs on state routes which prohibited the use of these safety devices. However, to address the increasing requests for signing, MoDOT did permit the installation of NOISE ORDINANCE ENFORCED signs if a city passed an appropriate ordinance. This program was replaced with the current ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLERS REQUIRED signing in January 2022. This change was designed to address shortcomings of the noise ordinance signing program, which included difficulty in enforcing a noise level and noise ordinances which did not contain language relevant to engine braking noise levels. The current program is based on the direction other states have taken, focusing on the physical equipment on a commercial vehicle which can be more easily inspected and evaluated for deficiencies. This signing program is also targeting the primary concern of excessive noise from engine braking.

Support. Commercial vehicles are commonly equipped with an engine braking system. These systems supplement the vehicle’s mechanical brakes aiding in slowing these heavy vehicles safely. These safety systems, when not properly installed, can create excessive noise which many communities find objectionable. MoDOT does not permit regulatory signs which prohibit the use of these safety devices, however, the ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLERS REQUIRED signing conveys to truck drivers they must use these safety devices in an appropriate manner.

Option. If a community experiences issues with excessive noise from improperly used and installed engine braking systems on commercial vehicles, they can pass an ordinance and request MoDOT to install ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLERS REQUIRED signing at their city limit sign locations. MoDOT will install and maintain these signs with only a copy of the ordinance for our records, no fee or contract is involved. A jurisdiction can pass an ordinance specifically related to engine braking or include the language as part of another ordinance, such as a noise ordinance.

Standard. Before MoDOT will install ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLERS REQUIRED signing, a city must pass an appropriate ordinance which will be approved and kept on file by CO Highway Safety and Traffic. The ordinance shall include the following language:

Engine compression braking devices on any commercial vehicle, as defined in Missouri Revised Statute RSMo Section 301.010, may only be used within the city limits of [CITY NAME] if the truck is equipped with an adequate muffler (factory muffler or equivalent aftermarket muffler) which is properly maintained to prevent any excessive or unusual noise. If the truck’s exhaust system is equipped with a muffler cut-off, bypass, or similar device, that device shall not be activated when the engine brake is being utilized. Unmuffled engine braking system shall only be utilized within the city limits by commercial motor vehicles in emergency situations to protect life or property. Engine braking systems on rescue vehicles, city and state vehicles are exempt from this ordinance if used in the performance of official duties.

ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLER REQUIRED signing shall only be installed at the city limit location.

ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLER REQUIRED signing shall not be installed on freeways or expressways within the city limits where the posted speed limit is 45 mph or greater due to the critical need for the device at higher speeds.

Existing NOISE ORDINANCE ENFORCED signs shall be removed at the end of the signs’ service life, with no new NOISE ORDINANCE ENFORCED signs being installed after January 2022.

Individual sign installation locations can be denied by MoDOT if engineering judgement determines the prohibition would negatively impact safety, such as on long steep grades or abrupt/unexpected approaches to intersections.

Option. If the city limit on a freeway or expressway is within a posted speed limit of 45 mph or greater and the posted speed limit on that route drops to 40 mph or less, the ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLER REQUIRED sign may be installed adjacent to the speed limit sign where the speed limit drops below 45 mph.

At the end of a NOISE ORDINANCE ENFORCED sign’s life, or before, a city may request the new ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLER REQUIRED signing once the appropriate ordinance is passed.

If there is insufficient space to the right of the city limit sign to place the ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLER REQUIRED sign, it may be installed 200 ft. downstream of the city limit sign.

903.2.65 Regulatory Signs For Trash/Dumping (R5-26, R5-28)

R5-28

Standard. The NO DUMPING sign (R5-28) shall be erected only at locations where the Department of Natural Resources has given us written notice that solid waste is being disposed of on highway right of way. NO MORE TRASH signs (R5-26) are not typically installed along MoDOT roadways. NO MORE TRASH signs (R5-26) should only be installed at commuter lots, rest areas or roadside parks. NO MORE TRASH signs shall only be installed along the roadway if a major liter issue has been identified and the sign is needed for enforcement purposes. Existing NO MORE TRASH signs (R5-26) shall be left in place until they reach the end of their service life.

903.2.66 Regulation Signs For Roadside Parks and Commuter Parking Lots (R20-1)

R20-1

Support. Regulation signs are displayed at MoDOT maintained roadside parks and commuter parking lots to convey the rules and regulations pertaining to each type of facility.

Guidance. A minimum of one regulation sign should be installed at each MoDOT maintained roadside park and commuter parking lot, with the sign(s) being installed in centralized location(s) where the sign will be within normal sight of visitors once they leave their vehicles.

903.2.67 Rest Area Regulatory Signing (R20-2, R20-3, R20-4)

R20-2
R20-3
R20-4

Guidance. The REST AREA MAINTAINED BY (R20-3) sign should be installed in a prominent area along the entrance ramp to the rest area, preferably in the gore area separating truck / car traffic.

Standard. The TRUCKS-CARS (R20-4) sign shall be installed at the gore point inside the rest area to direct various vehicles to the appropriate parking lot.

A minimum of three REST AREA REGULATIONS (R20-2) signs shall be installed at each rest area.

The REST AREA MAINTAINED BY (R20-3) sign shall be installed at all rest areas to inform the public who is responsible to maintain the facility prior to the gore point.

903.2.68 Access Management Signing (R21-1 through R21-5)

Standard. ACCESS MANAGEMENT (R22-1 through R22-5) signs have been discontinued. MoDOT shall no longer provide ACCESS MANAGEMENT (R22-1 through R22-5) signs. Existing ACCESS MANAGEMENT (R22-1 through R22-5) signs shall be left in place until they reach the end of their service life.

903.2.69 Trucks and Buses 300 Ft Interval Sign (R4-30)

Standard. TRUCKS AND BUSES (R4-30) signs have been discontinued. MoDOT shall no longer provide TRUCKS AND BUSES (R4-30) signs. Existing TRUCKS AND BUSES (R4-30) signs shall be left in place until they reach the end of their service life.

903.2.70 FINES DOUBLED ENDS Sign (R2-20)

R2-20

Support. The FINES DOUBLED ENDS (R2-20) sign is not to be used on a system-wide basis. It is part of a signing package intended for special use at locations where severe crashes are occurring. There is a requirement for regional support to focus a safety campaign involving local law enforcement and public information efforts to reduce the number and severity of crashes within the travel safe zone (see EPG 907.3.2).

Standard: A FINES DOUBLED ENDS sign shall be used to mark the end of a designated travel safe zone. This sign is installed in conjunction with the TRAVEL SAFE ZONE – FINES DOUBLED (W26-1) sign.

Retrieved from "https://epgtest.modot.org/index.php?title=903.2_Regulatory_Signs_and_Barricades_(MUTCD_Chapter_2B)&oldid=61272"